Title: The Invention of Lithography
Author: Senefelder, Alois
Language: English
As this book started as an ASCII text book there are no pictures available.


*** Start of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "The Invention of Lithography" ***


             By Alois Senefelder

     Translated from the Original German
               by J. W. MULLER

        THE INVENTION OF LITHOGRAPHY

          Cloth 4to $5.00 Postpaid

     THE FUCHS & LANG MANUFACTURING CO.

                  NEW YORK



        THE INVENTION OF LITHOGRAPHY

         [Illustration: SENEFELDER]



              THE INVENTION OF
                 LITHOGRAPHY

                     BY

              ALOIS SENEFELDER

                 TRANSLATED
         FROM THE ORIGINAL GERMAN BY

                J. W. MULLER

               [Illustration]

         NEW YORK: THE FUCHS & LANG
            MANUFACTURING COMPANY
                    1911



              COPYRIGHT, 1911,
  BY THE FUCHS & LANG MANUFACTURING COMPANY
             NEW YORK AND LONDON

    _Entered at Stationers' Hall, London_



TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE


Alois Senefelder, not only the inventor, but the father and perfecter of
Lithography, wrote this story of his life and his invention in 1817. The
translator has followed his style closely, because he felt that the
readers would prefer to have this English edition represent Senefelder's
original German faithfully.

When Senefelder wrote, he had to invent many names for the processes,
manipulation-methods, and tools. These terms have been translated
literally even where modern practice has adopted other names.

The original German edition carried the following title-page:--

    "COMPLETE | TEXT-BOOK OF STONE-PRINTING | CONTAINING | A CORRECT
    AND LUCID INSTRUCTION | FOR ALL | VARIOUS MANIPULATIONS IN ALL
    ITS BRANCHES AND METHODS | AND ALSO A | FULL HISTORY OF THIS ART
    | FROM ITS ORIGIN TO THE PRESENT DAY. | WRITTEN AND PUBLISHED |
    BY THE INVENTOR OF LITHOGRAPHY AND CHEMICAL PRINTING, | ALOIS
    SENEFELDER. | WITH A PREFACE BY THE GENERAL-SECRETARY OF THE
    ROYAL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES IN | MUNICH, THE DIRECTOR | FRIEDERICH
    VON SCHLICHTEGROLL | MUNICH, 1821 | OBTAINABLE FROM THE AUTHOR
    AND FROM E. A. FLEISCHMANN" |

The book was dedicated by Senefelder to Maximilian Joseph, then King
of Bavaria.

_July, 1911._

    J. W. M.



PREFACE


A book like this requires no preface; it makes its own way, supported by
its contents. But the famous author deems that his acquaintance with me
gave him the direct impulse for producing this work, which has been
desired so long and from all sides; and he wishes that I shall say
something about the history of its production. I seize the opportunity
gladly to prove the esteem and the friendship that the talent of this
honorable contemporary and fellow countryman, a talent combined with the
utmost ambition and with childlike good nature and unselfishness, have
inspired in me.

One may not declare that his contemporaries showed indifference to the
invention of lithography to which his fortunate star led Herr Alois
Senefelder, and to the improvements that he sought with thousands of
experiments and restless labor. On the contrary, the invention has
spread itself with surprising speed through Europe and beyond, and has
been received with admiration everywhere. But the lack of proper
instruction, due to the many who had learned it only partially and
introduced it only for the sake of a small, passing profit, has hampered
its perfect success.

Therefore the inventor, who, happily, still lives among us, has been
urged from near and far to tell the story of his important, many-sided
discovery, and to give instructions for its use, that is, to produce
such a work as is before us now.

But the artistic genius, full of his subject, would far rather work,
experiment, strive, than write! Many times Herr Senefelder decided to
set down how he happened on this art, how the successive steps of its
development were reached, and at what point of development its various
processes now stand; but always his ceaselessly striving spirit showed
him something new that might be achieved, and forced him back again into
his element,--experimentation.

Thus the "Pattern Book," begun in 1809, remained unfinished and without
text; and the other work, announced two years ago by Herr Andre, in
Offenbach, as being undertaken by him with Herr Alois Senefelder, hardly
would have seen the light.

A forceful impetus from without was needed to compel Herr Senefelder to
fulfill the general request of the public. It came as follows. Many
statements in print attracted my attention. They credited the invention
of lithography to Paris, to London; and in Munich there were various
contradictory legends, some alleging that Herr Alois Senefelder had made
the very first experiments and others crediting them to Herr Schmidt in
Miesbach, at that time Professor in Munich. I considered it my duty to
clear away this uncertainty and to prepare a critical history of this
invention while it still was possible.

The weekly _Anzeiger für Kunst und Gewerbfleiss_ in the kingdom of
Bavaria, which has appeared since 1815, exists for the purpose of
producing annals of the art and industrial history of Bavaria.
Therefore, toward the end of 1816 and early in 1817, I inserted some
letters about the invention of lithography and called on all friends of
native art history to point out any inaccuracies and send proofs to the
contrary, that the truth might thus be ascertained about a subject of
great literary value for this generation and for posterity. More than
all, I urged Herr Alois Senefelder, then absent, "to produce a detailed
history of his invention as soon as possible, with a text-book
embellished by specimen plates, in which the full use of the art might
be truly and clearly explained." I sent this printed letter to Herr
Senefelder in Vienna.

The first object of my request has been without much result. Hardly a
single voice has been raised to uncover the correct and the incorrect in
the various stories with strictly historical accuracy, and thus to bring
the truth to light, that lithography may not experience what our
Klopstock sings: "Too oft in eternal night is cloaked the inventor's
great name!"

I have been more fortunate in my second object. Herr Alois Senefelder
recognized my good intention and my pure pleasure in this important art
that will give our Bavaria unending fame and spreading celebrity. Since
his return to Munich, it has been the subject of many conversations
between us, and I have endeavored to enliven the courage and
self-confidence of this remarkable man, who often was depressed by the
failure of many an enterprise.

My three endeavors--to win the gracious attention of our most high royal
family for the latest improvements in chemical printing attained through
Herr Senefelder's work; to impel the venerable national institution to
which I belong to investigate the art scientifically; and the
publication of the text-book and the history of the inventor--these have
been not without result.

His Majesty, our most gracious King, this all-honored Father of his
nation and his people, and long a gracious promoter of lithography, has
taken gracious cognizance of the newest, amazing experiments in
metallography and papyrography with which Herr Senefelder busied himself
last winter, has encouraged him magnanimously to publish the present
work, and has permitted that it shall be dedicated to his noble name.
Her Majesty, our supremely honored Queen, herself a connoisseur in the
creative arts, also has honored these experiments with her gracious
attention, and thus has enlivened the courage and the energy of the
artist.

The most celebrated technicians in the Royal Academy have examined these
processes and also the various small presses lately invented by Herr
Senefelder in order to make stone-printing, and also metal and paper
printing available for private use and business, and have given him the
most flattering testimonials. The Polytechnic Association of Bavaria
also has aided, through its before-mentioned weekly publication, in
making Herr Senefelder and his art, and especially his most recent
achievements, known in a wider field than might otherwise be possible,
and to bring him to the attention of his fellow citizens and interested
travelers.

At last, Herr Alois Senefelder has used the hours that he could spare
from his continuous experiments and investigations to write down the
history of his labors out of his faithful memory; and also to give a
full description of all methods invented by him to this time,
accompanied by highly instructive specimen pages, partly made by himself
and partly by artistic friends, but all printed either with his own
hand or under his direct supervision.

Thus with the past winter there developed a new, still more busy life of
this rare, useful man; and thus there originated the present work that I
do not hesitate to declare as belonging among the most noteworthy
productions of the present Leipsic Book Fair.

The book is in two parts: (1) the history of the invention and of the
various applications of the new art: (2) the description of the methods
for writing, drawing, engraving, transferring, etching, and printing,
stated with all the clearness possible, and accompanied with
object-lessons in the form of wonderfully successful and instructive
specimen plates.

With the great candor inherent in the character of the author he tells
faithfully how he came to make his first experiments, what mistakes he
made, with what inner and outer difficulties he contended, how one idea
led to another, what combinations he tried, what plans, successful and
unsuccessful, he made, and under what unrest and embarrassments he lived
for many years.

The minute detail of the history and the interpolation of the personal
relations of the author and his acquaintances may surprise many readers
at first sight; but many of these are intimately connected with the
development of stone-printing, and in the cases of others, the author
did not have time to re-write what really had been written as only the
first draft, because his original intention of re-writing would have
prevented the appearance of the book in the present Easter Book Fair.

In the history of an important invention, minuteness hardly can be
called a fault. How gladly would we read all the family circumstances of
Johann Gutenberg and Johann Fust, if there were such a history of the
beginnings of typography as now is before us about lithography!

Thus there has been fulfilled the desire that Herr Alois Senefelder tell
openly and plainly how he came to discover stone-printing. Now that his
testimony and claims lie open to all eyes, it is possible to compare it
with the other stories that are told, and to bring the necessary
accuracy into the investigation by sharply defining those things that
properly may be called stone-print. It is time to urge contemporaries
once more to declare anything known to them that is in contradiction of
this history, so that a critical history of stone-printing may be
produced, with a chronicle of what was done in the early years of the
art, how and by whom, so that we may learn if several minds had the idea
simultaneously, and thus to do justice to all. It is to be desired that
a writer equipped for the purpose with total non-partisanship, utter
truthfulness, and clearness of perception and judgment may do this not
unimportant service to literature very soon!

As to the text-book, forming the second part of this publication, it has
been demanded even more than the history.

Stone-printing has spread so much in recent years that a few certain
lithographers could no doubt give satisfactory instruction. But there
is only one voice among those who are acquainted with the matter
thoroughly, and that is, that Herr Alois Senefelder made not only the
earliest but the most numerous and various experiments, and therefore is
the foremost man to give instruction.

He is of an upright spirit, and I can assert with full conviction that
in this text-book his aim was not only to tell everything fully, but
also with the utmost accuracy. Already he has instructed many in
the art, trained many others, and thus has learned what are the
circumstances that ordinarily hinder the efforts of a beginner.

Even recently, according to his statement and that of Professor
Mitterer, whom I consider the best expert in lithography next to
Senefelder, there still have been phenomena that surprised lithographers
most unpleasantly in the midst of a piece of work, and ruined results as
if by witchcraft,--cases wherein, in two apparently perfectly similar
manipulations, there would not succeed to-day that which had succeeded
yesterday, nay, even an hour before. The text-book gives all
explanations and remedies for such cases that the wide experiences of
Senefelder have made known to him. Therefore, if an artist proceeds
exactly according to the instructions given here, and yet meets
obstacles, he need merely look for the reason in some small, unnoticed
detail or in the quality of his materials. He need not become
discouraged, for if he has faith in his faithful and candid teacher, he
will attain the goal.

Besides the branches and methods already known and practiced with
success outside of Munich, as in Karlsruhe, Stuttgart, Berlin, London,
Paris, etc., this text-book teaches several methods that had not been
made public by the inventor till now; and the fundamental principles of
those methods already known are stated here solidly. He gives
information also of his most recent attempts to use metal plates as well
as the stone paper recently invented by him.

Although the procedure in these two latter methods resembles
stone-printing largely, it differs so much in some points from real
lithography that Herr Senefelder proposes to publish a work about these
processes especially, which may then serve as a supplement to this one.

So may this work go forth in the world under good auspices, to increase
the fame of its author, secure for him the respect of all friends of art
in and outside of Germany, and become an encouragement for him to
dedicate his life further to his greatly promising art and its fullest
development!

Honor in rich measure has come to him already through his art. A worldly
wise man in his place would have become a wealthy one. That he is not;
but our magnanimous King has made him secure against want during his
remaining life, and my knowledge of his character assures me that he
will utilize this, and any other advantage that may accrue to him in
time to come through this work or his art, for perfecting it, and then
to train his only son, now five years old, to the art, so that he may
practice it in future with honor to his father's name.

    FRIEDRICH VON SCHLICHTEGROLL.

MUNICH, EASTER DAY, 1818.



SECTION I

HISTORY OF STONE-PRINTING



PART I

FROM 1796 TO 1800


As my father, Peter Senefelder of Königshofen in Franken, was court
actor in Munich, I had ample opportunity in early youth to see and read
many theatrical pieces. Thus I developed such a love for this branch of
literature and for the theatre that I would have become an actor myself
had I been permitted to obey my inclination. But my father, who was
determined not to permit any of his children to choose the stage,
compelled me to study law. I could satisfy my longings only occasionally
by playing a few times in private theatricals and by venturing on a few
dramatic writings in my hours of recreation. In my eighteenth year
(1789) the question arose, at a gathering of youngsters, as to how we
should entertain ourselves in the approaching Carnival time. We decided
to give a little private play.

Many pieces were proposed, but none seemed suitable, because each one
wished to play a good and suitable part, and, besides, we could not fill
most of the parts, as we lacked women. We were almost giving up hope
when Herr Kuerzinger, now court actor, proposed to me to write a play,
as I had begun one shortly before that happened to suit each of my
friends.

I finished the little piece, _Die Mädchen Kenner_, in a short time. It
was ready for production, when through accident we were disappointed
about securing the private theatre on which we had counted. We were
emboldened to request leave to produce it in the Kurfürst's Court
Theatre and succeeded, thanks to my father's aid. The over-kind praise
which it won encouraged me to have the play printed. Although I was
pretty generous with free copies among my friends, I received so much
from Lentner, the book-dealer in Munich, that a net profit of fifty
gulden remained to me.

I had not worked eight days on the little thing, and had made all this
money, without counting the pleasure of the work. No wonder that now I
feared no longer for my future! My love for the theatre became
overpowering, and as my father died soon afterward (1791), and I found
no further assistance toward completing my studies in Ingolstadt, I
resolved to become a dramatic author and actor.

I found no place for me in the Court Theatre. Its leaders were opposed
to my family, because my mother with her large family received a larger
pension, through the favor of the Kurfürst, than she could have expected
in ordinary course. In a few strolling theatres, such as Regensburg,
Nürnberg, Erlangen, and Augsburg, where I endured privation and
misfortune enough, my enthusiasm was well dampened in the course of two
years. I decided, as I could see no other prospects for the moment
despite my not inconsiderable attainments, to support myself in future
as author.

I had written several dramatic pieces already that had won sufficient
applause. Therefore I decided to have some of these printed in order to
meet my immediate expenses. I gave one of them to the printing
establishment of Herr Hübschmann, in Munich, and when the first folio
was finished, I made the proposition to Herr Lentner to take some or all
of the copies. He told me that I would have done better to let him have
the manuscript; but since it had been begun, he told me to make sure
that it be finished before the beginning of the Leipsic Easter Fair, in
which case he promised to obtain for me one hundred gulden net, after
deducting all costs. I begged Herr Hübschmann to finish the printing,
but, as he assured me that it was impossible, I took the remaining
folios to another printer. Despite this the play was not printed till
two weeks after the fair, and I received from Herr Lentner barely enough
to pay the printing cost.

My hope of profit was lost. I had, however, seen the entire procedure of
printing, because I had spent many a day in the establishments. I found
that it would not be hard for me to learn, and could not withstand the
desire to own a small printing establishment myself. "Thus," thought I,
"I can print my productions myself, and so alternate healthfully between
mental and physical activities." I could earn a decent living, too, and
thus become an independent man.

This idea controlled me so that I studied all sorts of ways to realize
it. If I had possessed the necessary money, I would have bought types, a
press and paper, and printing on stone probably would not have been
invented so soon. The lack of funds, however, forced me to other
expedients. At first I thought of etching letters in steel. These
matrices I planned then to impress on pear wood, in which the letters
would show in relief, somewhat like the cast type of the book printers,
and they could have been printed like a wood-cut. A few experiments
showed me the possibility of this, and I could easily have invented a
machine with which the moulding could have been done more quickly than a
printer could set his type. I reserve the right to use this possibly
fruitful idea in future with improvements. At the time, however, I had
to give up the whole thing through lack of implements and sufficient
skill in engraving.

Then it struck me that if I had only enough types to set one column or
folio, I could press this into a soft material, transfer the impression
to a board covered with soft sealing-wax, and reproduce the relief plate
thus obtained in stereotype form. The attempt succeeded perfectly. I
made a sort of dough of clay, fine sand, flour, and coal-dust, which,
being firmly kneaded, took the impression very well, and was so dry in a
quarter of an hour that I could print warmed sealing-wax thoroughly well
with a small press. I inked these letters of sealing-wax relief with
printing-ink laid on with a leather roller stuffed with horse-hair and
obtained a result as clean as any obtained from ordinary types. By
mixing finely powdered gypsum with the sealing-wax I made the latter
harder than the ordinary type composition. Thus there was nothing in the
way of my making stereotype plates (which I did not know by this name at
that time), except a few minor appliances and a small stock of types.
But even this exceeded my financial power and I gave up the plan,
especially as I had conceived a new one during my experiments.

This was to learn to write out ordinary type letters exactly, but
reversed. I planned that as soon as I attained the skill, I would write
them with an elastic steel pen on a copper plate covered in ordinary
manner with etching surface, etch, and let the copper-plate printers
print them. In a few days I had such skill in reverse writing that I
attacked the etching on copper bravely. Here, to be sure, I met greater
difficulties. Writing on copper over the etching surface was far more
difficult than writing on paper. Then the preparation of the plate, the
etching, etc., demanded some practice; but all this I hoped to conquer
in time. The one thing that troubled me was that I could not correct the
errors made during writing. The accessories of copper-plate engravers,
especially the so-called cover varnish, were quite unknown to me. I knew
no remedy except to paint the faulty places over with molten wax, but
the covering generally became so thick that I could not work through it
properly and had to leave the corrections for the graving stilus, which,
however, I could not handle at the time.

As, however, the proofs were thoroughly satisfactory to me, I labored
desperately to overcome the difficulty. During my student years I had
attained much chemical knowledge, and I knew that most of the resinous
products which withstand acid, as well as the fats, wax, tallow, and so
forth, can be dissolved and diluted partly in etheric oils and spirits
of wine, and partly in alkalies. My problem was to obtain a thin mass
which would permit itself to be spread very thinly in cold condition
over the copper etching surface, dry quickly, become sufficiently firm
after drying without getting tough, and, above all, be something that
would not attack the etching surface. A few trials with spirits of wine
and various resinous forms gave no satisfaction. The one experiment that
I made with oil of turpentine and wax also failed, presumably because I
diluted the mixture more than necessary, which caused it to flow too
much and dissolve the etching surface, at which time several well-done
parts of the engraving were ruined. Besides, this mixture dried only
slowly to the degree necessary for working. Fortunately I made no
further experiments with this material, because then I should not have
invented stone-printing, as I know now how to make a cover varnish that
is quite satisfactory.

I turned, instead, to an experiment with wax and soap, which succeeded
beyond all expectations. A mixture of three parts of wax with one part
of common tallow soap, melted over the fire, mixed with some fine
lampblack, and then dissolved in rainwater, gave me a sort of black ink
with which I could correct faulty spots most easily.

Now I needed only practice in order to carry out my project of etching
my literary productions in copper. This presented a new difficulty.
After I had written on my single little copper plate, etched it, and
pulled proofs at the house of a friend who possessed a copper-plate
press, I had to spend some hours again laboriously grinding and
polishing the plate, a process which also wore away the copper fast.

This led me to practice on zinc, which was easier to scrape and polish.
An old zinc plate of my mother's was requisitioned at once, but the
results were very unsatisfactory, because the zinc probably was mixed
with lead, and I had used only aqua fortis instead of more powerful
acid.

I did not continue trials with zinc, because just then I obtained a
handsome piece of Kellheimer stone for the purpose of rubbing down my
colors on it; and it occurred to me that if I painted this stone plate
with my wax ink, it would serve as well for practicing as copper or
zinc, with very little labor in grinding and polishing. The experiments
succeeded, and though I had not thought originally that the stone itself
might be used for printing (the samples I had seen hitherto of this
Kellheim limestone were too thin to withstand the pressure exerted in
printing), I soon began to believe that it was possible. It was much
easier to do good work on the stone than on the copper. I observed also
that I needed weaker and much diluted aqua fortis.

A stone mason told me that he could provide me with this sort of
limestone in plates from one inch to eight inches thick. Thus I needed
not to fear cracking of the stone; and the only thing that I needed to
invent, in order to use the stone just like copper, was either a way to
give the stone a better polish, or else a tint which would be easier to
rub away than the ordinary copper-plate printing-ink. The stone will not
take the polish that is demanded with ordinary printer's ink,--and
perhaps this is the reason why the stone has not been used long before
my time as substitute for copper, for I imagine that such attempts must
have been made.

I tried all possible kinds of polishing and grinding without attaining
my purpose completely. The result was best when I poured a mixture of
one part of concentrated oil of vitriol and four or five parts of water
over the stone after polishing it. This mixture, which is very sharp,
has the property of boiling immediately when poured over the stone, but
ceasing instantly, so that one is tempted to believe that the vitriol
has sated itself and lost its power. This is not so, however; for the
same fluid, placed on an untouched part of the stone, boils again at
once. The reason is that a firm skin of gypsum forms at once on the
stone, and this remains impervious to the fluid. If now the etching
fluid is poured off and the stone is rubbed lightly with a rag, it
attains a shining polish. Unfortunately this is so thin and weak that
one can make barely fifty impressions without repeating the process,
which involves some loss to the drawing. But if one desires to print in
the present chemical style, that is, wet, and the stone is polished
before the drawing, one can make several thousand imprints, which will
be described in the proper place.

All experiments to find a color easy to wipe away showed me that on a
stone prepared with oil of vitriol none was better than a light oil
varnish with fine Frankfurter black and some tartar. This mixture could
be washed off with a weak solution in spring water of potash and common
salt. However, it happened often that slight carelessness in washing
destroyed designed parts which took color again afterward only after
much trouble. Recollection of this occurrence, which I could not
understand clearly at the time, led me some years later to the invention
of the chemical stone-printing of to-day.

I have told all these things fully in order to prove to the reader that
I did not invent stone-printing through lucky accident, but that I
arrived at it by a way pointed out by industrious thought. It will be
seen that I knew the ink, before I thought of its use on stone. The
stone I used at first only to practice writing. The ease of writing on
stone lured me then to try to make it available for direct printing. To
do this, I had to discover a way to rub away the black as completely
from all unetched parts of the stone as the copper-plate printer can do
it from his surface, in comparison with which the stone was but slightly
smooth.

At this time my further experiments with this etched form of
stone-printing were entirely checked by a new, accidental discovery.
Until now I had invented little that was new, but simply had applied the
copper-plate etching method to stone. But this new discovery founded an
entirely new form of printing, which basically became the foundation of
all succeeding methods.

Had the stone merely proved available as substitute for copper, I would
have returned to copper as soon as I could afford it, despite several
advantages of stone, and for the following reasons: first, the necessary
weight and thickness of the stones; second, because the printing process
was slower than with copper; third, because probably I never would have
become sufficiently skilled in the difficult manipulation of washing
off; but chiefly, because the necessary spur, the originality of the
discovery, would have been lacking, since I remembered that as a child
of five or six I had seen a music-printery in Frankfurt or Mainz where
the notes were etched in black slate-stone. I had played often with the
broken stones, which lay in a heap near our house. Enough, I was not the
first discoverer of stone-etching, nor of stone-printing; and only after
I made this new discovery which I will describe now, which led me from
the engraved to the relief process, with my new ink, might I call myself
the inventor of an art.

At that time I could not guess that I was to invent a form of printing
different even from this new and original form, a method which was to be
based not on mechanical but purely chemical properties. Even this
method, new in 1796, still was purely mechanical in its purpose, whereas
the present printing method, which I began in 1799, may be called purely
chemical.

I had just ground a stone plate smooth in order to treat it with etching
fluid and to pursue on it my practice in reverse writing, when my mother
asked me to write a laundry list for her. The laundress was waiting, but
we could find no paper. My own supply had been used up by pulling
proofs. Even the writing-ink was dried up. Without bothering to look
for writing materials, I wrote the list hastily on the clean stone, with
my prepared stone ink of wax, soap, and lampblack, intending to copy it
as soon as paper was supplied.

As I was preparing afterward to wash the writing from the stone, I
became curious to see what would happen with writing made thus of
prepared ink, if the stone were now etched with aqua fortis. I thought
that possibly the letters would be left in relief and admit of being
inked and printed like book-types or wood-cuts. My experience in
etching, which had showed me that the fluid acted in all directions, did
not encourage me to hope that the writing would be left in much relief.
But the work was coarse, and therefore not so likely to be under-cut as
ordinary work, so I made the trial. I poured a mixture of one part aqua
fortis and ten parts of water over the plate and let it stand two inches
deep for about five minutes. Then I examined the result and found the
writing about one tenth of a line or the thickness of a playing-card in
relief.

A few finer strokes had been injured slightly, but the others had hardly
lost breadth noticeably and not at all in depth, so that I had good
reason to hope that a well-written plate, particularly in type letter,
would be susceptible of much better relief.

Eagerly I began inking in. I used a fine leather ball, stuffed with
horsehair, and inked it very gently with thick linseed oil varnish and
lampblack. I patted the inscription many times with this ball. The
letters all took the color well, but it also went into all spaces
greater than half a line. That this was due to the over-great elasticity
of the ball was clear to me. So I cleansed my plate with soap and water,
made the leather tense, and used less color. Now I found color only in
such spaces as were two or more lines apart.

I saw that I could attain my purpose better with a dauber of stiffer
material. I tried at once with a piece of glass from a broken mirror,
and as this succeeded fairly well, I tried elastic metal plates. Finally
I made an entirely satisfactory appliance out of a thin board, very
smoothly planed and covered with a fine cloth.

My further experiments with this relief plate succeeded far better than
my previous ones with etched letters. The inking in was much easier, and
hardly one quarter of the force was necessary for making impressions.
Thus the stones were not so liable to crack, and, what was the most
important for me, this method of printing was entirely new, and I might
hope to obtain a franchise and even financial aid. This hope grew when I
learned that Riegel of Munich, who had invented a new sort of
Frankfurter black, had received ten thousand gulden to erect a factory,
although no human being could use it as a sufficient substitute, as I
proved by many trials. I saw the great field for my stone-printing art
and did not doubt that I would obtain assistance, even should it be only
a twentieth part of what Herr Riegel had received for his entirely
worthless process.

The new art was invented, and soon was sufficiently practiced; but again
came the need for a little capital, to buy a press, some stones, paper,
tools, and so forth. If I did not wish to give up my hopes again, I must
seek some way to obtain the necessary means. All my endeavors were
fruitless. Only one way showed itself. An acquaintance, who served in
the artillery, had offered to pay two hundred gulden for a substitute.
In my helplessness I offered myself. I thought: "Once you are in the
artillery and have mastered the exercises, you can get furlough and the
permission to do your printing. You can pay others to do your sentry
goes, and thus there will be only a few weeks a year in which the
regiment will demand your presence. As soon as you have earned a few
hundred gulden you can get a substitute yourself, or, at worst--how soon
six years will pass! Perhaps you can make your fortune in the artillery,
too! You will display zeal, and your knowledge is such that probably few
in the corps will be superior to you. Mathematics, and especially
mechanics and geography, were ever your favorite studies; you were one
of the first of the Munich Lyceum in these branches; therefore it is
certain that you will be noticed and promoted"--and other such
chimerical hopes.

On the third day I went with a transport of recruits to Ingolstadt,
which then was the quarters of the Bavarian artillery. I entered that
city with feelings different from those with which I had left it as
Academician. But the thought of my invention elevated my spirit to a
certain dignity and comforted me with the prophecy of a better future. I
was presented to the chief of company and slept a night in the barracks,
where unpleasant remarks and the conduct of a vulgar corporal cast heavy
shadows over the coming soldiering. Next morning, when I was to be
enrolled and named Prague as my birth-place, I was informed that a
recent royal order shut out all foreigners from the Bavarian service. So
I started on my return, poorer by a hope, but not in entire despair. As
I looked down from the Danube bridge into the majestic stream, where as
a student I was nearly drowned once, I could not quite prevent the
thought that my rescue at that time had not been fortunate, since a too
unkind fate seemed to deny me even the one means of support, open to the
most helpless, that of the army.

Still, though cheated by hope a thousand times, I ever followed her
lures again, and a new plan instantly formed itself to replace the one
that had just gone to wreck. I decided to give up my literary work for
the time being and work as a printer for wages.

Some very badly printed music that I bought in Ingolstadt awakened the
idea that with my new printing process I could furnish much better work.
I decided to go at once to Herr Falter, the music-dealer of Munich, to
interest him in my invention and obtain a small advance of money. Had I
done this, my art might have been more thoroughly perfected long ago;
but, again, it might never have been developed as it has been, for it
was amply sufficient already for music-printing. My shyness, however,
prevented me from addressing Herr Falter. Twice I was at his door, and
each time I retreated. The second time I met a good acquaintance, a
musician named Schrott. In reply to my inquiry if he knew Herr Falter,
he said "No," but he told me that the court musician, Gleissner, had
paid recently to have several masses printed and intended to publish
some more church music soon. Who was happier than I over this news!

Herr Gleissner was a good friend of old. While I was in the theatre I
had engaged him to compose several songs, and had found him a humane and
righteous man. Within half an hour I was in his house and explaining my
invention to his wife, he being absent. I aroused her interest so much
that she seemed thoroughly eager to have me hurry back with a little
press model, in order to show them both the working of the process.

The entire behavior of the woman was so open and artless that I
dismissed my first thought, "I might be cheated out of my invention,"
and hurried to Herr Gleissner in the afternoon with my simple apparatus.

My printing succeeded absolutely. Gleissner marveled at the swiftness
and beauty of the impressions, and, knowing my penniless condition, he
offered of his own free will to pay for a small printery.

My mother had given me a press already. It was the ordinary copper-plate
press with two cylinders. True, it was very roughly made, being a house
carpenter's work, but it had cost only six gulden. However, one could
make very pretty impressions from stone with it. To spare Herr
Gleissner's treasury, I contented myself with it for the time. I bought
a small stock of stones, paper, and other necessary articles.

Herr Gleissner composed twelve songs with clavier accompaniment. I wrote
them rapidly on stone and made one hundred and twenty impressions with
the aid of a day laborer. Everything, composition, writing on stone and
printing, was finished in fourteen days. From Herr Falter, who bought
one hundred copies, Herr Gleissner received the sum of one hundred
gulden. Stones, which could be used over and over again, paper, color,
and wages had cost barely thirty gulden; thus we had a clear profit of
seventy gulden, earned in fourteen days, and I gained so much happy hope
that I thought myself richer than Croesus.

We were gay and merry. Through his patron, Count von Törring, then
President of the Royal Chamber, Herr Gleissner had presented an
impression of our first work to the Kurfürst Karl Theodor, and had
received one hundred gulden out of the Cabinet Treasury, with the
promise of a franchise.

A succeeding little piece of work, "Duets for Two Flutes, by Gleissner,"
brought forty gulden more into our chest, and finally our finances, as
well as a bright success for our institution, seemed assured by a
contract closed with the Countess von Herting to print a cantata on the
death of Mozart by Cannabich, the musical director, which promised us a
profit of one hundred and fifty gulden for two or three weeks' work.

During this time I had presented specimens of work to the Royal Academy
of Sciences, with a description of the advantages of the art, in which I
named particularly the cheapness, and said that the impression had been
made on a press costing not more than six gulden. To my amazement,
instead of the expected honorable mention, I received a sum of twelve
gulden from the vice-president of the Academy, Herr von Vachiery, with
the information that the members had voted favorably for my invention,
and that, as my expenses amounted to only six gulden, according to my
own statement, I would, no doubt, be satisfied with a sum double this. I
had expected an entirely different appreciation from the sentinels of
the arts and sciences, whose office was to test the value of this new
discovery and call the Government's attention to it if favorable. A mere
monetary reward, therefore, especially so small a one, could not
possibly give me much pleasure.

Promising as our beginning was (1793), there came a sad period soon
enough for the art, for me, and also for Herr Gleissner. We had ordered
a new press as soon as our income permitted. I expected to produce a
masterpiece with the first impression. Instead of that, there appeared
the very opposite, a dirty and smeared imprint. We suspected that we had
made some mistake in method. The second attempt, however, was worse than
the first, if possible. To be brief, of twenty trials, made with the
greatest industry and toil, we obtained only two or three that were even
average.

As long as I live I shall be unable to understand how we could have been
so blind at that time. We sought the cause of failure in everything
except the true thing,--an alteration that made the new press different
from the old one, which unfortunately had been already destroyed. Later,
after I had invented the so-called lever or gallows press, the thing was
clear to me at once. But by that time it had cost me and Herr Gleissner
two years full of toil, worry, and sorrow. In the contract with the
Countess von Herting the date of completion of the work had been
stipulated, because she wished to surprise Herr Cannabich with it on his
birthday. We had barely four weeks left and not a single sheet had been
finished. With press alterations, trial impressions, and so forth, we
had wasted money and time, and paper by the ream. Our loss amounted to
more than one hundred and fifty gulden, and still there was no prospect
of final success. Pressed for results by the Countess, our entire
reputation and the honor of my invention were at stake. Added to this
came many other annoyances, especially the complaints of Frau Gleissner,
who charged that I had destroyed the original, perfectly satisfactory
press against her will. These tested my courage sadly.

The cause of all this trouble was so petty that I really must have been
half-stupefied by the fear of not keeping our pledges, otherwise I must
have perceived it at once.

To make my first imperfect press I had bought a piece of wood from a
wheelwright in order to have it turned into two cylinders. Hardly had
the two been in the house a day before each one split so that a
longitudinal crack of two inches width appeared. As the upper cylinder
was thick enough to make an impression of a whole folio of sheet music
without revolving so far as to let the crack reach the stone, I
contented myself with it temporarily. Now, in order not to spoil the
impressions, I had to begin each revolution of the cylinder at the
crack, for otherwise the crack might have come at the middle or end of
the impression and given no imprint of that part. Therefore, as the
stone was pushed under the cylinder at the crack, it was already gripped
before the impression began, and was drawn through at once. With the new
press, however, the upper cylinder had to draw the stone between both
cylinders in order to bring it under its pressure. But in doing this,
the new press first pulled the linen stretched over the printing-frame
till it would yield no more and forced the stone powerfully under the
cylinder, during which of course the paper under the linen was pulled
over the inked stone and smeared.

Several attempts to rectify this trouble were unsuccessful. Probably I
would have discovered the remedy finally,--either that the upper
cylinder must not first be pressed on the stone, which must be under it
before each impression began, or that I need only use tightly stretched
leather instead of linen. But I decided, instead, in order to complete
our work if possible, to have a press made in all haste by a carpenter,
of a style like the book-printers' press, wherein the force is applied
instantly from above.

As everything was very rough, the new press was ready in eight days. The
first experiment, with a small stone, seemed to succeed. But the larger
stones would not give thorough impressions, probably because of the
uneven surface of the press, which was merely of wood. I increased the
power enormously. A stone of three hundredweight was elevated with
pulleys and released suddenly to fall ten feet. It forced a lever down
on the press with a pressure of more than ten thousand pounds. The
plates gave fair impressions by this means, but generally they were
cracked after the first, second, or third impression.

To determine how much downward force was needed to print a sheet of
music, I took a well-ground stone a square inch in area, laid moistened
paper on an inked printing-stone, over this a sixfold layer of paper,
then a double layer of fine cloth, finally the square inch of stone, and
then weights ranging from one to three hundredweight.

This experience taught me that the square inch of surface demanded three
hundredweights of force to make a good impression in a few seconds, and
almost less than half that weight when I allowed it to act for a whole
minute. According to this calculation the entire sheet, which contained
about one hundred square inches, would have demanded thirty thousand
pounds; and the stone could have withstood this without cracking, had I
been able to apply the pressure evenly. But the imperfections of the
press made it necessary to apply a pressure three times as great, and
this the stones could not bear.

To correct the defects of this press was more than I cared about,
after I was nearly killed by the three hundredweights, which fell
accidentally, and, as I stood immediately under it, would have beaten
out my brains had not a miracle caused the load to catch and hold. The
thought that a similar accident might cause the death of one of my men
made me hate the whole press, all the more so as I had conceived what
seemed to me at the time an exceedingly happy idea for a very simple
and not costly printing-machine.

Before I possessed a press of my own, I used to pull proofs of my work
in the following manner, in order to avoid the constant trips to a
printer. I laid the dampened paper on the inked stone. Over it I laid
some heavy paper, and then a sheet of stiff, carefully smoothed dry
paper. Then I took a piece of polished wood and rubbed this over the
upper sheet of paper, holding the latter firmly to prevent slipping. I
continued the rubbing, using more or less power according to whether I
wanted the impressions deep or pale. Thus I obtained impressions very
often that could not have been better.

I wondered why this could not be done on a large scale, and proceeded to
try at once. I stretched a piece of linen firmly over a wooden frame two
feet long and wide. On this linen I pasted a sheet of strong paper,
polished on the upper side with wax. Then with two bands the frame was
fastened to an ordinary wooden table. Then the stone was fastened on the
table under the frame. Inside of the printing-frame was a smaller frame
with cords, to hold the paper, which had a layer of gray blotting-paper
under it. With a piece of polished wood, or a piece of glass such as is
used by polishers, I rubbed the upper waxed paper thoroughly, making
sure that every spot was touched.

The first proof, and several succeeding ones, which I made myself,
turned out so excellent that probably few better impressions ever
have been made since. Two more presses were made at once, and six
printers hired. The work might still be finished in the stipulated
time. New hopes thrilled us. Hastily I inscribed the stones and the
printing began. But--oh, human weakness! Does it seem credible that
of my six helpers not one could master the extremely simple method of
manipulation, the mere matter of rubbing evenly and thoroughly? Of six
impressions hardly one ever reached perfection. There were blank spaces
here and there. Yes, even when, accidentally, they produced three
sections of a sheet correctly, the fourth invariably was a flat failure,
and thus ruined the entire sheet. We would have been glad enough had we
lost even one half the paper, if only we could have saved our credit by
completing the work, regardless of our money loss. But of three reams of
paper only thirty-three impressions were won in the end.

I will merely touch on the painful scenes that ensued. The stipulated
time had almost expired and no prospect of results. The manuscript and
the paper remaining in stock were taken away from us and given to Herr
Falter, while we had to suffer severe censure from the Countess, and in
her name from others. Herr Gleissner had to pay for new paper, which
made a monthly deduction from his salary necessary. The grant of our
privilege was endangered, for the Kurfürst had obtained a poor opinion
of our process. Indeed, so long as the Kurfürst Karl Theodor lived, all
our efforts to obtain a privilege were fruitless. We could not even
succeed in having it proposed, although the referee, Herr von
Stubenrauch, made us promises from month to month.

All the money we had earned was lost; debts burdened us; and a monthly
deduction of pay, with the mocking laughter of those who had been made
envious by our first successes, was the entire reward for our endeavors
to make a new art. As it was only the lack of a good press that had
caused our failure, I went to Herr Falter, with whom I had become
acquainted through Herr Gleissner, and told him the reasons for not
finishing the cantata in time. I told him that if he were willing to
have a proper press built, I was willing to print his works for him, in
his own residence, which was his stipulation, provided I could prepare
the stones at home. We agreed, and I ordered a great cylinder press made
at his expense. To avoid the old trouble I had both cylinders fitted
with cogs, which gave satisfactory results if both printers who handled
the press were careful to begin turning the cylinders at the same
moment. The double friction of the two rollers made them both pull on
the printing-frame and the stone, where, before, the lower cylinder had
done just the opposite. The greater periphery of the upper cylinder,
which was almost fifteen inches thick, helped also. And to this day I
consider this form of press the best for all methods, especially if the
stones are thick enough, if one has not to consider the very greatest
speed; for in speed this press is decidedly inferior to the lever press
and other styles. On the other hand, the pressure is much more gentle,
more perpendicular, and less liable to pull the paper out of place than
is possible with even the best so-called friction presses. Only there
should be added to the cogs an appliance by which the upper cylinder has
a screw adjusted over its centre, so that it can be forced down for each
impression after the stone is under it. Figure 1, plate I, is the
picture of such a cylinder press, made for stone-printing.

As soon as the press was ready and erected, I began to inscribe on stone
the music of _Die Zauberflöte_, arranged for quartette by Herr Danzy,
and with Herr Gleissner we began the printing.

But Herr Gleissner became dangerously ill. I trained two soldiers to do
the printing, left the entire printing process to Herr Falter, and
limited myself to the work of delivering the stones to him. The workers
ruined so much paper that Herr Falter could not make it pay, and
returned to etching on copper.

During this time Herr Schmidt, professor at the military academy, had
begun to etch on stone. As I discovered long afterwards, he was a good
acquaintance of Herr Gleissner, who visited him often. Within the last
year there is a strenuous attempt to make this Herr Schmidt appear to be
the inventor of printing from stone, though probably he never desired
this. There have been publications about it already. I shall not notice
what has been said, and will let the matter speak for itself. From the
foregoing the reader will have seen the natural but laborious way in
which fate led me to this invention. If Herr Schmidt made a similar
discovery at that time, he was much more fortunate than I. According to
his own letter, printed in the _Anzeiger für Kunst und Gewerbfleiss_,
the course of his invention was as follows. He saw a gravestone in the
Frauen-Kirche, in Munich, on which letters and pictures were in relief.
"That must have been done with acid; it would be possible to print from
it!" thought he, and the invention was completed.

If it is so easy to gain the honor of an invention, then, indeed, I was
unlucky to have undergone so much toil. But according to my opinion,
there was nothing new in the whole discovery. The thought that "this
was etched" assumed the invention and the use of etching beforehand.
That such coarse, thick, and highly relieved inscriptions as those on
gravestones could be inked and used for printing would strike anybody
who knew even a little of printing. If, however, Herr Schmidt added to
his idea the second, that fine and, therefore, only slightly elevated
inscriptions and illustrations could be inked and printed with the aid
of appliances to be invented for the purpose,--if he did this and
executed it before me, or, at least, before he had knowledge of my work,
then indeed the honor belongs to him of having invented mechanical
printing from stone, either before me or simultaneously. But as a matter
of fact, neither he nor I can claim to be the first who thought of using
stones for printing. Only the "how?" is the new thing in the case.

At that time (1796) I had not invented stone-printing, but, firstly, an
ink available for writing on stone and resistant to acid, which ink I
invented out of my brains and not, like Herr Schmidt, out of an old
Nürnberg book: secondly, I invented a practical tool for inking the
slightly elevated letters: and thirdly, the so-called gallows or lever
press, of which I shall speak later.

As I do not know what were the circumstances surrounding Herr Schmidt at
the time, and I cannot, therefore, make any inquiries, I am willing to
take his word if he will declare as an honest man that he printed from
stone before July, 1796. That his method of printing was different from
mine, and that he had absolutely not the slightest knowledge of chemical
printing from stone, which I invented in 1798, I know from indubitable
evidence.

He made many attempts with his pupils to produce drawings on stones, but
presumably his impressions were not successful, for those stones that I
saw afterward at Herr Schulrath Steiner's had been etched first and the
spaces then engraved away very deeply with all sorts of steel
instruments, after the manner of wood-cuts, so that they might properly
be called stone-cuts in relief. He had these stones printed in the
Schul-fond's book-printery, and I hear that the impressions were very
good. I saw none myself.

However, Professor Schmidt's experiments were the means of making me
acquainted with Herr Schulrath Steiner, who encouraged me so much that I
conceived many ideas in order to fulfill his wishes, so that at last the
art of printing from stone achieved its present honorable position.

Herr Schulrath Steiner, an intimate friend of Professor Schmidt, was
director of the Schul-fond's printery. As such he was concerned with
many prints. Herr Schmidt's idea of publishing stone-etched pictures of
poisonous plants for school use was approved by him; and as the attempts
did not satisfy him, he decided to turn to me. At that time the
Schul-fond was to print some church songs. This gave him the opportunity
of visiting me. He asked me if the musical notes could not be so etched
or cut in relief in stone that they could be made up with ordinary
book-types and thus printed in the ordinary book-presses. I promised to
try it. However, the necessary deep engraving of the spaces was too
laborious, so that it would have been easier to do it in wood. As an
expedient we printed the text first with ordinary types in the
book-press and then printed in the music with stones in the stone-press.

Meantime I tried to attain our purpose in other ways, connected with
some of my early experiments. My best success was with the following
method. On a stone polished with sand I painted a layer, equal to two or
three card-thicknesses, of burned, finely powdered gypsum, butter, and
alum, mixed with a proper amount of water. As soon as it was dry I
inscribed the music with steel needles of various sizes on the surface
of the stone, which was of a somewhat dark, almost gray color, so that I
could see it more easily through the soft, white mass. Having finished
the drawing I took warm sealing-wax smeared on wood, and applied it to
the stone while it was warm with a hand-press. After cooling, the white
mass was fast to the sealing-wax and quite loose from the stone, and it
was scrubbed away clean with water and a brush, after which the drawing
appeared on the wood in elevated wax extremely clear and clean, like a
wood-cut. The spaces were so deep that the plate could be printed in
regular book-printing manner.

Later I made trial of a composition of lead, zinc, and bismuth, and
this succeeds thoroughly with proper care. So here we would have still
another printing process, which has the advantage over all others that
the inscription need not be made reversed, as the impression on the wax
or lead reverses it automatically.

If the white mass is laid on more thickly, one can make the handsomest
patterns for calico much more quickly than has been possible heretofore
with wood-cuts. A little more care is necessary, because no stroke must
be made entirely through the mass, when it is laid on thick. My
experiments in that direction all exceeded expectations, and it is to be
regretted that I had no opportunity thereafter to perfect this invention
more, or use it practically. The experiments had no value even for Herr
Schulrath Steiner, for whom I made them, as he never had use for the
process afterward. Indeed, I would have forgotten the matter almost
entirely, if it had not been brought back to mind by this work of
writing my story. In the second part of this book, in describing
stone-printing itself, I will show various methods of making patterns
for work on cotton, such as I conceived later in Vienna where I busied
myself very much with cotton-printing.

I happened to print for Herr Lentner a little song about the great fire
of Neuötting in Bavaria and used a little vignette showing a burning
house. This induced Herr Steiner to let me etch a few small pictures for
a catechism. So far as execution of drawing goes, they were very
ordinary; but he continued to encourage me to try if the new printing
process would not be available for art work. With the exception of Herr
Andre of Offenbach, he was the only one who reasoned thus: "These
strokes and points, of such great fineness and again of such great
strength, can evidently be made on the stone, therefore it is possible
to make drawings similar to copper-plate etchings. That this cannot be
done yet is due not to a fault in the art of stone-printing, but to the
insufficient skill of the artists."

Even at that time he did not say: "The art is still in its infancy," as
many a would-be wise man does to-day, thus exposing his lack of
knowledge of the entire matter. Even at that time he was convinced, more
so even than I, that the art of stone-printing had reached its climax
when I gave him the first specimens of stone-printing improved by the
chemical process. Artists might cultivate and perfect themselves,
manipulation be simplified and processes be increased in number and
variety, but the art itself could not be improved greatly.

To be sure, when I glance hurriedly over the manifold results of the
last twenty years, all that I have done myself for perfection, the
brilliant achievements of which this book will furnish proof, I am
tempted to think for a moment that the Now and the Then cannot be
compared. But considered correctly, I had invented and discovered the
entire art at that time. Everything that I and others have done since
then are only improvements. Everything rests still on the same
principle: ink of wax, soap, etc., then gum, aqua fortis or another acid
of which none has an advantage over the others, further oil varnish and
lampblack,--these are, ever and in the same manner, the chief elements
of stone-printing as they were then. Not the slightest thing has been
changed, improved, or invented in the fundamental principle. No
illustration has been published by any lithographer containing cleaner,
stronger, or blacker lines and points than my first proofs had in part.

Therefore, those people are wrong who seek to excuse the lack of
assistance that I received in the beginning, by alleging that at the
time no one knew if the process could be used to any great extent. They
declare many productions of the present day to be far better, simply
because the illustrator is more skillful, though in truth the printing
is not so good as many of the first ones made by me. It has even
happened that the assertion has found its way into print that I had
invented only the rough part of the art, and never had been able to use
it for more than music-printing, whereas this one or that one are the
true artists, having succeeded in producing pictures.

These gentlemen, who are so quick with verdicts, should inform
themselves a little. They would discover that aside from me (with the
exception of Professor Mitterer's invention of the cylinder press),
nobody has made a noteworthy improvement in the branches of lithography
without having received it primarily or indirectly through me. Further
they would have learned that these illustrators either made their first
attempts under my personal direction, or else owe their skill to persons
whom I taught; and lastly, that none of my critics can boast of having
penetrated into the very inmost spirit of the art like only Herr Rapp of
Munich, the venerable author of the work published by Cotta, _The Secret
of Lithography_. If they learned all this, they might feel a little
ashamed. But then, they would have much to do.

Had my skill in writing and drawing on stone been greater at that time,
Herr Steiner would have given me opportunity enough and manifold. He
permitted me to do a small book, _Rules for Girls_, in German script,
which, on the whole, turned out of only average quality, as I had not
practiced this style sufficiently.

Then he wanted me to draw Biblical pictures on stone or to let others
draw them. At that time he was having Herr Schön in Augsburg etch the
Seven Holy Sacraments after Poussin. As the etching was expensive, the
impressions could not be sold for less than four kreuzer each. Herr
Steiner wished to circulate these pictures so generally that they could
serve as gifts from the country preachers to their little Christian
pupils. He wished, also, to ornament various school-books with pictures
of this kind, and thus, gradually, to replace the miserably drawn
species of saints that generally fill the prayer-books of the pious
households.

Only the utmost cheapness could make this possible, and this naturally
suggested the stone process to him. Even if the pictures were not so
fine as those etched on copper, they would serve amply if they were
correctly drawn, noble in design, and handsomely printed. It was
necessary either to draw myself and practice faithfully, or to train a
skilled artist to draw with fatty ink on stone. We preferred the latter
method and trained several young men, who produced various works,
sometimes good, sometimes inferior.

Through all this I ran more and more danger of losing my secret. Indeed,
it was lost already except perhaps so far as concerned the exact
composition of the ink. But I hoped still to obtain the privilege for
Bavaria, toward which end the Schulrath promised me his best aid, and so
I let the matter proceed, and trained the men. But among all these
young men there was not one who did not desire a substantial reward for
his very first attempts, and when they found that they were expected
first to learn, they stayed away, one by one. Herr Steiner was hurt. I,
however, was indifferent, for I was just beginning to plan to use a new
and important discovery in such a manner that my stone-printing would be
greatly improved and we could hope to carry out our idea of
illustrations without the aid of artists.

I had been assigned to write a prayer-book on stone for the Schul-fond.
It was mostly in a style of writing in which I was least expert. When I
wrote music notes, our method, proved best by experience, had been to
write the entire sheet in reverse on the stone with lead pencil to serve
as pattern. This was mostly Herr Gleissner's work, and being a musician
he had achieved great perfection. For me this preparatory work was far
less agreeable than the final execution with the stone-ink. Therefore,
as ever in my life, when a difficulty or a burden was before me, I
studied for some way to make it easier for me. Previously I had found
that if one wrote on paper with good English lead pencils, then
moistened the paper, laid it on a polished stone and passed it through a
powerful press, a good impression was the result. I had used the method
on various occasions. I wished that I possessed an ink that could be
used the same way. Trials showed that fine red chalk needed merely to be
rubbed down gently in a solution of gum, and that even the ordinary
writing-ink of nut gall and vitriol of iron would serve when mixed with
a little sugar. But this did not satisfy my ambition, which always
demanded the best and most perfect. The gum in one and the vitriol in
the other did not agree well with the stone-ink. In addition, the
impression often squashed. Therefore I tried a mixture in water of
linseed oil, soap, and lampblack which met my demands better. I had a
music-writer write notes correctly on note-paper with this ink, printed
it on the stone, and thus had an accurate pattern, which was at the same
time reversed, as was necessary.

I now planned to do this with the book. But why could I not invent an
ink that would serve on the stone without making it necessary to trace
over it with the stone-ink? Why not make an ink that would leave the
paper under pressure and transfer itself to the stone entirely? Could
one give the paper itself some property so that it would let go of the
ink under given conditions? So reflected I, and it seemed to me not
impossible. At once I began to experiment. I had observed that the
stone-ink at once began to congeal and stiffen when it came into contact
with ordinary writing-ink, because of the action of the vitriol of iron,
which devoured the alkali that the stone-ink needed to keep it in
solution. Therefore I wrote with ordinary ink, into which I put still
more vitriol of iron. After it was dry, I dipped the sheet into a weak
solution in water of my stone-ink. After a few seconds I withdrew it and
washed it very gently in rainwater. I found that the ink had fastened
itself on the written places, and pretty thickly, too. I allowed the
paper to dry slightly and transferred the writing to the stone. The
impression was fair, but not sufficiently complete. I tried it
repeatedly but could obtain no transfers that were sharp and uniform
enough to represent a handsome script. So I tried another way. I painted
the paper with gum solution in which vitriol of iron was dissolved.
After it dried I wrote on it with my ordinary stone-ink and dried it
again. Then I dampened the paper and let it lie a while to soften, after
which I transferred it to the stone, which had been treated with strong
oil varnish diluted in oil of turpentine, laid on so lightly that it was
only like the blurring from a breath.

These attempts were far more successful, but it was impossible to write
as delicately on this paper as I desired. Therefore I made new
experiments. I changed the mixture of my ink. I tried to make it more
adhesive with mixtures of resin, oil varnish, gum elastic, turpentine,
mastic, and similar substances. In short, I do not exaggerate when I
declare that this matter cost me several thousands of experiments. I was
rewarded sufficiently by succeeding. And at the same time through these
investigations I discovered the chemical printing on stone of to-day.

As the transfer from paper to stone depended mainly on the greater or
lesser powers of adhesion between one material and another, it was
natural that in my many experiments with such various ingredients I
should observe that a mucous fluid, as, for instance, the gum solution,
resisted the adhesion of the greasy ink. Nearer still to the new
invention did the following experiment bring me: I noticed that if there
happened to be a few drops of oil in the water into which I dipped paper
inscribed with my greasy stone-ink, the oil would distribute itself
evenly over all parts of the writing, whereas the rest of the paper
would take no oil, and especially so if it had been treated with gum
solution or very thin starch paste. This fact led me to investigate the
behavior of paper printed with common printing-ink.

A sheet of an old book was drawn through thin gum solution, then laid on
a stone and touched carefully everywhere with a sponge that had been
dipped into a thin oil color. The printed letters took the color well
everywhere and the paper itself remained white. Now I laid another clean
white sheet on this, put both through the press, and obtained a very
good transfer, in reverse, of course. In this manner, if I used great
care, I found I could make fifty and more transfers from the same sheet.
If I allowed such a transfer to dry thoroughly and then treated it like
the original sheet, why should it not produce transfers that are like
the original, not reversed? So thought I, and the result showed that I
had not been wrong! Only for the first transfer I needed to use a
somewhat stiffer color that had been dried more with litharge of silver,
and then to let the transfer dry for at least four or six days.

So I came to find that I could print without a stone, from the paper
alone; and this process, depending solely on chemical action, was
totally, fundamentally different from all other processes of printing.

Old books could be republished in this manner easily and without great
cost. New ones also. I needed only to invent a fatty ink, similar to the
printing-ink and drying thoroughly, and I could use every sheet of
printed paper instead of type. I invented this ink soon. Resin, finely
pulverized litharge of silver, lampblack, thick oil varnish, and potash
properly diluted with water gave me a good ink for the purpose. The only
obstacle that prevented me from using this process at once on a large
scale was the fragility of the paper, which tore into pieces under the
slightest carelessness in handling. The natural and simple thought that
was bound to come to me under the circumstances was this, Could not a
stronger material, perhaps the stone plate itself, be so prepared that
it would take ink or color only on the parts covered with fatty ink,
while the wet parts of the stone resisted it? I feared that the stone
might not absorb the grease sufficiently, and this really is the case
with many stones, such as slate, pebble, grindstone, glass, porcelain,
etc.; but experiments showed that exactly the opposite is true in the
case of the Solenhofer limestone. This stone has a great affinity for
fat, which often is absorbed so deeply that in many cases even extensive
grinding will not remove it.

I took a cleanly polished stone, inscribed it with a piece of soap,
poured thin gum solution over it and passed over all with a sponge
dipped in oil color. All the places marked with the fat became black at
once, the rest remained white. I could make as many impressions as I
pleased; simply wetting the stone after each impression and treating it
again with the sponge produced the same result each time. The
impressions became somewhat pale, because the color on the sponge was
too thin; but I obtained perfectly black and handsome impressions as
soon as I used an ink roller of leather stuffed with horse-hair.

I hurried to write a sheet of note music at once to print it in the new
way; but the ink flowed too much on the polished stone. Previously I had
corrected this by rubbing the stone with linseed oil or soap-water,
which checked the trouble entirely. But I knew that I could not do that
in this new method, because then the stone would have a coating of
grease all over, and would take color on the entire surface. However, I
was able to take this coating away after writing, by etching with aqua
fortis, though etching would not have been necessary otherwise in this
chemical form of printing. However, it was easy to see that a drawing
etched into relief would be easier to print from than one not etched at
all. It did not require much etching, and I saved a great deal of acid,
while the stone, also, remained useful for new work for a much longer
period. Therefore, without making further experiments, I adhered to my
old method, first washing the stone lightly with soap-water, drying it
well, writing on it with wax ink, and then etching with acid before I
finished it for printing by pouring gum solution over it.

At first I imagined that I might do without the gum entirely; but I
found soon that it really formed a sort of chemical union with the
stone, making its pores more receptive to the grease and closing them
more effectively against water. I found also that neither aqua fortis
nor gum was so valuable alone as when both were used in the process.

I needed to make only a few more experiments to obtain the proper
consistency of ink, and the new process would be practically perfect so
far as the fundamental principle was concerned. And, in fact, I made
such handsome, clean, and strong impressions after three days of trial
that few better ones have been made since. Now it was necessary merely
to train skillful workmen and artists as quickly as possible for this
new art, that was susceptible of innumerable valuable uses, as I could
see at once.

It made no difference now whether the design was worked in relief or
intaglio, as good impressions could be obtained even when the drawing
was perfectly level with the surface of the stone. But all three methods
could be combined on one stone, if desired. If I reversed the method, by
rubbing oil over the stone instead of water, while for printing I used
an ink prepared with gum solution (of which I will describe the best
composition afterward), then the greasy places would resist color while
the wet ones took it, and thus I could print with all water colors, and
this is necessary sometimes with colored pictures because of the greater
height of the colors. The inscription with dry soap gave me the logical
idea toward crayon work, which I used afterward. My previous experiments
with etching, that recurred to my memory, now assumed entirely different
aspects and I could understand many things that had puzzled me then.

It was a simple step now to the etched method, in which the stone is
prepared first with aqua fortis and gum, after which the design is
engraved in intaglio without first being treated with aqua fortis.
Indeed, this method was used for the first work that I undertook.

A piece of music by Herr Gleissner (which afterward was greatly praised
in the musical paper) had been completed before I invented the new
process. Only the title-page remained to do. As I wished to make this as
handsome as possible, since Herr Gleissner intended to dedicate the work
to Count von Törring, I chose this new intaglio style, because I hoped
to do my best work in it. Any one who still possesses a copy of this
symphony can see by slight examination that the printing was done from
an etched engraving. Therefore Herr Rapp in Stuttgart is mistaken when
he assumes that he is the first who treated the stone in this manner. As
early as the year 1800 I deposited in the archives of the Patent Office
in London a full description of this and several other methods, some of
which have not been used yet generally, and in 1803 I had to submit my
descriptions to the Austrian Government when they gave me a franchise.

A year before this, I had invented the lever press, with which I could
make several thousand of the handsomest impressions during a day. This,
combined with the new treatment of the stone, enabled me to enlarge my
operations greatly. I took in two of my brothers, Theobald and George,
who had been in the theatre hitherto, and taught them to write and etch
on stone. Also I took in two boy apprentices, sons of poor parents, to
train them properly. Herr Schulrath Steiner and Herr Falter, with
several others, gave me various orders, and a pretty good outlook began
to appear for me and Herr Gleissner.

Until now we had been forced to suffer much grief, disappointment,
deprivation, and poverty. Herr Gleissner's salary was only three hundred
gulden a year. A yearly deduction of one hundred gulden was being made
from this by the Government to pay debts. Then there were new expenses
to repair the printery and keep it in some sort of order. My support and
that of the family Gleissner,--which consisted of five persons,--then a
larger residence, on account of the room needed for stones and for
printing, also had to be paid for. My own yearly earnings were barely a
few hundred gulden, as most of my time was used for experiments. It is
no wonder, then, that during this sad period of two years, we spent
almost all that could be spent of Herr Gleissner's estate, and still
made new debts, despite all imaginable economies.

I can say for the honor of this man, and especially his wife, that,
despite all their losses and despite the warnings and inciting of their
friends and relatives, they remained unshaken, and by making all kinds
of sacrifices they enabled me to win at last. On my part they saw
faithful and eager will, and a restless endeavor that went so far that I
hardly took any time for eating or sleeping, but thought only of
improving my art.

Now, however, our condition was changed at once. Many days we earned as
much as ten to twelve gulden; and at the same time we received an
exclusive franchise for fifteen years through the favor of King
Maximilian Joseph, who began his glorious reign then. This privilege
gave us the right to print and sell exclusively in all of Bavaria, while
infringers were liable to a fine of one hundred gulden and confiscation
of all stock and apparatus.

We were determined to do our utmost, to work day and night, to establish
an honorable reputation for our printery at last, though we foresaw many
obstacles, owing to the entire lack of assistance. Already I had
half-determined to contract with the Schul-fond, permitting it to
establish a lithographic press for its own use, when an accidental
circumstance gave our whole undertaking a new direction.

Depending on the protection given to us by our franchise, we were making
no further secret of any part of our process. We were quite content with
having the monopoly in Bavaria, and cared little that other printeries
might arise in other countries. Indeed, this expectation flattered my
vanity as inventor, and I thought that in time I might make commercial
connections with such establishments. For this reason I was very
hospitable toward every stranger who came to visit us. I hoped that
perhaps I might induce some such visitor to participate in our
undertaking, and therefore I exhibited all the advantages of the process
and permitted them to see the manipulations with their own eyes.

Just then Herr Andre of Offenbach visited Munich on business. He read
about the grant of our franchise and asked his friend Falter about the
process. That gentleman showed him some sheets of music printed by us
and offered to introduce him to our printery, where, as technical
expert, he could decide for himself as to the value or worthlessness of
the new art.

Herr Andre, who possessed an extensive musical publishing institution
and owned a large zinc-plate printing-plant, was delighted with the
beauty of our print, and was especially impressed by the fact that the
color did not off-set when rubbed with the hand, as was the case with
zinc printing. He accepted Herr Falter's offer at once and was
introduced as a merchant. The attention with which he noted even the
slightest operations led me to conclude at once that this man had some
especial interest in printing. I took particular pains to display the
whole process to the best advantage.

Several plates that were already inscribed were etched and printed with
beautiful results. The speed (seventy-five sheets in a quarter-hour, two
being printed simultaneously each time), the quickness of drying, the
economy in color, were things that increased his interest to a high
pitch. He told who he was and proposed to me that I teach him the entire
art for an adequate remuneration. I accepted at once and agreed to go to
Offenbach within a few months, erect a press, and train men in all
branches of the process. For this he promised me the sum of two thousand
gulden, of which he paid down three hundred gulden on the spot.

This change from poverty to comfort made me happy mainly on Herr
Gleissner's account. We could furnish our printery properly now and pay
our old debts. We were assured, also, of enough work to permit
enlargement of the establishment in future. What was there left to wish?

In the very beginning, however, the behavior of my own family gave me
great displeasure. My mother demanded that I share my profit with my
brothers, as they had a better right than Herr Gleissner and his family.
I could not quite see this; therefore my mother ordered a press for my
brothers and bought the necessary stones. They went to Herr Falter and
asked him for his work, representing that I had made my fortune through
Herr Andre, whereas they were unprovided for. They offered at the same
time to furnish each plate for thirty kreuzer less than I charged. Herr
Falter permitted himself to be convinced, and when Madame Gleissner
discovered it she was intensely angry, and did not rest till the
Government ordered my brothers to refrain from utilizing the process in
Bavaria for their own account.

My brothers went to Augsburg to erect a stone-press for Herr Gombart.
They must have been unequal to the attempt or there must have been other
difficulties: in brief, I know only that, after Herr Gombart had
incurred many useless expenses, he discarded printing from stone.

During the three months before my journey to Offenbach I practiced my
art busily, and especially studied to attain thoroughness in one branch
that was of importance to Herr Schulrath Steiner. I have spoken already
of his idea for pictures for children. As soon as I had invented the new
chemical printing, I thought of inking an etched copper plate with a
composition of tallow, soap, lampblack, and oil varnish, making an
impression, laying this on stone, and putting it through the press. The
picture transferred itself to the stone as I had expected. Then I poured
the water and gum solution over it and inked it with the ink roller. The
design took the color well; and thus, if the stone was very clean in the
beginning and the proof from the copper had been made very carefully
indeed, I could print several thousands of copies which resembled the
original so closely that only a slightly greater degree of sharpness,
clearness, and strength gave the copper etching an advantage over the
stone impressions. At last I succeeded in perfecting the process so that
actually my best impressions from the stone were better than those that
had been made with less care from the original copper plate.

The main requisite in this process was that the ink be firm enough not
to spread in printing, and still so greasy and tender that the very
finest lines would come out. The copper plate had to be washed with
extraordinary care, for the least bit of grease that should off-set on
the white paper would, of course, transfer itself to the stone and make
that part take color.

This latter circumstance was intensely difficult to overcome. It
occurred to me to treat the copper plate chemically, like the stone, so
that its surface would resist the ink. I succeeded, as, in future, I
succeeded with other metals. The fundamental principle in each case
remained the same. Only in the choice of materials for each metal was
there a difference. I discovered soon that there are two kinds of
preparations, one acid and one alkaline, for all solid bodies which have
the property of taking and absorbing oil colors. The alkalines seemed to
be best for use on copper plate, and I obtained such clean impressions
that the stone did not take on even a vestige of ink in any spot except
the design. At the same time I found that chemical printing does not
limit itself to stone, but can be done on wood and metal, as well as on
paper, as stated already. Yes, though apparently it is incredible--even
fats, such as wax, shellac, resin, etc., can acquire the attribute,
under certain circumstances, of resisting color, and, therefore, are
available for chemical printing. This fact gave me hopes of discovering
a sort of artificial stone some day, which might be less costly, less
massive, and less fragile; and, as a matter of fact, I succeeded in
inventing an artificial stone-paper in 1813, a stony mass that is
smeared on paper or linen and looks somewhat like parchment.

Since the illustrations on etched copper plates were so readily
transferable to the stone, Herr Schulrath Steiner could now let the best
masters etch his pictures. The sales of the original impressions as
works of art always covered the costs. He paid me five gulden for each
transfer that I made from the copper to stone. For this extremely small
sum he obtained a stone plate from which there could be made countless
impressions, which, although not so fine as those from the copper,
answered his purpose of circulating good pictures by making them
extremely cheap. Lively prosecution of this process was prevented only
by the delays of copper etchers, so that we were able to utilize it only
five times on a large scale before I had to leave Munich.

Herr Gleissner, who wished to visit a friend in Frankfurt, accompanied
me on my way to Offenbach. I started at once on the new work and within
fourteen days I pulled the first proof on Herr Andre's own press. He was
so well satisfied, and, besides, had so thoroughly considered the
advantages of stone-printing, that he proposed to me to leave Munich
entirely and, with him as associate, extend the art in the best possible
way. He had three brothers, none of whom was engaged in a fixed
occupation. He intended to bring these into the partnership. Two were
in London, the youngest and the eldest. The latter was to return soon.
One brother had lived long in Paris, and was well acquainted with that
city as well as with French affairs. So he laid out the following plan.
We would try to obtain exclusive franchises in Paris, London, Berlin,
and Vienna. Then a stone-printery and art publication house was to be
opened in each city. His brothers should manage affairs, one each in
London, Paris, and Berlin, while I was to take the management in Vienna.
Offenbach and Frankfurt would remain under Herr Andre's management and
be the centre of control and union.

The plan seemed to be easy to realize, as there was no lack of means. I
could look for one fifth of the profits which would be earned by the
combined, very considerable capital of the Andre family. In addition,
Herr Andre possessed all the requisite knowledge and owned a great
business already. Therefore I agreed gladly, after making the condition
that Herr Gleissner was to remain a partner of mine and receive a decent
remuneration till the business was in working order.

Herr Andre was well content, for Herr Gleissner could be used as
compositor, corrector, and writer in the business, which was to consist
largely of music publication in the beginning.

Herr Gleissner and I returned to Munich to arrange our affairs there. He
intended to ask for three years' leave of absence. I planned, in order
to save Herr Steiner any embarrassment, and also to maintain our
privilege in Bavaria, since one could not tell how the Andre undertaking
might turn out, to so arrange that our work could be printed properly
during our absence, whether done by the Schul-fond, the Government, or
private persons. It gratified me also to have an opportunity to satisfy
my mother's wishes in regard to my brothers; and I gave my brothers,
Theobald and George, my press, my stones, and everything else that was
on hand, also the two trained apprentices, and only stipulated for
myself that I should have one fourth of the net profits, leaving the
accounting entirely to their sense of honor. They promised to keep
accurate books and work steadily and economically, and they received
from me minute instructions about transferring from the copper for Herr
Steiner. I taught them also how to handle the crayon process, which
promised an early harvest.

As soon as all was done I went to Offenbach with the whole Gleissner
family. A good quantity of stones had arrived there, and a few men,
previously trained, had been practicing in transcribing music. We were
able to begin on a large scale at once. Herr Andre had ten copper- and
zinc-plate presses at work. He stopped five and used the workmen for
stone-printing. He went to London, partly for business, partly to get
his youngest brother and to inform himself thoroughly about the
procedure necessary to obtain English patents.

One of our chief speculations in England was to be the application of
stone-printing to cotton. Once, when Herr Steiner conceived the idea of
illuminating pictures with stencils in the way used by card-makers, I
had made many experiments in that line. I cut out the parts to be
colored in oil-soaked paper, laid this on the picture, and passed a
roller over it with the desired color. The color was more even than with
a brush, but not everything could be cut out, because the stencils had
to have the necessary connection. Therefore I needed two stencils for
every color shade. Again, these thin stencils easily slipped out of
place, a defect that displeased me. Now, it happened that at times when
I was a little careless, the whole stencil would roll itself up on the
ink-roller. I found that it was possible to work even more surely when
this happened, provided one found the exact beginning of the stencil and
applied it minutely. But it was not possible to make more than twelve
impressions. Then the stencil had to be taken from the roller that the
latter might be inked again.

In this work the stencil paper often tore. To overcome this there was
only one remedy, which was to make the roller hollow and feed it with
color from inside. I did not have the time to try this and worked out
another plan. I cut out the places to be colored in felt or leather,
applied paste to their obverse sides, laid them face down on the exact
parts of the picture which were to be colored, rolled a perfectly round
roller over them, and the pieces adhered to the roller in their right
places. Then the roller was inked with the required color, and of course
took it only in the elevated parts. At both ends the roller had a strip
of leather of the same thickness as the cut-outs, thus making it certain
that it would not touch the ink except in the proper places. In this way
pictures could be illuminated very quickly, and several shades of color
could be obtained if the pieces were of different qualities of leather,
or of leather, cloth, and cotton, according to the shades desired. A
very moderate pressure sufficed for good and even work.

What could be more natural than that I should deduce that this sort of
printing might be utilized for cotton? Once inked, the roller was good
for ten to twelve impressions, if the operator merely used a little more
pressure as he proceeded. I saw also that the roller could easily be
colored by attaching another to revolve with it and convey the ink. That
would give us a form of cotton-printing that would proceed
automatically.

The idea was too important to be left untried. I took a little roller,
two inches in diameter and six inches long. I glued a piece of calfskin
completely around it and then cut a design into it. Then this roller was
so adjusted with relation to another of exactly the same dimensions that
both touched perfectly. On this second one, which was to convey the
color to the other, there rested a little box without a bottom, so that
the roller itself represented the bottom as soon as the box was pressed
on it, which was most easily done with two screws. The color was poured
into this box. Now when the lower roller was passed over linen or cotton
which was stretched on an evenly planed board with an under layer of
cloth, a continuous print was obtained, without off-set, and with such
celerity that it could be reckoned easily that with this process several
thousand yards a day could be produced.

When I invented the chemical printing afterward, I held that a stone
roller could be used for this work as well as a wooden one. I had too
little knowledge of the industry at that time and believed that cotton
print was done with oil-colors; for I thought that water-colors would
wash out. I was a complete stranger to this work. Therefore, I drew a
pretty cotton pattern on a stone plate and printed from it with oil
varnish and finely pulverized indigo. The impressions turned out very
handsome, so that I considered the matter settled and made no further
experiments. I imparted this idea to Herr Andre, who saw its importance
at once and determined to obtain a patent for it specially.

However, we had much to learn. As soon as he arrived in England he
discovered that rollers with the design on them were in general use in
England. So I had imagined mistakenly that my invention was new.
However, printing from stone was in itself valuable for a patent, but
Herr Andre unfortunately received the incorrect information that the
inventor himself must appear in England, and he decided to send me
there. I did not care to go; firstly, because I was vexed at the failure
of my hopes in regard to cotton-printing; and secondly, because I wished
to go to Vienna. However, I yielded to his representations, and within a
few weeks journeyed to London with one of his brothers who spoke
English.

We went through Hamburg to Cuxhafen and thence in an English packet-boat
to Yarmouth, where we landed after a six days' stormy passage.

My sojourn in London did not achieve its purpose, which was to establish
printing from stone. The exaggerated caution and precision of Herr
Philip Andre, who had been named as the man who was to manage the London
negotiations, caused a waste of seven months, during which nothing was
done to reach our object.

We lived with Herr Philip and he kept me at home most of the time, for
fear that I might betray our purpose, in which case some speculative
spirit might take out a patent before us and then compel us to buy him
off for some heavy sum. He did not reflect that a mere declaration is
not sufficient in England, but that an exact description of a process
must be deposited with the Patent Office.

As he could have rendered all these fears unnecessary by simply taking
out the patent, I could not understand why he delayed from month to
month, and at last I voiced my suspicion that he was not honest with me
and had some unknown designs. I declared that nothing would keep me
longer in England, which had become wearisome to me owing to my constant
seclusion; and my suspicions were increased by the entire lack of all
news from the Gleissners and from my family. When Herr Philip Andre
realized that I could be held back no longer, he went to work at last,
and in twelve days we had the patent in our hands. As I had trained Herr
Philip already in the art of stone-work, there was nothing to keep me
longer, and I began my homeward voyage at once with my former companion,
Herr Friedrich Andre.

My seven months' sojourn in London had the following results for myself
and for lithography:--

First, I had decided in Offenbach to use my spare time entirely for the
study of chemistry. Particularly did I want to learn everything that was
known about color, that I might use stone for cotton-printing. I bought
the best books and worked steadily, testing the teachings by experiment.

Second, I made many experiments with stone-ink, to find the very best
composition. The ingredients which I utilized in course of the time were
about as follows:--

      Soap--_a_, common tallow soaps; _b_, Venetian soap.
      B, wax.
      C, tallow, butter, and other animal fats.
      D, spermaceti.
      E, shellac.
      F, resins and Venetian turpentine.
      G, gum elastic.
      H, linseed oil.
      I, the fat contained in chocolate.
      L, various resinous products, such as mastic, copal, dragon's
            blood, gum elemi, quajac pensoe, etc.

Then I used various solvents besides the soap, such as--

      M, vegetable alkalies, among them tartaric acid.
      N, similar mineral alkalies.
      O, animal lyes, spirits of sal ammoniac, and sal volatile with
            spirits of ammonia.
      P, borax.
      Q, various metallic solutions.

It is evident that with these substances an endless number of
experiments can be made, not to count the variety of proportions.
Certainly it is not exaggeration when I say that during that time and
later I made many thousands of experiments, only to confirm my
experience that accidentally I had discovered the best compositions
during the first twenty or thirty investigations, and that my time after
that had been wasted, unless I counted the knowledge I had gained of
chemistry.

Thirdly, I made my first attempts at that time in the aqua-tint style,
and also practiced printing with several plates, which I had begun
previously under suggestion of Herr Steiner. The son of the Swiss
idyllic poet, Gessner, was in London at that time and was a good friend
of Herr Philip. He made some neat sketches for us in the crayon process,
which I had invented in Munich immediately after my invention of
chemical printing. I had exhibited the process to Professor Mitterer at
that time, and he thought that it might become valuable for art.

Thus my residence in London was not unimportant for lithography. The
complete lack of disturbance, the adequacy of all needed material,
enabled me to discover more than I might have learned in Offenbach. I
left England with a certain satisfaction, gained from the certainty that
I had raised my art to a high degree of perfection.

I am satisfied even to this day that the world would have many
masterpieces as the result, had I come into contact at that time with an
enterprising art publisher who would have engaged the needed artists and
undertaken interesting works. As it was, however, and as I shall show,
circumstances forced me into untoward positions, so that little or no
opportunity was left me to use my knowledge practically and in an
important way.

Immediately on my arrival in Offenbach, I received the displeasing news
that Herr Andre had sent Madame Gleissner to Vienna to claim the
exclusive franchise for the new printing process, and to enter lawsuit
against my mother, who had gone to Vienna with the same purpose.

The reason for this was as follows: My two brothers, Theobald and
George, who could not earn enough in Munich, had been engaged as
lithographers by Herr Andre in Offenbach on my request. In a
confidential mood I told them that I hoped to go to Vienna and open a
great printing establishment and art publication house with assistance
of Herr Andre, and that this establishment should make my fortune as
well as that of my family.

Probably they did not believe my promise, or they did not care to depend
on my fraternal feeling for something which they believed they could get
for themselves: enough, they wrote to my mother that it was unfair to
let Herr Andre become exclusive proprietor of the new process
everywhere, and as I was well established in London anyway, she would
better travel to Vienna and ask for a franchise. They sent her several
good proofs from the Andre press.

Would to Heaven this plan of theirs had succeeded! I should have been
spared many a succeeding sorrow, and I would have been glad for their
sakes. The world was large enough for me, and certainly it was not
thoroughly fair that they, the nearest relatives of the inventor, should
be shut out by the far-reaching plans of Herr Andre to obtain exclusive
franchises everywhere. To be sure, I had told them that I would give
them the Bavarian franchise; but as they had enjoyed it for several
months with little profit, this did not seem to them a tempting
equivalent.

The news of my mother's journey to Vienna had been brought to Madame
Gleissner quite accidentally, and it made her almost frantic.

When she used to charge me with depending so completely on Herr Andre's
promises, without possessing anything in writing, I used to comfort her
by pointing out his righteous character, and also by reminding her that
it was all agreed that I and Herr Gleissner should undertake the
printery in Vienna as part of the general enterprise, and that we were
to obtain the necessary advance funds as soon as I returned from
England. The repeated complaints that she made, many of them in the
presence of my brothers, possibly helped to give them the idea of trying
themselves for a franchise in Austria. They may have thought, "If our
brother is careless enough to depend on empty words, we will be wise
enough to obtain a certainty. It remains open to us always to share our
fortune with the inventor."

Madame Gleissner had entertained great hopes about living in splendid
Vienna and having means enough to take part in its brilliant life. This
made the news about my mother's errand all the more irritating. She did
not consider that an Imperial franchise is not easily obtained by women
who are not even well informed on the case at issue. She succeeded in
imparting her fears to Herr Andre, and as he himself was prevented from
going, he entered into her fool's counsel to send her to Vienna at once.
She had strong hopes of success, because as a matter of fact the
Bavarian franchise had been obtained entirely through her efforts, and
she also calculated that the Austrian Government would pay more heed to
the inventor himself than to his brothers, who could not equal his
attainments.

Herr Andre had kept it all, even to the journey of Madame Gleissner, a
secret from me, presumably because he wanted to save me annoyance and
also to prevent my hasty return from England.

Unfortunately I had conceived some suspicions in England, and these were
increased when I received this unexpected news on my arrival in
Offenbach. What was worse, Herr Gleissner gave me a letter from his
wife, in which she adjured me to hurry to Vienna with all speed, as
Andre was planning to deceive me and set me aside as a mere tool as soon
as I had founded his own fortune.

This letter, which contained no evidence but only lamentations, was
accompanied by another from her landlord in Vienna, a very reputable
merchant. It seemed to bear her out, for he warned me in it to be
cautious in my relations with Andre and to hurry to Vienna if I wished
to obtain the franchise, which could not escape me as a most influential
man had come to our support and it depended merely on the evidence to be
furnished by me.

Greatly as my suspicions were increased by this, I hoped that everything
was due merely to misunderstanding, and I proposed to Herr Andre to let
me go to Vienna, where I would inform myself thoroughly and make strong
efforts to obtain the franchise. He denied my request, saying that there
was nothing more to do in Vienna, as the Government had turned both
women away, and the whole plan was spoiled as the whole art and
copper-etching trade had become apprehensive and was united in
opposition to the new process. He said that I should rather go quickly
to work to transfer his music from zinc plates to the stone, because he
had an excellent opportunity to sell his entire stock of zincs, which
would give us a new capital of forty thousand gulden for the greater
enterprises.

I realized the good sense of this, but would not admit that a delay of
three or four weeks could interfere with it, as the entire transfers
could not be completed in less than a year, and the slight delay,
therefore, could be made up by additional work or by engaging a few more
assistants. I insisted on my demand, all the more as I had spent seven
months in England on his account. In the heat of the succeeding dispute
he reminded me of the helpless position in which he had found me, and
said that as partner in his business, I owed him all my present fortune.
Conscious as I was of my honest intention to help him to the best of my
ability, and also of the unbounded trustfulness with which I had
imparted to him far more than was called for in our contract, I was so
deeply hurt that I forgot myself and tore up our agreement, which had
been signed only the day before and which assured for me one fifth of
all profits of the Andre business. I threw the pieces down with the
exclamation that I did not wish to make my fortune through his means.

This was one of the most important moments in my life, and in the
process of lithography. It gave my work an entirely new direction,
hurled me into a mass of troubles, and brought it about that Herr Andre
himself did not gain anything like the expected profits from the new
art. Indeed, he lost heavily in London and France, whereas, had we
remained together, lithography might now be highly perfected in both
these countries and produce no small wealth for its users.

When Andre saw that I was determined to go to Vienna, he yielded, but
assured me that I would go in vain and achieve no result.

The lawsuit between Madame Gleissner and my mother, which Herr Andre
considered the greatest obstacle in his way, still continued; and in
order to get it out of the way once and for all, I took my brothers,
George and Theobald, who had been dismissed by Herr Andre, to Vienna
with me to combine with me. Andre told me afterward, after our
relations had reached final rupture, that this act had annoyed him most,
and that it was the main reason for giving up all dealings with me,
because it was inconceivable to him how any one, without the utmost
weakness of character, could forgive such treachery as theirs. He did
not reflect that I, who knew selfishness only by name, had not felt
their affront so keenly, and that my brotherly affection excused it and
made me trust that it never had been their intention to shut me out
entirely from any gains they might make.



PART II

FROM 1800 TO 1806


It was in August, 1800, that I went to Vienna with my brothers. In
Regensburg we met my mother, who had come to visit one of her daughters
because the decision of the Imperial Austrian Government had been
delayed too long for her patience. She assured me that when she
petitioned for the privilege she had named not only my brothers but me,
too, and had asked it for us three.

This assurance gave me great joy, and I determined absolutely to urge
Madame Gleissner to accept my brothers as partners. I thought that if we
three worked industriously and unitedly, we would succeed much better
and more quickly. I entered Vienna with excellent hopes, based mostly on
a letter from Madame Gleissner, saying that the influential man who was
interested in our cause had promised to advance us six thousand gulden.
But these fine things retired into dark shadows when I learned, in my
first conversation with her, that all these promises were made dependent
on conditions.

The whole understanding rested on the following: Madame Gleissner lodged
with a prominent family. Andre himself had told her that she was to live
well and exhibit no lack of money, because she was much more likely to
obtain the franchise if the Government were led to expect that it would
bring wealthy people into the country. Therefore Madame Gleissner
considered it necessary to take part in all amusements and fashions of
her hosts. Her monthly expenditures were beyond the sum considered
necessary by Herr Andre's friend in Vienna, who had been authorized to
pay her an allowance. Friendly solicitude caused him to write to
Offenbach that Madame Gleissner knew nothing of economy, and that it was
to be feared if the franchise were not granted in Herr Andre's name, he
would have too little power to check her extravagance in the future. He
added that judging from her utterances and her present behavior, with
the franchise still in question, it was only too likely that she
intended to spend Herr Andre's money for show and society instead of for
the business.

Therefore, he advised that, unless Andre was sure that Senefelder had
enough character to oppose her with the necessary firmness, we be
treated solely as subordinates and thus be prevented from using his
credit to his loss.

Well meant as this counsel was, it simply furnishes an addition to the
thousands of cases where exaggerated timidity, coupled with secrecy,
does more harm than good.

Andre knew my intense gratitude to Herr Gleissner and his family, and he
suspected that I would always live in a certain dependence on them and
would pay little attention to their financial doings. The Gleissners had
awakened a fear of their extravagance in him before this time. He knew,
for instance, that I had kept little of the money he had paid me for the
secret of our process, but had turned almost all over to them. Again, he
had granted us the sum of one thousand six hundred gulden for our
support in Offenbach until the business should be in operation. Of this
Herr Gleissner was to draw six hundred gulden and I one thousand gulden.
I was a bachelor and did not need so much as a family. Therefore I
reversed this, and gave Herr Gleissner one thousand gulden, keeping six
hundred for myself. But the latter also went into the Gleissner
treasury, because Herr Andre, who had come to like me very much, made me
live in his house and eat with him. He even kept a horse for me, that I
might have the exercise necessary for my health, and if he bought
himself a new article of dress I was sure to get one like it; and I had
to take part in all the amusements of his home, though many times I
would rather have worked.

Thus I had absolutely no needs and did not require money. All the more
did Madame Gleissner require. She strained everything to be very elegant
and could not get along with the money she received, but asked for
further, quite considerable advances while I was in London, and Herr
Andre granted these willingly through friendship for me.

Therefore Andre's suspicions seemed well founded; and as in his heart he
was firmly determined to treat me as a brother, he believed that a mere
outward formality and my hitherto quite unknown name would make no real
difference, but rather that the Vienna undertaking would benefit if it
had his own well-known name and excellent credit at its head in the very
beginning.

So he wrote to his friend in Vienna that he agreed with him, and he gave
authority to him to act as he thought best for the mutual good.

This gentleman told Madame Gleissner at once that Herr Andre had decided
to ask for the franchise in his own name to give value to the
undertaking, and that she was to appear before court and declare that
she withdrew her petition and turned it over to him. She suspected a
trick and refused. A dispute followed, and there came rebukes for her
heavy expenditures. The climax was reached with the threat that, if she
insisted on her refusal, Herr Andre would cease from that moment to let
her have any money and would let her support herself.

This last, which Madame Gleissner wrote me in a very bitter letter,
outraged me; for I held it cruel to send a woman to a strange city where
she had no relatives or friends, and then to tell her: "Now do my will,
or I will leave it to bitter necessity and your own helplessness to tame
you." To be sure, it was only a threat, and surely it never lay in Herr
Andre's mind. His friend never ceased to give her money. But the harm
had been done.

Madame Gleissner appeared at her host's table with signs of tears that
aroused the sympathy of her host, Herr von Bogner, a most worthy and
reputable merchant. She told him everything, complained bitterly about
my gullibility, and generally painted everything in such colors that
Herr Bogner could not well help thinking that Herr Andre did not
consider promises any too sincerely. It was only then that he learned
Madame Gleissner's business and was told that the new art promised a
great profit.

Herr Andre's far-reaching plans for foreign exploitation seemed to him
to confirm what she said. Herr Bogner thought that Herr Andre would not
invest so much money if stone-print were not a valuable invention, and
he asked Madame Gleissner, point-blank: "Why do you need Herr Andre at
all? Try to obtain the Austrian franchise for yourself, and then, if you
choose, you can take him into the company. Then he will be obligated to
you and will have to meet your wishes, whereas now the reverse is the
case."

Madame Gleissner interposed that Herr Andre had the capital necessary
for establishing the process on a large scale, to which Herr Bogner
responded that it was better to begin modestly. "A good thing," said he,
"grows of itself. And you must not imagine that we here in Austria have
no appreciation of useful inventions and undertakings. There are many
who will assist the arts and industries. There is even a special fund
from which as much as one thousand gulden may be advanced to develop an
invention that has proved itself to be of merit. I myself might not be
disinclined to become a partner after I have examined the matter
properly; also I can recommend a very enterprising, active man, who has
much weight with the Ministers and even with His Majesty the Emperor,
and who has obtained exclusive franchises for others. He is named von
Hartl, is Imperial Court Agent, and is a very sensible and honorable
man, who will surely tell you at once whether or not anything can be
done here with the process."

Herr von Bogner kept his promise, and introduced Madame Gleissner the
very next day to Herr von Hartl. She explained our relations with Andre
and described the new invention, wherein, to be sure, she did not fail
to boast of its advantages and beauties. Among other specimens she
produced a piece of cotton which I had printed in Offenbach.

This was very pretty, the print being so sharp and clear that it seemed
to exceed the best English work. It happened that just then a great
company with a capital of one and one half million gulden had been
formed by Herr von Hartl to introduce English machine-spinning in
Austria. They had secured a very skillful English mechanic named
Thornton, who had been under contract to erect similar machines for a
Hamburg merchant. They had paid a great sum to have him released from
this contract, had bought his machines, and had done enough sample work
so that it had been resolved to push the enterprise through even if
several more millions were needed. The chief objection that was urged at
that time was that an adequate sale of the products was doubtful because
of the widespread business that the English controlled. The reply was
that they must seek to work up a great part of their product
themselves,--that is, combine with their spinnery the industries of
weaving, dyeing, and cotton-printing.

As soon as Herr von Hartl heard that the new invention promised great
advantages for cotton-printing, he pledged himself to lay the matter
before His Majesty at once, and he promised that if I would come to
Vienna and produce the necessary proofs he would surely get the
exclusive franchise for me. Furthermore, when Madame Gleissner told him,
in reply to a question, that we would need about six thousand gulden in
the beginning, he announced his readiness to furnish that sum himself if
I could convince him that a real benefit was to be produced by the new
art.

Madame Gleissner wrote to me, but withheld the condition of Herr von
Hartl that I must convince him. I would have taken care not to give such
greedy heed to her, for I knew from experience how difficult it is to
convince most people. But, I was determined to show my friend Andre that
I and my art were by no means at a loss without him. Besides, I always
had the royal Bavarian franchise to fall back on. His secrecy had shaken
my confidence, and I was determined to find out everything for myself.

Many years later, when I reviewed everything calmly, I was sufficiently
convinced that Herr Andre always had meant honestly by me; and I count
myself fortunate to have him still as my friend. But at that time
various misunderstandings brought it about that he did not give me full
knowledge of everything, before he took steps contrary to our agreement
and without my cognizance that could not fail to impress me as strange,
since I was ignorant of the circumstances. Besides, he defended himself
against my accusations in a manner that affronted my vanity deeply, for
he gave me to understand plainly that my past weakness in the matter of
the Gleissners' extravagance proved that I should always have to dance
to their tune. It angered me that he should turn against me, as
weakness, my recognition of the patient faithfulness of the Gleissners
through the many sorrows that had overwhelmed us since the beginning of
the process; and the more so as I was giving them merely that which I
did not require and which was my own undisputed property. According to
that, I would have earned the reputation of being a firm, strong man had
I used my superfluous earnings to buy a few watches, a ring, or some
garments, rather than to use it to pay a debt of gratitude! Besides,
whatever Herr Andre had advanced to them was something that had been
done without my knowledge; therefore I accounted all his charges as
being only empty words, used to cover a proposed piece of trickery.

After my first conversation with Madame Gleissner, but more especially
with Herr Andre's representative in Vienna, I realized that the latter
could not be censured for his measures of prudence, and I repented that
I had so easily given way to my quick sensitiveness. The _franchise_
evidently was very uncertain. The only hope for it lay in the assistance
of Herr von Hartl, and, therefore, depended on my ability to convince
him. I had spent my money traveling, and instead of finding Madame
Gleissner in funds, as I had assumed from her letter, I found her ill
with only a few guldens, and in addition I had two brothers on my hands
who also were penniless and looked to me for their support.

Madame Gleissner assured me that Herr von Hartl would assist us and that
I could reckon also on help from her host, who had counseled her to part
from Herr Andre and seek the privilege for herself. I mustered up
sufficient courage to explain our situation to the latter gentleman and
to ask him if we could count on his help for the beginning. This request
must have been unexpected by Herr von Bogner, as Madame Gleissner's
manner of living had indicated anything rather than lack of wealth.
However, he liked my frankness, and promised active aid. He gave me a
handsome room, and I and Madame Gleissner ate at his own table. He paid,
also, for the lodging of my brothers in another house.

Two days after our arrival, I and my brothers visited Herr von Hartl in
his country residence in Dornbach. We were received most kindly, and he
promised me his aid if I could give satisfactory proofs. So far as the
franchise was concerned, however, he showed me that it could be taken
out only in my name, and this, he explained, would be difficult enough,
as all the art dealers were against it. To ask for it in the name of
three brothers was out of the question. Neither, said he, would it be
necessary, as I could make a separate contract with them through which
they could be partners with me.

Herr von Hartl, who, as Court Agent, naturally knew all that was to be
done, would not have said this without good reason. My brothers,
however, were highly incensed, and declared that they would not be
dependent on me, but would be their own masters. Had they possessed the
money necessary to travel they would, no doubt, have carried out this
resolve at once, for they had been angered already by the fact that Herr
von Bogner kept only me as his guest. My representations were without
effect. They told me that they would return to Munich and practice the
Bavarian privilege in my name if Herr von Hartl would give them the
journey money; otherwise they would be forced to listen to the
proposition of several Viennese art dealers and sell them the secret of
the stone-printing art.

As this would have destroyed all chance for getting an exclusive
privilege, Herr von Hartl gave them the money, and Theobald and George
Senefelder returned to Munich, after making a contract with me which
permitted them to establish a printing business and, if possible, an art
business, my share in which was to be one third of the net profit after
deducting the cost of their own support. This contract was necessary to
authorize them to practice under my privilege.

Meantime I had a small hand-press made and produced several pieces of
work for Herr von Hartl, which gave him a clearer idea of the new art,
and convinced him finally that it was worth while to risk something on
it. He made a full contract with me, in which he bound himself to
furnish money and everything necessary, and use all his influence to
further the business, while I was to give all my time and knowledge. The
profits were to be divided into two equal parts, one of which was to be
his, while the other was to be divided between myself and Herr
Gleissner. He allotted a proper sum for my support, told me to rent a
comfortable residence, and authorized me to buy some large presses. He
told me frankly that the use of stone for cotton-printing had the most
interest for him, and that he cared about the other forms of printing
only as paying for our expenditures. When the big spinning-shops were
ready, said he, he would give me so great an opportunity that I could
let Herr Gleissner have all the art- and music-printing to himself.

What glorious prospects opened themselves to me! What could I think
except that it would require merely industry to become a famous, happy
man in a short period?

Here I must interpolate the account of a happening that brought about a
total rupture with Andre. Until now our relations had not been wholly
severed. His last word was that I would, no doubt, go to Vienna in vain,
and in that case I should return to him, as he would receive me with
open arms. When I saw his correspondent in Vienna and learned from him
that he had orders to let me have money if I wanted it; when I perceived
further that Madame Gleissner had been too hasty, and that all the
tangle was caused by misunderstandings, I dismissed all anger and wrote
to my friend Andre at once, telling him that I had found things not
nearly so bad in Vienna as he imagined. It was true, I said, that the
two women had failed to obtain the franchise, but mostly because they
could give no demonstrations. It was quite different, now that the
inventor himself was petitioning for it, especially as Herr von Hartl
had promised absolutely to take our part. If, therefore, Andre were
willing to spend at most one thousand gulden for a press and to pay for
our support and necessary working expenses for six months, there would
be absolutely no doubt of fortunate outcome.

Had I had the happy thought to ask Herr von Hartl to add a few lines, my
letter might have had the intended result. But I considered my word
sufficient, and unluckily my letter reached Offenbach when Andre was
absent, and was answered by his brother in about the following fashion:

His brother, he said, was absent; but as he knew his opinion exactly,
he would not keep me waiting. I must not be offended, but he believed
that my ready trustfulness, caused by my good-heartedness, had played me
a prank again. He was completely convinced from the advices of their
Vienna friends that the privilege would be granted only if his brother
removed bag and baggage to Vienna and had himself naturalized there,
something which his affairs did not permit. I would discover, soon
enough, that the lovely promises made me were nothing but air.

Then he went on to say that even if the sum of one thousand gulden
really were only a trifle, it would not produce the desired result.
Madame Gleissner, said he, had incurred debts of one hundred and fifty
gulden since she had broken with his brother, and as she had used this
sum not for his good but rather for his harm, it was only fair that she
pay it herself. I, probably, would be in debt nearly one hundred gulden,
now that I had been in Vienna some weeks with my brothers. If I wanted
to build a press in Vienna where wood is dear, it would cost easily one
hundred and fifty gulden. Then there would be one hundred gulden for
stones, etc. I would need a dwelling, for which I would have to pay at
least one hundred gulden in advance. This would leave only four hundred
gulden. The winter was at hand, neither my brothers nor Madame Gleissner
had the necessary clothing, everything would be needed. In brief, he
assured me, before many weeks the one thousand gulden would be spent and
in the end there would be no press, no stones, and no specimen work.

Therefore, he concluded, I should not feel affronted if he told me his
heartfelt thoughts. The aspect of the Vienna matter would, probably, be
different if my over-great good-heartedness did not put fetters upon me
that must prevent anybody from placing full confidence in my advice. I
would better, therefore, dismiss the plans, and be sure that nobody
meant it more sincerely with me than, etc.

It may be supposed that this letter gave me little pleasure; and I made
up my mind to show Herr Andre that he had made a mistake and had thrown
away a great profit idly. I made the contract with Herr von Hartl, and
we went to work actively at once. I had a large lever press built and
asked the Austrian Government to appoint a commission to examine the
process. This was done, and besides the Mayor, there appeared the
factory inspector, Herr von Jaquin, who was a Professor of Chemistry,
and the director of the academy of copper-plate engravers, Herr
Schmutzer. I showed them the various methods of printing from stone on
paper, cotton, and calico, and explained the difference of my process
from all others. My demonstrations were applauded, and the commission
certified most heartily in favor of my petition for the exclusive
privilege.

In addition, Herr von Hartl went with me to a meeting of the Imperial
Councilors, then to the Imperial Counsel of State, von Gruber, to Count
Lazansky, and, finally, to His Majesty, the Emperor himself. Everywhere
I had to make demonstrations with my little hand-press, at which time
Herr von Hartl, to my great joy, always acted as cicerone and eagerly
described the manifold advantage which the new art had for so many
branches of the arts and sciences.

Everywhere we received praise and were promised the speedy issuance of
the privilege. As, however, the matter had to take a regular course, and
it was evident that some time must elapse, we petitioned meantime for a
mere license to work, which we received within a few weeks, so that I
was able to begin printing without further delay.

Herr von Hartl became more friendly each day, and opened for me the most
beautiful outlook on the future. My easily moved imagination interpreted
his speeches as brightly as possible, and I imagined that I saw fortune
and position close at hand. I worked all the harder, therefore, to
fulfill his expectations; and as his chief object was printing on cotton
I threw myself zealously into the study of color, as absolute permanence
was needed besides beauty of printing.

During this time Herr Gleissner had left Offenbach and had returned to
Munich with his children. As I was in partnership with him, and he could
make himself useful in the printing of music, Herr von Hartl decided to
have him come to Vienna, and his wife took it on herself to get him and
arrange for an extension of his leave of absence. She found him in the
saddest of circumstances. In his ignorance of such things, he had sold
all the furniture in Offenbach for a mere joke of a sum. Most of this
money had been used to defray his traveling expenses, and she found the
family stripped of even necessaries. What was to be done? Her husband
and children needed clothing that they might not make a bad impression
in Vienna, her husband's debts had to be paid, and then came the
traveling expenses. The money advanced by Herr von Hartl was not nearly
enough for all this. She wrote to me to ask him for an additional sum of
three or four hundred gulden.

This was exceedingly unpleasant for me. I should have to tell him the
truth, and thus place Herr Gleissner in a bad light right in the
beginning. Furthermore, he had received no too favorable a report about
the domestic management of the two, either from Herr Andre's friend in
Vienna or perhaps from Herr Andre himself. It was torture for me to ask
him for money, especially if it was to be used for something not
absolutely necessary for the business in hand, as I knew his opinions in
that respect. Willingly as Herr von Hartl gave money when it was needed
to achieve a useful object, so reluctant was he if he deemed that it was
to be wasted. In my embarrassment I dropped a hint as to the situation
to our hostess, Madame von Tannenberg. She counseled me at once not to
ask, as the family would lose the respect of Herr von Hartl entirely,
and offered voluntarily to advance Madame Gleissner four hundred gulden
herself, if I would guarantee the payment of it in half a year. Nothing
seemed more certain to me than that I could save such a sum in that
time. I accepted her offer and sent the money to Munich on the same day.
I would not mention this apparently trivial matter, if it were not for
the fact that in the end it was the cause of the ruin of all my hopes in
Vienna.

The dealers had spared no pains to oppose my franchise in the beginning,
before they knew of my connection with Herr von Hartl, and while they
still considered me an unimportant foreigner, who had neither friends
nor influence. When they discovered the truth, their noise became
clamorous, for they had to fear in earnest now that their trade would
suffer, since so eminent and rich a man was associated with the new art.
The more important art dealers feared it less than the smaller ones,
among whom Herr Sauer and the new Industrie-Komptoir were my most active
enemies. Despite this, there opened a way suddenly by which I could
make peace with the art dealers and even draw considerable profit from
them.

Through Herr von Hartl, I became acquainted with a skillful
clavier-player, Teuber, who was also a composer, and at once showed
great interest in my invention. He spoke to his acquaintances, Herr
Sonnleithner and Herr Ricci. Through their intervention the art dealers
asked me if I would abstain from establishing a music-printery of my
own, providing they guaranteed me a sufficient amount of work. I
calculated that I could print six thousand sheets of music a day with
the three presses that I had planned. This, at the low price of
twenty-five kreuzer per hundred impressions, would amount in all to a
sum of twenty-five gulden. Also if I accepted, say, work that would
average three hundred impressions, there would be needed ten stones,
counting two sheets to each stone. Thus there would be a further
engraving profit of ten gulden, because I received fifty kreuzer for
each sheet, but paid my note-writer only twenty kreuzer. For house,
color, acids, polisher's wages, etc., there must be reckoned four gulden
a day. The six printers to operate the three presses would cost four
gulden a day also. Now if I reckoned two gulden a day for possible
accidental errors, etc., there would still remain twenty-five gulden a
day profit. This meant seven thousand and five hundred gulden clear
profit in the three hundred working days of a year, without the least
risk.

As I considered this a satisfactory profit for one single branch of my
art, I told Herr Sonnleithner that I would attempt to induce Herr von
Hartl to give up the idea of establishing his own publishing house,
provided that the united art dealers would guarantee me that amount of
work and agree also to reimburse me if the presses were not kept busy,
excepting through my own fault. Herr Sonnleithner welcomed the proposal,
not doubting that the dealers would need all the work stipulated, and,
indeed, declaring that the Art and Industrie-Komptoir alone might give
me twice that much.

I knew that Herr von Hartl had entertained little regard for this branch
of work. Therefore I thought it would delight him to find that he could
not only relieve himself from further expense in this line, but gain
several thousand gulden. I was mistaken. He deduced that music-printing
was not so unimportant as he had imagined; and he told me to inform the
dealers that I would take as much work as they offered at low prices,
but that we could not make ourselves dependent on them.

As the dealers refused decidedly to give me the means with their own
hands of building up a great establishment, the project fell entirely.

However, Herr von Hartl now had declared himself in favor of
establishing a music-printery; and a few days later there came a highly
favorable opportunity to start one at once under happy auspices,
together with a complete art publishing establishment.

An acquaintance of my landlady, to whom I had showed my printery, sent
for me to tell me that Herr Eder, an art dealer, wished to give up his
business because of illness and was willing to sell reasonably. This
friend enlarged on the luck it would be to obtain this well-situated
shop, which earned several thousand gulden by printing birthday and New
Year's cards alone, at the very easy terms which Herr Eder had suggested
provisionally. He desired me to see him at once, under the pledge of
secrecy, which pledge Herr von Hartl was to give also, as Herr Eder did
not wish to injure his credit by offering his establishment openly for
sale.

Herr Eder did, indeed, offer most favorable terms, according to my
opinion. He showed me that on the average the net profit of his business
had been ten thousand gulden annually during the last ten years. (At
that time the gulden notes stood at par.) Furthermore he estimated the
value of all his printed stock only at the cost of manufacture, and the
great stock of copper plates, many newly etched, at merely their value
as copper. The large stock of different papers, with the many writing
and drawing materials, were estimated at cost value, also. For his
trading rights, and for his excellent rental contract which had many
years to run, he did not ask anything. The sum that he asked for
everything was forty thousand gulden, of which only ten thousand gulden
were to be paid at once, the rest being paid in annual installments
during the following ten years.

If Herr von Hartl had accepted this, there would have been four thousand
gulden net profit a year in it. And by combining with it the advantages
of the new process, the profit was certain to be greater. To begin a
new publishing house without mercantile knowledge, without knowing what
the public wanted, would be far more difficult than to continue one that
already was in operation, especially so as Herr Eder had offered to
remain for a year as associate to teach me the business.

I cannot yet understand why Herr von Hartl discarded this proposition.
Perhaps he feared that he would be overreached in some way. He might
have been more receptive had he been able to foresee that his new
establishment would cost him a sum of twenty thousand gulden within a
very few years without advancing toward being even the ghost of a
business. Perhaps I did not possess the gift of convincing others. At
any rate, both projects failed to meet with approval. That Herr von
Hartl could be convinced, however, even to his plain injury, I will
prove later. For lithography the failure of this plan was a great loss,
because it would have given me opportunity to get into the art line ten
years earlier than I did, and make useful application of my inventions.

The family Gleissner now arrived in Vienna and brought one of my former
apprentices, Mathias Grünewald. Meantime some presses had been
completed, and we could begin to print. Gleissner's symphonies recently
had been much praised in a musical paper of Leipsic, and he proposed to
us to begin with a few of his works. Of course it would have been wiser
to begin with a good work by a famous man, whose name was sufficiently
popular in Vienna. I did visit Herr Doctor Haydn, but received the reply
that he could not compose any more and would only review old works
thenceforth.

Immediately at the commencement a stock of stones was needed. As we
could foresee that we should need some thousands of stones in the course
of time, Herr von Hartl decided to make a trip with me, by way of Munich
and Augsburg, to the quarries of Solenhofen that we might inform
ourselves on the spot about the best way to get stones.

A further inducement to make this journey was that he wished to examine
the estate of Niedau, which had been described as being very favorably
situated for the erection of manufactories. Herr von Hartl already had a
large spinnery in operation. This, and perhaps the printery, he planned
to establish in Niedau, because there both workers and property were
cheaper. He intended to leave only the business offices in Vienna.

The establishment of this spinnery had so important an effect on my fate
as well as on the future of lithography that I must describe it here.
When I arrived in Vienna, Count von Saurau had just gone to Petersburg
as Austrian Ambassador. Being a patron of home industries, he had
advanced ten thousand gulden some time before to an expert spinner named
Mistelbauer, to erect looms for manufacturing fine English and French
stuffs in Austria, a work for which Mistelbauer was perfectly qualified.
When the Count departed, Herr von Hartl took charge of several of his
interests, among them the Mistelbauer spinnery. Thus at the next Vienna
Messe (market-fair), Mistelbauer visited Herr von Hartl to make an
accounting. The goods that Mistelbauer had brought convinced Herr von
Hartl of his skill and technical capacity. The details of his processes,
and his ingenuity in operating so many looms with so little capital,
indicated to Herr von Hartl that increased capital would bring
enormously increased results. As the spinnery company had as good as
decided that a good part of their own products should be further worked
by themselves, Herr von Hartl considered it a lucky circumstance to meet
a particularly good weaver and also a cotton-printer, who alleged that
he could print the home-made cottons exactly as well as the English
printers and possibly at smaller cost.

He wrote to Count von Saurau that he was willing to assist Mistelbauer
with more money. Count Saurau agreed, and Herr von Hartl advanced money
to Mistelbauer till it reached a sum of forty thousand gulden. He
appeared only as a creditor, however, and held a mortgage on the entire
spinnery, with all its present and future stock, in order to be covered
should the operations fail.

Now Mistelbauer was a man who had little or no mercantile talent. He did
not understand book-keeping, and though he had managed the original
small establishment pretty well, he was not equal to the bigger one. A
factor should have been appointed to manage the commercial end and the
accounts. Another trouble was that Herr von Hartl, in order to satisfy
himself, continually demanded new sample work from him, which, on the
other hand, pleased Mistelbauer, as it enabled him to show his skill.

Thus, instead of working steadily along the original sound lines, he
kept going into new things. Among others he erected looms to make color,
and print Manchester fabrics. Regardless of the fact that I (as he well
knew) was working at cotton-printing, and that Herr von Hartl intended
to work my inventions, he managed to induce that gentleman to let him
erect a cotton-printery, a matter which he did not understand in the
least.

Mistelbauer had been a poor peasant boy of Helmannsöd by Linz. He had
gone into foreign lands in his youth, but when he obtained the ten
thousand gulden from Count Saurau, he selected his native place for the
works. Even at that time his improved condition aroused the envy of the
village; but he lived in a poor hut and differed in nothing from the
other inhabitants. When Herr von Hartl assisted him, he succeeded soon
in convincing him that they needed more room, and obtained his consent
for building. Instead of erecting a factory, he erected a considerable
dwelling, the cost of which was far beyond the original estimates. On
account of all the other work undertaken at the same time, nothing could
be finished in time, and Mistelbauer was continually too late for the
markets with his product. As a result, instead of being punctual with
all his payments as he had been heretofore, he could not even pay his
interest, and Herr von Hartl had to make new advances all the time.
Naturally Herr von Hartl began to feel apprehensive, and he decided to
visit Mistelbauer on the occasion of our journey to Solenhofen.

When we reached Helmannsöd, Herr von Hartl shook his head dubiously,
especially when he found the accounts in the greatest disorder. But the
great stock of goods, though most of them were only half finished, and
the thought that everything could be made to go smoothly again with
better management, encouraged him, and he instructed Mistelbauer,
showing him how to establish order in his works as well as in the
accounts.

Then we continued our journey. In Munich, where we remained three days,
I visited my mother and my brothers, who all lived together and were
operating a press that worked mostly for Herr Falter. According to their
assurances, their income had hardly sufficed to support them.

In Augsburg, Herr von Hartl contracted with a paper dealer for the paper
necessary for music-printing, and in Solenhofen he bought several
hundred stones for this work and made arrangements for future supplies.
Then we returned through Regensburg and Passau. This whole journey was
one of the greatest pleasures of my life. The weather was excellent, and
Herr von Hartl was so kind to me that I was more than ever convinced of
his sincere desire for my success.

We engaged two writers of music immediately on our return to Vienna. One
was J. Held, a young man recently married, who earned his living by
teaching and copying. The second was his brother-in-law. They
comprehended the process quickly and soon were so skillful that each
earned twelve gulden and more a week, despite the fact that we rarely
paid them more than twenty and twenty-four kreuzer for each sheet.

The new smaller works of Herr Gleissner were finished very soon, and it
became necessary to find more work to keep my etchers and four printers
busy. I asked Herr von Hartl to buy some compositions from Vienna's best
musicians, such as Krommer, Beethoven, etc. He was willing, but desired
to wait for a proper opportunity to speak to Herr Krommer. Thus some
weeks passed, and in order to keep the force busy, Herr Gleissner
composed continually and printed his work. Nearly a whole year passed
that way, and still Herr von Hartl had found no opportunity (owing to
his many affairs) to arrange with Herr Krommer or other composers.

So it happened that, with the exception of a few overtures, our whole
stock of paper and a whole year's work were used solely to print Herr
Gleissner's compositions. I myself had hardly anything to do with this
printing, which was managed entirely by Herr Gleissner; for I devoted
all my time to the study of color and to the necessary thousands of
experiments.

Here I had made the unpleasant discovery that most of what was in the
books was incorrect, or so incompletely stated that, before one could
understand the instructions, one needed to know the entire process of
cotton-making and printing. I cannot understand now why it never struck
Herr von Hartl or me that I did not need this knowledge at all, and that
all that was necessary in order to apply my method to cotton-printing
was for me to demonstrate how the printing could be done well and
quickly. To get color results it was necessary merely to engage a good
color expert, who could analyze colors and decide if they were available
for my process. That would have saved us a year and a considerable sum
of money which my experiments had cost. I confess that I had a mistaken
ambition on this point, wishing to understand everything myself. Then
the study of chemistry was most attractive to me, because I found myself
discovering new things of importance for my art all the time.

When at last I was completely informed in the matter of color, I went
with Herr von Hartl to the great machine-spinnery in Pottendorf. Here I
became acquainted with Herr Thornton and his remarkably complete
installation. With his assistance we made a stone-press for cotton, to
print the cotton from large plates. But the correct register of each
impression made so much trouble for us that I foresaw the need for many
further experiments and inventions. Besides, Herr Thornton was too
partial to the English process of cylinder-printing to feel particularly
favorable to the stone-process; and in the end it was considered best to
order a great piece of stone from Solenhofen from which we might make an
eight-inch cylinder.

It was six months before we obtained the requisite stone. During this
period it struck me that perhaps the cylinder did not need to be stone,
but that we might use copper cylinders, as in England. Herr Thornton
objected that copper cylinders must be engraved with the graving tool,
and that patterns for cotton should not be etched, since, if etching
were practical, the English, who understand etching perfectly, no doubt
would etch the cylinders.

To be sure, I could not answer this argument, but I was convinced that a
deep-etched stone would print as perfectly and handsomely as the best
copper plate. Why, then, could it not be done with copper, since copper
permitted itself to be etched so well? I made a little experiment at
once, and it succeeded perfectly. Herr Thornton proposed to make
completely sure. He had a small model press from England, the cylinder
of which had been engraved by the best cotton copper engraver of
England. Though it was only six inches long and three inches thick it
had cost twenty pounds to engrave. He proposed to have an exactly
similar cylinder made, which I was to etch in the same design, so that
competitive impressions could be made with both cylinders. The
proposition was accepted. To save money, it was decided to make a
cylinder from zinc instead of from copper.

After a few days it was ready and I drove with Herr von Hartl to
Pottendorf, where we arrived at half-past ten o'clock in the morning. I
started eagerly to do the drawing. As I perceived immediately, it
consisted purely of circular lines, and therefore I succeeded in
preparing the cylinder, drawing the design, and etching it before two
o'clock, at which time we were to have luncheon.

Mr. Thornton, who had expected that I would need at least eight days,
was astonished by my speed. To all appearances, the etched cylinder was
as good as the engraved one, and now it was merely a question of the
printing. He made the first impression with the copper cylinder, which,
of course, produced a very pretty piece of work. But when mine was
adjusted and the first impression came out, the astonishment of all
present reached its maximum, for the impressions were exactly as clear,
but at least twice as strong and therefore more beautiful. The reason
for this was that the engraving became narrower at the bottom, and
therefore held hardly half as much color as the etched lines.

The practicability of my etching process was settled; and Herr von Hartl
waited only to lay the matter before the society at the next general
meeting before proceeding to its exploitation on a large scale.

Truly it was high time for him to get some returns for his many
expenses. The stone-printery had cost him at least six thousand gulden
to this date. In return for this investment he had a good quantity of
stones, several presses, and a great stock of Gleissner's music, which
represented an income of twenty thousand gulden, if it could be sold.

At last we obtained the long-sought franchise (in 1803), and Herr von
Hartl decided to begin the business. I proposed to him to rent a shop
and engage an experienced man to manage it. But he replied that I was
merely suggesting another burden of nearly two thousand gulden a year,
with no certain prospect of a penny's income. Rather, said he, I was to
give the finished work to the dealers and let them sell them on a
percentage, so that we could see how the public liked stone-printing.

Herr von Hartl was trying at this time to rid himself of all expenses
that were not absolutely necessary. He was growing more and more
dissatisfied with Mistelbauer, his health was poor, and irritating
business troubles were anything but good for him. He expressed his
regret many times because he had undertaken so many things. His many
enterprises, which up to this time had proved anything but profitable,
took so much of his time that he had to give up his far more
advantageous interests as Imperial Court Agent, and thus lost heavily in
that direction also. The stock of spun wool kept piling up in the
company's magazines, and this, too, seemed to promise no greatly
satisfactory results.

However, I could see that I could expect only small sales in Vienna if I
depended on the dealers, who were my opponents and would hardly be very
eager to aid my success. Therefore, I conceived the thought, equally
unpractical, as it turned out, of putting our work into the hands of a
book publisher; and as I had just observed much empty space in the shop
of Peter Rehm's widow, I agreed with her to turn over our stock to her
at twenty-five per cent discount.

It was arranged that there be an accounting each month, and I looked
forward to the end of the first month with great impatience, because I
hoped for a considerable income. It was highly necessary, to help me pay
off the debt that I had loaded on myself to defray Herr Gleissner's
traveling expenses,--a debt that now had stood for two years, and that
the skillful manipulations of my dear landlady and her faithful legal
adviser had increased from four hundred gulden to two thousand. Many
times during the month I inquired as to the sales and received the
answer that they were good. I was satisfied, and did not require further
statements, as I did not wish to anticipate the pleasant surprise that
I expected when the month's accounting was made. But alas! How I was
shocked at the end of the month when the sum of ten gulden and
forty-eight kreuzer turned out to be all! I did not know how I could
appear before Herr von Hartl with the news. My walk to his house was one
of the bitterest of my life. I was not received as badly as I had
expected. On the contrary, Herr von Hartl comforted me and advised me to
have patience, that all beginnings were slow, etc. In short, I enjoyed
the most pleasant anticipations again. Unhappily, at the end of the
second month the accounting gave us one gulden, thirty-six kreuzer. Now
the patience of Herr von Hartl reached its end.

He had just lost heavily again in the Mistelbauer affair. It worried him
seriously, and as his health continued poor, he inclined to listen to
the advice of his wife, who represented to him that he did not need to
burden himself thus, and that he would better pocket his losses and
retire from all the matters that worried him.

Therefore, when his secretary, Steiner, advised him to send a certain
Grasnitzky to Helmannsöd, he accepted the suggestion, and Grasnitzky
went there with unlimited power to do what he thought best. Now of
course it was vital that Grasnitzky be absolutely honest, as otherwise
it was certain that he would make the worst possible report in order to
get everything into his own hands. Hardly had he made a superficial
inspection before he reported that Herr von Hartl was being cheated by
Mistelbauer. As soon as he had driven the man and his family out of the
house and had gained possession of the finished stock that was on hand,
he took away everything that was in the hands of the local weavers, and
transported it to Linz to be finished and sold.

Hardly had Herr von Hartl received the alarming news that only the
highest degree of commercial talent could save the capital that he had
invested in this business, before worse news came. While Grasnitzky was
in Linz, fire started in Helmannsöd and spread to Mistelbauer's house,
which Grasnitzky had locked up. The peasants saved their own houses and
were not at all displeased to let the handsome new building, with all
its machinery and stock, burn down.

The hard blows were too much for poor Mistelbauer, who was now reduced
to total beggary. He became ill and died soon afterward in great misery.
Nothing was left now except for Grasnitzky to finish the goods he had
saved, and to sell them as well as possible.

Naturally the loss was considerable, despite all efforts; and of course
it was an unfavorable circumstance for me that this affair should be
contemporary with my failure to sell the sheet-music. Herr von Hartl
lost all hope of success with stone-printing, and probably would have
given it up entirely, had his secretary, Steiner, not advised him to
continue. He pointed out that the small sales were due not to the
printing, but to the unwise selection of work, which was almost wholly
the composition of a composer quite unknown in Vienna. He said that they
needed a man as manager who had the necessary knowledge and who also had
a good shop for making sales, and that thus stone-printing would become
a veritable gold mine. He proposed the antiquarian Grund, who had a shop
in the same street as Herr von Hartl's house. Herr von Hartl agreed.

I was informed that hereafter I was to communicate only with Herr Grund
about work, and that he would make all payments in Herr von Hartl's
name, select the works to be published, and make quarterly accountings,
at which he would deduct thirty per cent for himself.

I was glad, because it relieved me of many cares and I foresaw success
once more. New life came into the work. We hired two more writers, and
printed bravely. Grund succeeded in inducing Herr von Hartl to increase
his investment during the first year so that the original capital of six
thousand gulden that was already sunk in the work had grown to twenty
thousand gulden. But when at last the fourth quarter passed without an
accounting from Grund, and still there was no dividend, he lost patience
again, and no doubt Steiner had to bear some censure because of his
unfortunate suggestion. To soothe his master he proposed to take
everything out of Grund's hands and establish a publishing house. As
this would demand more capital, Herr von Hartl declined, being quite
sated. Then Steiner came out with the project: he would seek to induce
Grasnitzky, who had done so much already, to undertake this business
also; he added that he himself was disposed to put in some capital and
take a personal part in the business, for a third part of the profits.

Just then I was in fatal embarrassment. The legal adviser of our
landlady pressed harshly for payment. He even went to Herr von Hartl.
That gentleman sent for me immediately and declared that he would try
Steiner's plan, and that it would be his last attempt, and that I could
see myself that there was nothing else to do. Since he promised to pay
my debt, and I hoped for good results anyway from Herr Steiner's
coöperation, I agreed willingly.

Now passed another year, during which a number of pieces of music were
printed under Grasnitzky's and Steiner's directions, and some
experiments made in art work. An artist, Karl Müller, learned to draw
nicely on stone partly with the pen, partly with the brush. Among many,
often very excellent efforts, one of his most successful was a copy of
Preissler's drawing-lessons. The first number was printed under my
direction and came out very well. The other numbers, which were printed
when I was in Munich again, were reported as not having been so good.
The reason probably was that they were printed with a new press ordered
by Herr Grasnitzky, which did not have the power necessary for printing
from stone, thus making necessary a softer color not satisfactory for
pen-drawing. In the end Herr Steiner is credited with having improved
this press very much. I shall describe it in its most complete form in
my description of presses which will follow.

Judging from the amount of printing done, Steiner and Grasnitzky
appeared to understand their business. In a short time they actually
printed a second impression of some of the Gleissner compositions, which
met with good sales, especially in Poland.

I was delighted with this activity, especially as I hoped for a part of
the profit for myself at the end of the year; but Herr Steiner, instead
of accounting to me, assured me that I could entertain no hopes for ten
years, as Herr von Hartl's investment of twenty thousand gulden would
have to be repaid before there could be any question of dividing
profits. I realized what this meant; and to avoid bringing a lawsuit,
for which I lacked the means anyway, I decided to sell Herr Steiner my
interests. He offered me six hundred gulden, and when, at last, I
accepted it, he paid me fifty gulden because he had a claim on Herr
Gleissner for five hundred and fifty gulden, something of which I had
been in ignorance.

The loss of this business pained me, but Herr von Hartl comforted me
with the example of other inventors, who had received no better returns.

Now the cotton-printery was my only hope. A third of the Pottendorf
Company had declared itself in favor of erecting a factory, and in fact
one thousand two hundred gulden had been appropriated to make a trial on
a large scale. I went to Pottendorf and ordered a machine in which the
cylinders were of cast-iron instead of copper, because Herr Thornton had
two very handsome iron cylinders, two yards long and eight inches in
diameter, which had been intended for another purpose but were
sufficient for my trials.

As soon as the printing-machine was ready, Herr Thornton had it
connected with the water-wheel of the cotton-spinnery, so that one
needed only to pull a cord to set the cylinders in motion and see the
printing of the cotton proceed without human help, as if of itself.
Nothing was needed now except to etch the design in the upper cylinder.

The design consisted of a simple little flower, many times repeated, and
it seemed to me to be anything except difficult. But after I had covered
the cylinder with the etching surface and started to work with the
graver, I saw, after a very few strokes, why it had not been possible
before this to produce cotton patterns by etching and why engraving had
been necessary.

It was not possible for me to draw even three of the little flowers into
the etching surface with the free hand so firmly and evenly as this sort
of printing demanded if it was to appear thoroughly accurate to the eye.
This was in spite of the fact that I had first drawn the design
carefully in measured squares on stone and transferred it in red to the
black cylinder. My strokes were too trembling and uneven, so that I
nearly gave up the hope of ever doing anything excellent in this way,
unless I were to expend as much or more time than would be needed for
the regular process of engraving.

The failure of this attempt, and the disgrace that would come to me as a
result, spurred me on to invent some method to overcome the difficulty
of drawing. I succeeded so unexpectedly that the very failure became the
means to greater perfection.

To cover the entire surface of the cylinder it would be necessary to
draw thirty thousand flowers. Had I not experienced the slightest
difficulty, I still would have needed half a minute for each flower, and
thus I would scarcely have been able to finish an entire cylinder inside
of a month. But I invented a drawing-machine with which, though I was
not a skillful draftsman, I could draw the entire design within two
days, and with an accuracy that hardly could be attained by the
engraving-tool. With this instrument I drew the design on the black
etching surface of the cylinder, etched it and made a sample printing
which, when it was repeated afterward in presence of Fürst von Esterhazy
and other members of the company, earned universal praise.

Herr von Hartl planned to obtain an exclusive franchise for this
cylinder cotton-printing, sell it to the company, and have me appointed
as director, something like Herr Thornton, who drew not only a decent
salary but also a fourth part of the profit from the entire spinnery. As
I could see readily that a company with such enormous resources could
soon bring a cotton-print establishment to a great stage, it did not
seem impossible to me that the annual income might rise to a million, as
in the Ebreichsdorfer factory. If the net profits were only five per
cent, there still would be more than twelve thousand gulden annually for
me, and I was sure to be a rich man in a short time. So I thanked Herr
von Hartl heartily and continued to perfect my process in every tiny
detail.

The fear had arisen that iron cylinders might affect the handsome reds
and other fine colors. Herr Thornton, who had become my friend, promised
to make for me cast copper cylinders with iron cores: and his
preparations for this work were almost completed when again fate ruined
all my hopes.

Napoleon had just completed the Continental blockade; and the English
cotton stuffs were not to be had anywhere. This forced all the weavers
and manufacturers of the inland to buy from the Pottendorfer Works, and
the sale of their output became so great that the formerly overcrowded
storehouses were emptied in a short time. "Why should we erect a new,
different factory? Rather let us enlarge the present one." This was the
general and entirely sensible decision of the company. Herr von Hartl
would not interest himself further in the process, because our hope of
an exclusive franchise had been ruined through the treachery of a
foreman in the spinnery, who had made drawings of our machine and sold
them to various cotton-making establishments, who were already imitating
the process. So there was nothing left for me except to seek my fortune
elsewhere.

In my pain over my oft-ruined hopes I complained to a good friend, Herr
Madlener, a tinner in Pottendorf, and this noble man was ready at once
to seek another opportunity for me. The very next day he told me that a
cotton-printer in Vienna, Herr Blumauer, would pay me five hundred
gulden for a small model press for cylinder printing on cotton. This
turned out true. Fourteen days later he made me acquainted with the
brothers Faber, who had a cotton-works in St. Polten, and who, on
Madlener's recommendation, made an extremely satisfactory contract with
me for the erection of a complete cylinder printery.

I thought myself happy to come into relations with this firm at whose
head were two of the noblest of men, and was just ready to go to St.
Polten, when my destinies received a new direction through a strange
chain of circumstances, that opened for me an excellent prospect again
of making great advances in improving my lithographic invention.

My brothers had written to me several times while I was in Vienna,
complaining about scarcity of work and their resultant poverty.
Therefore it is not to be wondered at that I did not exactly long to
return to Munich, despite the fact that my hopes in Vienna had become
steadily less. Probably I should have returned again to Herr Andre in
Offenbach, as Gleissner and his family were pretty well placed with
Steiner and Grasnitzky, had not Madame Gleissner conceived the idea of
making personal inquiries about the conditions in Munich.

Shortly before, a Bavarian court musician had visited Vienna and had
visited his friend Gleissner. From him we learned that my brothers were
doing very well. They had good positions with the Feyertag School and
had sold their franchise for stone-printing to the Royal Government. It
was even reported that they had formed a company with Herr von Hazzi to
establish a press and publishing house, and that they expected to get a
comfortable building from the Government.

Madame Gleissner went to Munich at once and ascertained that the report
was true. She also met our old apprentice, Grünewald, who had left
Vienna in 1804 with one of our note-writers, Held, to erect a
stone-printing establishment for Breitkopf and Härtl in Leipsic. He had
just returned to Munich, and he induced Madame Gleissner to join him in
erecting a small printing-house, which she did all the more willingly,
since she hoped that it would earn her expenses for her in Munich. This
occasion led to her acquaintance with Abt Vogler, who gave her several
pieces of music to print.

Stone-printing pleased Abt Vogler so much that he proposed to Freiherr
Christoph von Aretin, Royal Court and Central Library Director, to
establish a printery and take into partnership the inventor as well as
Herr Gleissner. Freiherr von Aretin was willing, and they made a
provisional contract with Madame Gleissner, under which I and her
husband were to go to Munich and establish a stone-press, for which
Freiherr von Aretin and Abt Vogler would furnish the money.

I was pleasantly surprised when Madame Gleissner returned to Vienna with
this news. Freiherr von Aretin was one of my old schoolmates in the
Munich Gymnasium; and as he always used to gain the first prize in
everything from the lowest class to the highest, I had entertained the
greatest respect for him since youth. I would have thought myself
fortunate even then to make his nearer acquaintance, because I ever have
had a decided admiration for remarkable persons.

In later days it happened once that my mother dwelled in his house and
could not pay her rent, owing to certain misfortunes, and when she asked
him to excuse the delay he made her a present of the entire sum. This
proof of a noble soul was not calculated to lessen my regard for him.
Therefore I snatched at the proposal with joy.

She had been urged earnestly to hurry matters, as Abt Vogler had various
works which he wished to have printed as soon as possible. Unfortunately
my contract with the brothers Faber, which I had signed the day before,
would have delayed me for many months. I tried, therefore, if I could
induce them to permit me to spend a few months in Munich before I
started their work in St. Polten. The excellent men agreed gladly, and
even advanced money to me that I might have various copper cylinders
made in Munich, so that I would be able to go ahead without delay later
in St. Polten.



PART III

FROM 1806 TO 1817


I left Vienna with Herr Gleissner and his family in October, 1806. First
we traveled to Cloister Atl near Wasserburg in Bavaria, which Freiherr
von Aretin had bought recently, and where Abt Vogler awaited us. He
proposed to erect the printery in the cloister; but when he saw that I
was not at all pleased with the idea, he started with us for Munich.

Hardly had we arrived there before Abt Vogler suggested several plans
which all contemplated only his own profit, and which would have
redounded to Freiherr von Aretin's disadvantage. When he realized at
last that we would not agree to his demands, and when Freiherr von
Aretin insisted that Herr Vogler pay his share of the capital at once
and in cash, instead of paying it by furnishing music whose value he set
very high, he severed his connection with our company. There was also
the added reason that the Royal Academy of Sciences did not reëlect him
as a member, a fact which made him wish to leave Munich as soon as
possible.

At this time a former workman of my younger brother Karl, a man named
Strohhofer, commenced a printery. Madame Gleissner stopped this unlawful
violation of our rights with the aid of the royal police, and this
impelled Strohhofer to seek Abt Vogler, probably in order to gain his
intercession with Freiherr von Aretin.

Vogler thought that he had made an important discovery, as the man knew
how to speak very impressively of his knowledge and skill. He imagined
that he could publish his works without our aid, perhaps even without
cost. Therefore he promised to assist Strohhofer, made an appointment
with him for a future day, and suggested to him how he could support
himself meantime by selling the secret of the art.

Stuttgart was one of the towns suggested to him. Strohhofer circulated a
pompous proclamation there, boasting of his talents and offering his
services to anybody and everybody. Thus he came into communication with
Herr Cotta. The inferiority and incompleteness of his knowledge were
perceived very soon; but as even the imperfect results hinted at the
importance of the new printing process, the result was that finally,
through the assistance of an art-lover, Herr Rapp, the book, _The Secret
of Stone-Printing_, was published by Herr Cotta. It was the first
publication that showed true appreciation publicly of the art.

Immediately in the beginning of our establishment in Munich, our
enterprise gained brilliant aspects through Freiherr von Aretin's
activity. Several presses were operated, for music, for governmental
work, and even for art. Then came the publication of Albrecht Dürer's
_Prayer-Book_, which gave us an honorable reputation. This work was
acclaimed by all art-lovers, and the conviction gained ground everywhere
that the new process which hitherto had possessed few friends, was not
so unimportant as had been believed generally.

The professor of the Feyertag School, Herr Mitterer, had done important
preparatory work in Munich to gain a favorable decision. My brothers had
imparted to him the entire process. He had found that the so-called
crayon process, of which I had shown proofs as early as 1799, was best
adapted for his purpose of reproducing elementary drawing-lessons, and
he had succeeded in inducing the Government to establish a lithographic
institute under his direction, in which my brothers were employed as
lithographers. To be sure, this was a violation of my franchise; but the
reason was that the authorities supposed my brothers to be the owners of
the franchise, both on account of the name and because they had
conducted the Munich printery for some years in my name.

Freiherr von Aretin counted on the sole use of the franchise, which he
had believed to be unassailable when he formed our company and advanced
the necessary money; but when in time he complained because the Royal
Government as well as private persons established printeries, he
received the reply that the art had long ceased to be a secret,--as if a
condition of the franchise had been that a useful process must be kept
secret. In that case I could not have employed any man either for
drawing or printing, as that would have involved the loss of secrecy and
thus the loss of the franchise.

My connection with Freiherr von Aretin lasted four years. During this
time I turned out a great amount of government work, such as circulars,
statistical tables, charts, etc., besides many specimens in various
forms of art. At that time the idea was first conceived for the present
text-book of lithography, and, indeed, we published the first
installment of the sample plates. Still, our enterprise was far less
successful than Freiherr von Aretin and I had hoped.

It was very difficult to obtain skillful workmen, especially writers and
artists. Even Strixner and Pilotti, whom we had engaged and who worked
at producing facsimiles of the Royal Manual Drawing Cabinet, were very
slow to gain the necessary perfection and speed. And again we lacked the
manager, namely, a man who understood business and knew what to produce
and how to sell it.

I myself was heavily burdened, as I had not only to exercise continual
supervision of the five presses, but also was practically the only one
who could prepare the plates for those presses. Added to this was the
fact that the printers were almost all uneducated men, some of whom
could not even read, and they spoiled many plates that I had to
reproduce. This caused so much loss of time that already was
insufficient, that it is no wonder that several presses came to a
standstill frequently. Luckily there were government jobs at times that
demanded fifteen thousand and more impressions. This enabled me to
prepare new material while the presses were busy. On the whole, however,
this work had the disadvantage of demanding such speed that usually all
the five presses had to work at it, so that, when it was done, they were
all at a standstill together, sometimes for weeks; and then the wages,
etc., consumed the previous profit, so that in the end little or nothing
was left.

Thus it was natural that Herr von Aretin, who was being annoyed at this
time by other affairs, began to lose his enthusiasm for lithography.
Therefore, when he had to go to Neuburg as Governmental-Director, and
could not participate personally any more, and when, at the same time,
Herr Gleissner and I obtained situations with the Royal Tax Service, he
sold the establishment to Herr von Manlich, the Director of the Royal
Gallery, and to Herr Zeller, a merchant.

Although our connection was broken in this manner, and despite the fact
that we had not won the expected results, still stone-printing had
attained respect and support through Freiherr von Aretin's patronage. We
had to thank him for the fact that our institution was praised by the
most celebrated native and foreign statesmen, and even by their Royal
Highnesses, the Crown Prince of Bavaria and his most noble sister
Charlotte, present Empress of Austria. Our beloved Crown Prince wrote on
paper with the so-called chemical or stone-ink, "Lithography is one of
the most important inventions of the century." And his noble sister
wrote the short but eloquent words, "I honor the Bavarians!" These lines
were printed on the stone in their presence.

His Royal Highness the Crown Prince exhibited so much interest in this
Bavarian invention that he condescended to order the sculptor,
Kirchmeier, of Munich, to model my bust in plaster, so that in the
future, when lithography should have attained an honorable place in the
whole public estimation, it could be carved in stone and erected among
the most celebrated artists of Bavaria.

In general my connection with Freiherr von Aretin had given me several
well-founded prospects for an active and honorable future. He promised
that, when his circumstances permitted, he would put me into position to
use my entire time only for making useful inventions, for which purpose
I should have all the material and workers that I might need. We would
then investigate all branches of art and industry, to discover
possibilities of improvement. He possessed the true viewpoint,
appreciating how I could best be useful to the fatherland, and perhaps
to all humanity. I shall ever consider it as my greatest misfortune that
circumstances made it impossible to carry out this plan, and thus to
justify the great confidence that he reposed in my inventiveness and
ability.

A second beautiful hope arose in France, where I was encouraged by
Freiherr von Aretin to expect the management of an imperial lithographic
institute, with a great financial allowance, Herr von Manlich, and the
French artist, Herr Denon, who was in high favor with Napoleon, having
made strong efforts to that end. This hope also met disappointment owing
to the circumstances of the times.

A third hope of no less importance was to erect a cotton-printery in
Munich or Augsburg in association with His Excellency Count von Arco,
Court Chamberlain of Her Royal Highness the widowed Kurfürstin of
Bavaria. This was ruined by the clumsiness of a Munich wood-turner, who
made such uneven cylinders that we could not produce any satisfactory
specimens. Although I made arrangements at once for a large English
machine, like those used by Mr. Thornton, its manufacture was so slow
that two years elapsed, and during this time our entire lithographic
establishment was dissolved.

The idea of a cotton-printery was an unfortunate one, which not only
cost much time and a great sum of money, but also had the unpleasant
result that I could not fulfill my contract with the Faber brothers and
thus, in addition to the resultant personal financial loss, had the pain
of appearing before these most noble men in a poor light.

All this trouble was caused as follows. On invitation of Count von Arco,
his brother-in-law, Count von Montgelas, Royal Minister of State,
visited our institution and examined our work. At the request of
Freiherr von Aretin I made an experimental printing with the little
model cotton-printing press that I had brought from Vienna. It won his
approval. Freiherr von Aretin intended to ask for a franchise for this
process in Bavaria, where it had not yet been introduced. The Minister
promised this and also held out the hope of a considerable financial
assistance from the Government. Then I was foolish enough to try to
increase his interest by telling him of the value that foreign lands set
on this process, and thus I informed him of my contract with the Fabers.
But this had an unexpected result. His Excellency heard the information
most ungraciously, and said that I must not hope for the least
assistance in Bavaria if I permitted myself to be used for the
advantage of another state. He even declared that there was a royal
rescript forbidding Bavarian subjects from using an art in foreign lands
if its exclusive use were of importance for Bavaria. This rescript, said
he, fitted my case exactly, and it was forbidden to me, under pain of
highest disfavor, to proceed farther with the Austrians.

This embarrassed me mightily. Freiherr von Aretin and Count von Arco
promised to urge the Minister to permit me to go to Vienna, on the
ground that this method of printing cotton was no invention of mine,
having been used long ago in England and for some time in Austria. But
Freiherr von Aretin was not very desirous that I should absent myself
for several months in the very beginning of our enterprise, and thus
time passed without the hoped-for permission.

As the Fabers pressed me earnestly to fulfill my agreement, I devised a
subterfuge that might permit me to keep my promise and still not lay
myself open to too great a responsibility. I wrote to them advising them
to have their correspondent in Munich demand through the court that I be
forced to fulfill the contract. I considered that the city courts in
Munich would have no particular knowledge of the royal rescript or, at
least, that they would not immediately remember it, and that, when I
admitted the existence of the contract, they would command me to keep it
at once. Then I would obey immediately, and afterward could justify
myself with the Bavarian Government by pointing to the court's decree.

It would surely have succeeded had not the correspondent of the Fabers
failed in business after bringing suit, owing to which the matter got
into another lawyer's hands. This man immediately adopted a new strange
course. Instead of demanding a fulfillment of the contract, he sued for
twelve thousand gulden damages for their loss of time. Of course I had
to fight for my skin now; and as he refused to content himself with my
agreement to fulfill the contract, I was forced at last to defend myself
by falling back on the royal rescript. Thus I escaped by merely repaying
the money already advanced; but I lost the considerable sum that would
have been assured to me had I been permitted to spend only two months in
St. Polten.

Thus none of the good prospects that opened themselves through my
connection with Freiherr von Aretin proved so good as I had been
justified in hoping: nay, it seemed as if I had only labored day and
night to give others the benefits accruing from my painful labors, while
I barely supported existence.

Freiherr von Aretin wished that the management of the business be in the
hands of a man who possessed his own fullest confidence, but whom I did
not consider at all suitable, as he was a royal official and as such
could not do business in a public shop. Consequently the trade was
carried on in his own residence, which was known to only few people and
where nobody looked for the manifold things that we could have produced
to good profit. This at last lowered our establishment to a mere job
printery, which finally could not maintain itself, because more and more
similar establishments were started in Munich, and the prices for work
became lower and lower through their hungry competition.

It may not be uninteresting to tell briefly how so many printeries
happened to be undertaken.

The first was established by Gleissner and myself, and was continued
afterward in my name by my brothers Theobald and George, until 1805.
They sold the secret to the Feyertag School, where an excellent art
institute developed gradually under Herr Mitterer.

Strohhofer learned the elements of the process from my brother Karl, and
associated himself, in 1806, with Herr Sidler, royal court musician, who
had studied first with my brothers, then with Madame Gleissner, and then
in the Aretin printery. When Strohhofer left Munich, Sidler erected a
stone-printery for the Government, and after he had obtained an official
permit before the expiration of my franchise, he established his own
institution, producing very good work.

During this time Madame Gleissner had petitioned the Government
frequently for sufficient work to assist her, and had obtained the
promise through His Excellency the Minister of State, von Montgelas.
Then it happened that the chief of a newly organized bureau, Freiherr
von Hartmann, having a great deal of writing to do in beginning his new
work, decided to introduce lithography for the purpose of saving labor.
His intention was to have it all done in our institution. No doubt he
had communicated this plan to von Montgelas; for as he met Madame
Gleissner about this time, and she asked again for work, he said that he
had given Senefelder enough work to keep ten presses busy, and if he had
not yet received it, he would get it soon through Freiherr von Hartmann.
There evidently was a misunderstanding here on account of the name. When
Freiherr von Hartmann sent one of his subordinates to call Senefelder to
him, he brought my brother Theobald, who immediately got orders to
establish a lithographic office, and shortly afterward was appointed
Inspector of Lithography. Beside a considerable salary, he received the
following other incomes, first, excellent pay for all work that was
turned in; second, an agreement that if his ten presses could not be
sufficiently employed by the bureau, he might work for other
governmental bureaus and for private persons. Thus he received a great
deal of work, among other jobs the printing of passports for the
Ministry of Foreign Affairs, which earned large sums for him in a short
time and placed him in very good circumstances.

He could not conceal his good luck, and so it came that many people
imagined that stone-printing was a means for getting rich quickly, which
resulted in a disproportionate growth of new shops. Out of his own there
sprang two, namely, those of Helmle and Roth, who erected their own
printeries under the permit of the police.

At the same time a lithographic institution was erected in the Royal
Asylum for the Poor on the Anger; and a Herr Dietrich, of a government
bureau, also established one.

My own prospects became worse and worse toward the year 1810. Though I
may flatter myself that I perfected myself very greatly through
unceasing practice and thousands of experiments, still, without a
fortunate accident, it might well have happened that I would have been
forced to think it lucky if I could obtain work under one of my former
apprentices.

I even suffered the insult of having the papers declare that though I
had invented the art roughly, I had kept it secret for a long time
through selfishness, and had never understood how to use it for anything
except merely printing music. The falsity and humiliating character of
this statement were bound to pain me the more bitterly, since all other
stone-artists and stone-printers had learned only from me, and not one
(not even Herr Mitterer, the most expert and, perhaps because of that,
the most modest) possessed the art as a whole, in all its parts, as
perfectly as I did. I hope that my text-book will prove this.

So far as the secret was concerned, the statement was an evident
falsehood. Since the moment when I received the exclusive franchise in
Bavaria, in the year 1799, I had made no secret of any part of my
process toward any living being. I showed the whole manipulation to my
workmen as well as to all strangers. Those who knew me more intimately
and realized, therefore, that I could not resist the desire for
communicating anything that I discovered to benefit mankind, often
censured me severely for my frankness, saying that I could have been a
millionaire had I kept my art a secret. But this was equally erroneous.
I never could have succeeded to any degree with my own means.

The false belief that I desired exclusive enjoyment of the results of
stone-printing, is in direct contradiction of the fact that the lack of
secrecy was held to invalidate my exclusive franchise. The idea may have
arisen, at least partly, through the circumstance that several of my
former workmen, or others who learned something of the art, made a
wonderful secret of it, in order to be considered more important. This
was carried to such an extent that some traveled from place to place and
sold their knowledge to many people for large sums under the seal of
confidence. I pity those who thus received in exchange for their money
something of little or no use, when they could have learned from me for
practically nothing, as it always was my greatest delight to converse
with intelligent men about those subjects that interested me so deeply
as inventor.

After making this little excursion, which was needed for my
justification, I return to my story.

There were, then, in 1809, six public printeries in Munich besides mine,
without reckoning those which several artists had made for their own
use. The foremost among the latter was Herr Mettenleithner, Royal
Copper Plate Engraver. He was one of the first to whom I had shown
specimens, as early as 1796, of the new process, but he had paid little
attention to it. Partly through various very excellent specimens from
Herr Mitterer's print, and partly through the work of Strixner and
Pilotti, he was induced to make experiments. A son of Herr von Dall'
Armi, who was taking lessons just then in drawing and copper etching for
his own pleasure, interested himself in the process. As a result, the
latter established a lithographic institution in Rome, which, so far as
I know, never achieved any decided success.

Soon afterward Herr Mettenleithner, in association with one of the best
of the Aretin printers, a man named Weishaupt, laid the foundation for
the stone-printery of the Royal Tax Commission (Königliche Unmittelbare
Steuer-Kataster-Kommission), which is now the most important of all the
lithographic institutions of Munich. A little later a similar
institution was founded for reproduction purposes by the Royal Privy
Council, through Herr Mettenleithner's son-in-law, Herr Winter.

Herr Mettenleithner was appointed director of the great establishment,
which employed some thirty engravers, to etch the plans of the
Steuer-Kataster, which received fifteen to twenty thousand impressions
each. At this time the Kingdom of Bavaria was being charted in great
detail for tax-regulation purposes, under the management of Privy
Councilor von Utzschneider, the man who has done so much for Bavaria's
home industries. There were required at least two exact copies of each
map, and close calculation proved that it would be possible to etch the
charts on stone and make several hundred impressions for the money that
these two copies would cost if done by hand. In addition, each of these
impressions was good enough to serve as an original.

The lithographic institution of the Royal Steuer-Kataster had been in
operation for some time when a trivial occurrence had the most important
effect on my fate.

It became necessary to print a sheet of such great size that there
happened to be no stone in Munich large enough. Weishaupt remembered
that he had seen stones in my possession which I had purchased partly
for map-work and partly for printing cotton and tapestries. He sent a
printer to me with a letter from Royal Tax Councilor von Badhauser,
requesting that I sell the Government a stone of the necessary
dimensions. Herr von Badhauser was a friend of my father, and I myself
always had entertained the highest respect for him. He was also a friend
of Herr Gleissner, and had done many things to oblige him. I embraced
the opportunity of doing him a favor with joy, and the matter probably
would have had no further consequences, had not Madame Gleissner arrived
just as the stone was being taken away.

She suspected that the stone might be desired for a purpose other than
the one stated, and sought Herr von Badhauser to ascertain the truth. On
this occasion she complained to him that the Government, not content
with infringing our franchise by erecting its own printeries, also took
away our workmen after I had trained them with much labor and expense.

Herr von Badhauser was surprised. He said that Privy Councilor von
Utzschneider had wished to turn work over to me, but that my reply to
his proposal, which had been laid before me by a designer named Schiesl,
had been that it was against my arrangements to collaborate with any
other establishment, and that, on the contrary, it was my intention,
with the assistance of Freiherr von Aretin, to press our suit against
the Government for infringement.

This Herr Schiesl, a pupil of Herr Methleithner, had worked for us
occasionally, and, indeed, was one of the first to use the new process
for drawings, especially pen-drawings. As he was rather adept and showed
great interest, I gave him full instructions in everything, and he knew
all my circumstances exactly. Thus he understood thoroughly that my
future depended on the turn that Freiherr von Aretin's affairs might
take, and that our situation was precarious, owing to the competition of
so many establishments. Therefore, I cannot understand how he came to
utter a statement so contrary to the truth.

Madame Gleissner hurried to Herr von Utzschneider and explained my real
intentions to him. He promised to consider the matter earnestly.

Herr Professor Schiegg, an excellent geometrician and astronomer, was
member of the Steuer-Kataster-Kommission, and had the supervision over
the entire institution. He was not well satisfied. Too many costly
proof-prints were being made, and the impressions did not please him.
Accidentally he saw my receipt for payment for the stone which I had
furnished, and he observed that I did not ask more for it than the
Commission had to pay for stones only half as large. Also I charged only
twenty-four kreuzer for polishing, whereas the Commission had been
paying one gulden for stones of four square feet. He took occasion to
represent to the Commission that it might be well to give me the
management of the establishment.

Herr von Utzschneider sent for me and asked for a proposition. After
discussion with Freiherr von Aretin I proposed that the Commission let
me print their etched plates for two kreuzer per impression, in return
for which I would pay the workmen, defray the cost of all printing
material, and also keep the presses in repair, pull necessary proofs
without charge, and bear the cost of all imperfect work.

This plan seemed very fair to me, as the Royal Commission would save two
thirds of the expenses it had defrayed hitherto; but it met with such
opposition that Herr von Utzschneider advised me to make another
proposition, preferably one that involved a good salary for myself and
Herr Gleissner, which, probably, would be received with more favor. He
added the flattering statement that the Royal Commission would be proud
to have me, the inventor of the art, in its employ, and thus to reward
my struggles in the name of the fatherland. The excellent man fulfilled
the expectations thus raised, and became my greatest benefactor and
founder of my fortune; for through him I won the prospect of an unvexed
old age, and was placed in a position where I did not need any longer to
consider my art merely as a livelihood. Everything useful that I have
invented since then, and I hope it is not inconsiderable, is due to the
serene and happy position in which I was placed through his goodness.

At the time I thought also that, if we were both employed by the Royal
Steuer-Kataster-Kommission, it would save Freiherr von Aretin the burden
of supporting us, without causing him damage, as according to the
preliminary promise of the Commission we should have time enough left to
manage his institution. So I agreed to assume supervision over the
Commission's printery, to give it my best knowledge, and give the
workmen complete instructions and training, for which there was to be a
salary for life of one thousand five hundred gulden for me and one
thousand gulden for my friend Gleissner, with the rank of Royal
Inspector of Lithography, and with the right to maintain and conduct our
own printery. My terms were graciously accepted, and in October, 1809,
we received our appointment.

Only in the beginning were my personal services especially necessary.
Later, as the workmen grew equal to their tasks, I found more and more
leisure for dedicating myself to inventing improvements. I was rather
fortunate in this endeavor, and the various processes invented since
1809 would now be generally known through the publication of many
interesting works, had Freiherr von Aretin not been forced to leave
Munich to assume his new duties in the Royal Service. This left my art
without his assistance, and our partnership reached its end just as it
was beginning to attain fruit. My own circumstances did not permit me to
continue the establishment on its former scale; therefore, Freiherr von
Aretin turned over part of it, especially the art-branches, to von
Manlich, the Director of the Royal Gallery, and another part to Herr
Zeller. The latter soon gave up the printing business as incompatible
with his other interests, but he did a great deal for domestic art and
industry later by opening a warehouse for its products, also by
publishing a paper and issuing many lithographic art productions.

I kept one or two presses for myself, and as I married the daughter of
the Royal Chief Auditor Versch in January, 1810, I hoped to teach my
wife to manage a small business. In the very beginning I obtained a
large order for passports from the Royal Commission of the Isar, which
kept the presses busy for a month. At the same time I contracted with
the Royal War Economy Council to furnish all their printing. Besides
this, I had many orders from another Royal Commission and from Herr
Falter, so that my little establishment was very busy. Unfortunately it
happened that I was not paid at once by the Royal Commission of the
Isar, but only after four years. Added to this, after some months I had
to support my workmen in idleness for several weeks, because there
happened to be no work for them. This gave my wife so ill an idea of the
business that she kept at me till I promised her to give up the whole
thing.

Madame Gleissner was not so timid. She offered to take over my men if I
would turn over to her the government work that I had. At first she did
very well, because just then orders came from many directions. She might
have made a great success, had her husband not been stricken with
paralysis, which rendered him so miserable that at last he lost his
mind. Then came the ever-growing competition and at last the government
bureau installed its own plant. Her daughter lost her eyesight almost
wholly at this time, so that the family fell into a woeful condition,
which would be still worse now if they were not sustained by faith in
the mercy and grace of our best of kings, who will surely reward their
efforts for lithography, which art, according to the belief of all
experts, will ever remain a beautiful flower in the shining wreath of
the noble Maximilian.

As soon as I did not need any longer to give up my time to earning a
mere livelihood, I began seriously to plan publication of my
lithographic text-book, the first number of which had appeared
previously and been well received. But the skill of the various
lithographers made noticeable advances every day, so that I was not
content with the specimen pages that had seemed so satisfactory a year
earlier. At last I fell under the delusion that it was absolutely vital
to my honor that everything that might appear in my text-book must
represent the _non plus ultra_ of the process. Therefore I decided to
suppress the first number entirely, because there were sample pages in
it that represented a style which had been done much better since then.

However, many obstacles opposed me. For instance, good artists are very
costly, especially if they must learn new methods and practice them. I
felt, also, that many of my inventions still demanded many improvements
before I could intrust them to the hands of any artists. Still, I hoped
finally to accomplish my plan for publishing a splendid work which
should be unique, because I invented improvements and perfections
daily. When my dear friend Andre came to Munich in 1811, I laid my
project before him and he was so taken with it that he offered his
cordial coöperation. We agreed that the work was to be done by
Frankfurter artists and printed there. But when I journeyed to Offenbach
some months later, I discovered that the right kind of artists were not
so easy to find as Andre had led me to hope. Some, who might have been
competent, demanded such exorbitant terms that the work would
necessarily have been published only at a huge loss. "Copper-etching,"
said they, "we understand. Stone-etching we must learn. The latter seems
to us, who are unpracticed in it, three times as difficult. Therefore it
is but fair that we shall be paid three times as much." This sort of
reasoning led me to return to Munich to print the work there.

Now two years passed with many experiments. Many a plate was made,
printed, and discarded because meantime I had found something better.
Then I lost my beloved wife in child-bed, and in my anguish over this
loss, irredeemable as I thought at the time, I forgot all my projects
till my second wife, a niece of our worthy Choir-Master Ritter von
Winter, reconciled me with Providence, notably through her truly
motherly behavior toward the son left behind by my first wife. I
considered it my duty now to publish my work, that in case of my death
their claims to honor should be established. Without this incentive, it
would have been much more indifferent to me what men might think of my
art or its inventor.

In 1816, Herr Andre came to Munich again, and I imparted to him many of
my recent inventions in regard to lithography. On this occasion we
decided ultimately which of our plates should be put into the work and
which should be discarded. I promised to get seriously to work and we
looked forward so confidently to the completion of the entire
publication that Herr Andre circulated a preliminary notice of it in the
Easter-Messe at Leipsic, whither he went after leaving Munich.

Despite this, there came many delays, the chief one being caused by my
meeting Herr Gerold, book-dealer and printer of Vienna, who invited me
to establish a printery for him. As my presence in Vienna would be
needed for only three months, I believed that this would cause no delay
in the publication of the text-book, because the plates ordered from the
Munich artists could be completed during that time, while I could
furnish the text as well in Vienna as in Munich. But I had the
misfortune of becoming seriously ill soon after reaching Vienna. A great
weakness remained as result, and this made it impossible for me to
undertake the return voyage in the bad weather that marked the winter of
1816-17.

Lithography did not progress particularly with Herr Gerold during my
stay, because he could not obtain the franchise, though he had
petitioned for it a year ago. The greatest blame for this was due to
Herr Steiner's opposition. This man, who had done but little for the art
in the entire time during which he enjoyed the exclusive Austrian
franchise that I had turned over to him, did this from pure ill-will,
because he had suffered similar ill-luck, as he said.

So Gerold could not establish so complete a printery as I wished,
without going into expenses based on an uncertainty. However, various
drawings were made that served to show art-lovers what could be done
with lithography. It would be easy to perfect this art immensely in
Vienna, because there is no lack of excellent artists. Among those who
interested themselves at the very beginning in Herr Gerold's undertaking
were Herr Colonel von Aurach, Herr Captain Kohl, and Herr Kunike, the
drawing-master for the family of Prince von Schwarzenberg. They
convinced themselves with many experiments that lithography was
eminently suitable for the easy reproduction of many styles of drawing,
and recommended the method to all their acquaintances. Through the
experiments of Herr Kunike I gained the conviction that one could print
true originals by using a method of touching up the impressions.

The crayon method in combination with one or two tint plates is the
method that is easiest for the artist to handle. Now this method is very
difficult to print, demanding great practice if good, strong, and clear
impressions are to be produced. Since there are as yet no complete
printeries where an artist can have his own plates printed without
danger of damage, there is nothing left except to print them himself,
which causes many imperfect impressions that must be destroyed for the
credit of the artist. Herr Kunike had this experience; but he took his
imperfect impressions, when they were not entirely spoiled, and worked
them over with black crayon. It developed that twelve impressions could
be so well touched up by hand that they would fittingly pass as
originals, in the time which would be required to copy a single picture
properly. As this treatment of illustrations produces their value only
by merit of the final finishing, they may be considered as being the
same as copies that are made by an artist of his own work, wherein it
happens often that the copy turns out better than the original.

Just as I was preparing to leave Vienna I received several numbers of
the _Anzeiger für Kunst und Gewerbfleiss_, in which Herr Direktor von
Schlichtegroll, General Secretary of the Royal Bavarian Academy of
Sciences, had inserted several letters suggesting an inquiry into the
invention of lithography. He had used the information obtained from my
brothers and from other inhabitants of Munich. On my arrival there I
visited him at once to thank him for his patriotic endeavors, and to
make some corrections of the story told by him. I had the fortune to win
him as a steady friend, who became continually interested in giving my
work a greater field.

The completion of this text-book is due to his steadfast encouragement.
He furnished me with the opportunity to meet many worthy men and also to
demonstrate my many improvements before the Royal Academy of Sciences,
the Polytechnical Union, and at last even before their majesties, our
most gracious King and his most highly venerated spouse, that
illustrious connoisseur and protectress of the arts. Never to be
forgotten by me will be the moment when the gracious applause of the
royal pair rewarded me for all the exertions of my life. Oh! If only
human life were not so limited, if it were granted to me to execute only
one tenth part of my designs, I would make myself worthy of this great
honor by making many another useful invention! But the time passes
swiftly during our helpless wishing and striving; and when twenty or
thirty years have been lived, there remains for us only amazement at
beholding how little has been done of all that which glowing
imagination and fiery energy painted as being so easy to carry out.

When I saw before me the first successful impressions from a stone, and
conceived the plan of making the invention useful for myself, I did not
think that it would demand the greatest part of my life. Rather, because
it seemed to be a cheap process, I considered it merely a first step
toward putting me into a position where I would be able to make
inventions far more useful and important. I must, however, count myself
fortunate among thousands, because my invention received such thorough
recognition during my lifetime, and because I myself was able to bring
it to a degree of perfection such as other inventions generally attained
only after many years and long after the inventor himself was dead.

Herr von Manlich, the Director of the Royal Gallery, has had his skilled
pupils, Strixner and Pilotti, copy many collections in the Royal Drawing
Cabinet (Königliche Zeichnungs Kabinett), and many of these sheets are
so good that competent critics have declared them to be perfect
facsimiles.

But on the whole the publication of the Royal Gallery of Paintings is
still more excellent and has aroused general attention, which would be
even greater if the printers had been as expert as the artists were.
Many of these pages would leave nothing to be desired if the pictures
appeared on the paper in perfection equal to the perfection of the
drawings on the stone.

The method used for these illustrations is the crayon method, with one
or more tint plates. It is the easiest method for the artists because it
demands little previous experience. To give it its correct emphasis,
however, one must know especially how to get the best effect out of the
tint plates. If this is done just right, and if, of course, the drawing
bears the impress of a masterly hand, and if the printer understands his
art, the impression will be perfectly like an original drawing, so that
the most skilled etcher in copper hardly can attain the same effect.
Therefore this method, which has the further advantage of being a quick
one, is excellently well adapted for copying paintings.

Hereby I wish to express my deepest gratitude publicly to the worthy
Herr Direktor von Manlich and his industrious pupils for the service
they have done for the fame of lithography by utilizing my inventions.
To their labors, as well as to those of Herr Professor Mitterer, is due
the ever-growing sympathy and interest of the public.

Herr Mitterer now has attained such perfection, especially in the simple
crayon method, that many of his productions probably will remain the
_non plus ultra_ of this method. Lithography also owes to his unresting
energy the triumph of having been become the mother of many useful works
of instruction, which are so cheap that they only require the active
work of a good art-dealer or book-dealer to become widely circulated.

Besides this, Herr Mitterer is the inventor of the so-called cylinder or
pilot-wheel press, which he has improved so much lately that it does
almost everything that one can demand from a perfect press in point of
power, speed, and ease of operation.

Since 1809, I have dedicated myself almost uninterruptedly to
improvements, and to the work of reducing all manipulation and processes
in all branches to their simple elementary principles. Thus some of my
earlier inventions--such as transfers from paper which has been
inscribed with fatty inks, and the transfers from new and old books and
copper-plate impressions--have been brought to a high degree of
excellence through my manifold experiments, so that one can make
lithographic stereotypes in the easiest manner.

Furthermore I have made such progress in color printing that, besides
pictures illuminated with colors, I can also produce pictures quite
similar to oil paintings, so that nobody can discover that they have
been printed, because they possess all the distinguishing points of
paintings.

At the same time I have invented a new method for printing pictures,
wall tapestry, playing-cards, and even cotton, which enables two men to
make two thousand impressions of the size of a sheet of letter-paper
daily, even though the picture may contain a hundred or more colors.
Incredible as this may seem, I surely shall produce extraordinary and
amazing proofs of this in a few years if I remain alive and well.

Among the other methods that I have invented since this time the most
excellent are some aqua tint processes, the spatter-work method, the
intaglio crayon method, the conversion of the relief method into
intaglio and vice versa, and the machine-written text for editions de
luxe.

Among other things I also sought to remedy the difficulty which arises
from the great dependence on the skill and industry of the printers.
Therefore I planned a printing-machine wherein the dampening and inking
of the stones should be done not by hands but by the mechanism of the
press itself, which, in addition, could be operated by water and thus
work almost without human intervention. With this invention I believed
that I had set my art on the pinnacle of completion; and when in 1817 I
exhibited a model of this press (which also was adapted by me for
utilizing the principles of stone or chemical printing on metal plates)
before the Royal Academy of Sciences in Munich, I was so fortunate as to
receive its golden medal in sign of universal approval.

But the most important of all my inventions since my employment in the
service of the Royal Government was, without question, the invention of
a sufficient substitute for the natural limestone plates, which often
incurred well-founded censure because of their unevenness, weight, and
fragility, and have the further fault of demanding a great deal of
storage room.

Before the Royal Academy of Sciences, and also before the Polytechnical
Society of Bavaria, I demonstrated that chemical printing could be
utilized with advantage on metal plates; but that still more useful was
a composition of artificial stone which could be painted on metal, wood,
stone, and even on plain paper or linen, and used in all processes
exactly like the natural Solenhofen stone.

The countless experiments that I have made in the past four years with
this substitute (or, as some call it, stone-paper), in order to prove
its usefulness under all circumstances, have filled me with the absolute
conviction that it replaces the natural stone completely without having
the many faults that in the nature of the case are inseparable from the
use of the latter. In many respects it is far superior. The fragility of
the Solenhofen stone requires the use of thick slabs for printing. If
the impression is to be letter-sheet size, the stone must be at least
one and one half inches thick if it is not to crack under pressure. If
the stone is to be used for more than one job, the thickness must be two
to three inches. To be sure, it can be ground and used over again some
hundreds of times, a valuable consideration in view of the capital
invested in a stone. But such a stone weighs from sixty to eighty
pounds, sometimes more, and occupies considerable space. Add the
investment necessary for laying in any great number of stones, and it
becomes a difficult matter financially to undertake work that requires
that the stones be held for a number of years, to be used for new
impressions according to the sales of the work. Therefore it is
necessary, generally, to print a maximum quantity at once, so that the
stones may be ground and used for new work.

If the stones are of thickness correctly proportioned to their area, the
danger of cracking under the press is fairly remote; still, it does
happen occasionally that a stone incurs damage through clumsiness of
workmen. It can occur also through careless warming, or through sharp
frost. In such cases even a strong stone will crack, especially if the
workmen apply undue pressure.

Besides, the necessary stones are not to be found in all places, so that
the cost of transportation prevents the establishment of lithographic
shops in many regions.

All these objections are overcome by the invention of stone-paper. The
material advantages of it are as follows: (1) The cost is much smaller
than that of a stone of equal size. (2) The weight is inconsiderable; a
plate of letter-sheet size weighs scarcely four ounces. (3) Hundreds of
such plates piled on each other require scarcely as much space as a
single stone, and can, therefore, be stored or shipped easily. (4) They
resist the most powerful press better than do stone, copper, and even
iron plates. Their inner elasticity supports the most extreme pressure
without alteration if only they are handled properly. (5) The
application of fatty inks, and also engraving with the steel graver is
easier. Indeed, because of the great toughness of the stone-paper, the
engraving process approaches copper engraving more closely. (6) Inking
and printing are easier, and demand no such powerful pressure, because
the artificial stone receives and imparts color more readily, than does
the natural stone. (7) Finally, they are so excellent for all methods of
printing that it is possible to reproduce the original plates at will
merely by transferring a fresh imprint to another plate. And this can be
done with such accuracy that none of these plates can be distinguished
from the original, so that the stone-paper surely must become of
enormous importance for stereotyping in the book-printing trade.

These advantages, and others to be described on suitable occasion,
elevate this invention unquestionably to the highest importance in the
art of chemical printing, despite all that may have been said recently
by a certain writer whose lack of knowledge forbade correct judgment.
The matter already has attained a degree of perfection that makes every
further improvement unnecessary, nay, almost impossible.

My many employments, mostly caused by the publication of this text-book,
thus far have prevented the erection of my own manufactory for making
these artificial stone-plates or stone-paper. I hope to do it soon, and
then everybody can convince himself of the truth of my assertions, if he
will use the material according to my instructions.

This invention will facilitate the introduction of lithography in all
places, because one can make the stones himself. However, lithography
has expanded very considerably in its present form, and has been brought
into use in the foremost cities of Europe. For instance, it was
introduced into France and England, first by Herr Andre, in latter days
by the Count von Lasterie in Paris and Herr Ackermann in London, being
utilized for many kinds of printed work. In Berlin, Herr Major von
Reiche has erected a great institution. In Petersburg the art has
existed for some years, and is being especially well cultivated now by
Freiherr von Schilling. The art has entered even Philadelphia, and, more
extraordinarily, Astrakan, and, so far as I can learn, has been welcomed
heartily.

I desire that soon it shall be spread over the whole world, bringing
much good to humanity through many excellent productions, and that it
may work toward man's greater culture, but never be misused for evil
purposes. This grant the Almighty! Then may the hour be blessed in which
I invented it!



SECTION II

TEXT-BOOK OF PRINTING FROM THE STONE



CONTENTS


INTRODUCTION

EXPLANATION OF THE PRINCIPLES AND THE PECULIARITIES OF STONE-PRINTING
AND OF CHEMICAL-PRINTING IN GENERAL


PART I

General objects and principles governing--

    (1) the stone.
    (2) the ink, crayon, etching surface and color.
    (3) the acids and other preparing materials.
    (4) the necessary tools.
    (5) the paper.
    (6) the presses.


PART II

Enumeration and description of the various processes and particular
objects in manipulating them, such as:--

  RELIEF PROCESS--
        to which belong--

    (1) Pen and brush designs.
    (2) Crayon drawing, simple and with several plates.
    (3) Transfer and Tracing.
    (4) Woodcut style.
    (5) Two kinds of Touche drawing, one of which is similar to the
        Scraped style, while the other is done in the usual way with
        the brush.
    (6) Spatter-Work.
    (7) Touche drawing.
    (8) Color printing with several plates.
    (9) Gold and silver print.

  INTAGLIO PROCESS--

    (1) Carved or engraved.
    (2) Etched.
    (3) Drawn with prepared ink; with spattered aquatint.
    (4) Aquatint in copper engraved style, and with etching ground.
    (5) Aquatint through crayon ground.
    (6) Intaglio crayon through tracing.
    (7) Touche drawing with etching color and citric acid.

  MIXED METHOD: RELIEF AND INTAGLIO UNITED--

    (1) Pen drawing combined with engraving.
    (2) Intaglio drawing with relief tint.
    (3) Intaglio and relief with several plates.
    (4) Transformation of relief into intaglio, and vice versa.


APPENDIX

    (1) Printing simultaneously with water colors and oil colors.
    (2) Simultaneous chemical and mechanical printing.
    (3) Application of the stone for cotton-printing through wiping--a
        unique printing method.
    (4) Color print through wiping.
    (5) Oil painting print through transfers.
    (6) Stone-paper.
    (7) Applying the chemical printing process to metal plates, etc.



INTRODUCTION


Printing from stone is a branch of a new process, different in
fundamental principle from all others, namely, the chemical process.

Heretofore there have been two leading printing processes for
manifolding writings and drawings, one working with characters in
relief, the other with sunken characters.

Of the first kind is the ordinary book-printing, in which the characters
are made of metal or wood in such form that only those lines and points
are elevated that are to take color, everything else being depressed.
The wooden forms for cotton-printing are made thus also.

Of the second kind are all copper and zinc plates, and the cotton-print
process with copper plates or cylinders. In this method the lines and
points to be printed are depressed, being either engraved, etched, or
stamped.

As is well known, the first method of printing is as follows: The
letters, which are all at the same elevation and, therefore, furnish a
plane surface, are inked with a leather ball, stuffed with horsehair.
As the ball is so firm and elastic that it can touch only the
elevated parts, these alone can take the color, which adheres because
of its sticky nature. The same is true of the carved wood used in
cotton-printing, with only the difference that, instead of rubbing with
a leather ball, the wooden plate itself is laid on a cushion covered
with the color, and then, being placed face down on the cloth, is
hammered gently to produce the imprint.

In copper and zinc printing the method is reversed. In order to force
the color into the depressed parts, which alone are to be printed, the
entire plate is coated with color, and then the elevated surface is
cleansed again carefully. The cleaning rag cannot reach the depressed
grooves, so that more or less color adheres to these according to their
various depths. Under the powerful press, which forces the paper into
all the engraved parts, this color transfers itself and thus gives the
desired impression.

It is evident that both methods rest on purely mechanical principles:
book-printing being based on the fact that the color adheres only on
those places that it can reach, and copper-plate printing depending on
the fact that the color remains only in those places from which it
cannot be removed by cleansing.

It is different with the chemical print. This does not depend on either
elevation or depression of the design. It depends on the fact that the
design is coated with a preparation of such nature that afterward the
printing color, which is made from a related substance, adheres because
of its chemical similarity; and furthermore, because all parts of the
plate that are to remain white, have been so treated that they repel the
color. These two purely chemical objects are attained fully with the new
process. Daily experience proves that all fatty bodies, such as oil,
butter, tallow, fish oils, etc., and all such as easily dissolve in oil,
like wax, resin, etc., refuse to unite with any watery substance without
the aid of some third body that will bring about such union. The chief
solvent for this purpose is alkali, which, under proper manipulation,
always produces a sort of soap that then is soluble in water. Sometimes,
to be sure, an apparent union can be produced by violent shaking or
mixing, without the use of the alkali, but at the first opportunity the
fatty substances separate themselves again from the watery ones.

It is on this fact that the entire method of the new process is based.
It is termed chemical printing with perfect propriety, as the reason why
a fatty color, say, linseed oil varnish, will adhere only on the
designed parts of the plate and is repelled by the rest of the surface,
is due to the chemical properties of the materials.

It might be maintained that in the other forms of printing, color
adheres from the same reason. This is true, to be sure; for it is a
general law that water and oil will adhere to all bodies that are dry.
But it is not the case with these fluids mutually; and in this fact lies
the unique difference between the older and the new processes. A dry
plate would take color over its entire surface. If, however, it is
dampened, it will take oil color only on those places that are in a
condition opposite to dampness. Therefore, the repelling of the color
from those parts that are to remain white is the novelty.

It must not be imagined, however, that to print chemically it suffices
to dampen certain parts of the plate and to coat others with fatty
substance. With most of the materials available for printing, mere water
does not suffice to produce a sufficiently repelling obstacle between
the plate and the color.

With flinty and clayey bodies,--for example, glass, porcelain, slate,
etc.,--one can manage with mere water; but then the slight adherence of
the fatty color to the plate produces an opposite difficulty, by
preventing any large number of impressions. Still, by using very firm
and readily drying fatty substances, such as linseed oil varnish dried
with litharge of silver it is possible, in case of need, to succeed
fairly well.

But with such bodies as attract the color powerfully, such as all
metals, wood, limestone, artificial stone-paper, etc., it is necessary
so to treat all the parts of the plate that are to remain white that
they attain an especial resistance to color, and thus change their
natures, so to speak.

That this is possible under certain circumstances and with the proper
means, with all bodies belonging to this class, I have proved by many
experiments, and I shall describe the methods in this book.

Thus the new process is not to be used only on limestone, but is
applicable to metal, etc.; and stone-printing or lithography is to be
considered only as a branch of general chemical printing. However, as
this book is to teach mainly lithography, I will occupy myself chiefly
with it.

Among the bodies available for chemical printing, limestone maintains an
eminent place. Not only has it an especial property of uniting with
fats,--sucking them in and holding them,--but it has, also, the same
propensity for taking all fluids that repel fats. Indeed, its surface
unites so thoroughly with many of the latter that it forms a chemical
union with them, becoming practically impenetrable for oil colors and
remaining constant thereafter in repelling them so that they cannot
adhere perfectly. Therefore when a plate thus prepared is dry and
covered entirely with oil color, it still remains an easy matter to wash
it completely, using merely water for the purpose.

This good property, combined with the low cost and the ease of obtaining
the stone in Bavaria; then the advantage that it is easily polished and
prepared; the further advantage that a stone of medium thickness can be
ground as often as a hundred times and utilized for new work--all these
properties combined made me willing to overlook a few faults, such as
their weight, great volume, frequent unevenness of quality, and lastly
the occasional danger of cracking. Thus I came to use these stones as
the principal means for making my countless experiments, whose happy
result has been to elevate stone-printing to an art by itself.

Having stated the process and the character of this form of printing, it
remains only to say a few words about its value.

With every new invention there arises the question if it is useful, and
if so, in how far, for science, arts, and industry. Therefore all who
have no sufficient knowledge of lithography, will ask justly: What is
its value? What advantages does it give that are not to be found in any
other forms of printing?

To answer this, let me say the following merely in advance till later
descriptions of the various processes will convince in themselves.

It is the nature of earthly being and of human imperfection that rarely
is anything found that combines in itself everything to be wished for
and required. So it may be said of stone-printing that it makes neither
book-printing nor copper-plate printing entirely superfluous. It is
possible that in the future, by perfecting the presses, lithography may
equal book-printing in point of speed, as it does not now; but the
convenience of the latter, enabling the printer, by merely setting cast
characters side by side, to do with speed, accuracy, and symmetry what
the writer can hardly do with all his skill and industry, gives
book-printing its own eminent value. When, however, we come to many
things produced hitherto by book-printing, such as statistical tables,
letters, circulars, letters of exchange, bills of lading, visiting-cards
and addresses, and other similar work, we find that these can be
produced more conveniently, more readily, more cheaply, and faster and
handsomer with lithography.

As to copper-printing: in the future, as lithography extends, there
probably will remain an advantage with the copper in the case of only
two styles, the engraving done with the engraving needle, and the
etching, the latter being worked up with the graver and the cold needle.
In this respect, however, the skill of the artist must be taken into
account, for a good man can produce better work on stone, even in those
two styles, than a less skillful man can produce on copper. We can
declare the same of the stipple style in copper, when done in the style
of Herr Bartolozzi, or even like the very foremost of the copper
engravers in this style, Herr John of Vienna.

All other methods (and even these three if done with less care or skill
on copper) must yield place to a good design on stone; especially if one
takes into account the ease of execution, the lesser need for skill, the
greater speed of printing, and the almost countless impressions that are
possible.

For instance, printing music from the stone has a decided advantage over
zinc plates, both because of smaller cost and greater beauty. It is
easier to produce all kinds of script on stone, both with fatty inks and
with the engraving needle. Therefore lithography serves excellently for
charts and similar work, which can be done at least three times faster
on stone than on copper.

If copper-printing is to reach a high degree of perfection, the printing
itself must be done by very excellent workmen. Indeed, some persons
allege that the very best German copper-plate printers do not yet equal
the Parisians. Printing from stone is not so difficult, and only a few
particular methods demand especial care or unusual knowledge. Because of
the greater ease of inking, the speed of stone-printing may be assumed
to be at least five times as great, often ten times, and especially so
when large plates are to be printed. Besides, it is much easier to make
corrections on stone than on copper and zinc.

From all this it appears that lithography makes it much easier to write
and design and then to print swiftly and produce any desired number of
impressions, of all those works that heretofore could be produced only
on copper or zinc, providing they do not demand the very greatest degree
of delicacy, strength, and sharpness obtainable with copper; in a word,
so long as it is not vital to attain the utmost possible artistic
beauty. Further, most of these works done on stone, by only average
artists and printers, usually are more beautiful than if they had been
done by the same men in copper or zinc.

This property alone gives lithography a preëminent value, the more so as
no great expense is incurred in establishing a plant. But in addition to
this, there are several art methods peculiar to it, which cannot be
imitated by book-printing or copper-print, and which make it possible
for almost every writer or artist to manifold his works without any
especial skill.

I will mention now only the crayon process, which enables every artist
or painter to make several thousand impressions of his original
drawings; also the transfer method, by means of which all that is
written or drawn with fatty ink on ordinary paper can be transferred to
the stone, giving countless faithful impressions. This latter process is
particularly useful for government bureaus, and is being used already
with great profit.

All this I believe that I can claim for lithography with fullest
confidence, and I hope that everybody who becomes sufficiently
conversant with it will share my belief. Thus, besides the properties
of the art, we have stated its uses, and I proceed to the real
instructions, through which I hope to make good artists and printers on
stone.



PART I

GENERAL PROVISIONS



CHAPTER I

OF THE STONES


I

The stone that has been used exclusively hitherto in Munich for printing
is a stratified limestone, found in the territory from Dietfurt to
Pappenheim, and along the Danube down to Kellheim; hence the name
Kellheimer plates, presumably because in past times the stone was
quarried there first, or else found in its best quality. Now the
Kellheimer quarry is exhausted, and the trade in the stones has
transferred itself to Solenhofen, a village in the judicial district of
Mannheim, three hours distant from Neuberg-on-the-Danube. All the
inhabitants of Solenhofen are quarrymen, and the entire surrounding
country seems to have a surplus of the stone, so that even with the
greatest demand no scarcity is to be feared for centuries.

When the upper layer of earth is removed to the depth of six to ten feet
in Solenhofen, the stones are found in strata lying horizontally on each
other. First come strata of brittle stone, which often are composed of
hundreds of plates as thin as paper. With proper care, each plate can be
loosened and lifted whole. These layers are useless, being too brittle,
and yet being too firm and not white enough to permit their possible use
as chalk.

The Solenhofen stone consists chemically mostly of lime earth and
carbonate. It is almost wholly soluble in nitric and other acids, the
carbonate being liberated in gaseous form and disappearing. Since the
various kinds of marble have almost the same component parts, one might
suppose that marble should be available for lithography. But the many
dark, uneven colors of marble and chiefly the many cracks and veins make
considerable difficulty. However, I have found many evenly colored
greenish, gray, bluish, and brownish Bavarian and Tyrolean marbles very
useful for some methods, especially because of their superior hardness.
Still, the Solenhofen stone will retain the advantage because of its
light color and its greater cheapness.

The white Parian or Carrara marble is still lighter in color, to be
sure, and really is rather useful for pen and crayon work. But though in
part it is harder, on the whole it is much more porous and not so finely
grained as the Solenhofen stone, and therefore not at all available for
the intaglio method.

Since lithography began to arouse general interest, there have been
attempts to find a stone similar to the Solenhofen, and there has been
some fair success in France, Italy, England, and lately in the Kingdom
of Prussia. With the enormous masses of limestone which cover the
surface of the earth, it is not unlikely that this stone will be found
in many places, either in layers of plates one, two, or more inches
thick, or in great blocks which can be cut into plates.

In the Solenhofen stones one layer is not as good as another, and even
in the same layer there may be a decided difference. Therefore, if one
would produce perfectly beautiful work, it is necessary to obtain
selected and perfect stones. This should be stipulated beforehand with
the quarrymen, who now know pretty well how the best stones should be
constituted.

A good stone must have the following properties:--

(1) _The proper thickness._ Thickness must be proportionate to the size.
Smaller plates will resist the pressure of printing even if they are not
so thick as the larger ones must be. But it is best to buy no stone less
than one and one half or more than three and one half inches thick,
because the thinner ones will not bear frequent grinding and the thicker
ones are too heavy and inconvenient, besides taking up too much room.
The best thickness of a stone is two to two and one half inches.

(2) _Good mass._ There are soft and hard stones. Sometimes the same
stone is hard above and soft underneath, or the reverse. Often, also, a
stone may consist of several thin and unequal layers. In the latter
case, if the union is good and the layers are not easily separated, it
will make no difference, so long as the stone is good in other respects.
On the whole, however, it may be assumed that the harder stones are the
best for all methods, so long as their mass is entirely uniform and they
are not marred, as is the case with many, with white dots and patches.
Then, to be sure, they are not worth much for any process, and at best
can be used only for pen designs or for such of the intaglio processes
where the lines need no particular sharpness. Such stones, generally
gray, very hard, with softer, somewhat lighter patches or specks, are
very hard to grind evenly because the softer parts are most powerfully
attacked by the grinding material and become depressed. This produces
the following defects:--

(_a_) In pen work, the pen will catch often, whenever it comes to such a
place. This, however, is not so important: but

(_b_) In the crayon method there will be defects and lights in the
shadings on the softer places, which are very hard to correct.

(_c_) In the etched or engraved methods, the needle will sink in much
deeper when it passes over such softer spots, making a deeper and
broader line which injures the clearness of the drawing. In etching,
also, the softer places are more affected by the acid; and it is better,
therefore, to use a soft stone whose entire surface is uniform, than to
have a stone that is hard but uneven.

A very soft stone cracks easily in the press, unless it consists of
several layers, the lower of which are hard. But it is easier to
engrave, and as a rule gives blacker impressions, because it sucks more
color in, and holds it because of its greater porosity. Printing,
however, is somewhat more difficult, because these stones take dirt
readily; nor is it possible to get so many impressions. They are not
useful for crayon work because the finest shadings are too easily etched
away; and pen work is difficult on them, because the steel pen easily
cuts into the stone, fills its point with fine dust, and thus gives no
ink flow. This softest stone in Solenhofen generally looks yellow, or
is marbled with red and white or has many yellow veins.

Even those stones whose uniformity, thickness, and hardness make them
best for all methods, often have defects, such as so-called glass spots
or tiny, sometimes invisible holes, broad veins and cracks. All these
must be avoided when selecting stone. Very small deep veins, which often
are fine as hairs, yellowish and grayish spots, impressions of fossil
plants and fishes, etc., are not harmful. It is rare to find a stone as
large as a sheet of note-paper that is entirely free from these little
defects.

(3) The form of the stones also is to be considered, and must be
selected according to need. To be sure, a small design can be drawn on a
large stone; but apart from the inconvenience, the construction of the
press demands that the stone be not much larger than the drawing.
However, at the end where the impression begins and stops, there must be
at least an inch margin to give sufficient room for the roller to take
hold, as will be explained more particularly later.

When one has to print small things like visiting-cards, etc., it will
not be profitable to use large stones, especially if they are to be
saved for future use. Small stones of the size of an octavo sheet are
better. Therefore it will be wise to have stones cut to various sizes in
the beginning. It would be well also that one of the printers, or the
polisher, strive to attain skill in cutting stones to size. Sometimes
polishing discloses defects in a stone, making it useless for a design
of any size. But it is possible to cut it up into many small ones that
are perfect. Sometimes a stone cracks under the press or breaks through
accident. Skill in cutting will enable one to make small and good stones
out of the pieces.

It is essential for good work in the press that the stones be cut very
true. The stones that are used for flooring in churches, etc., usually
are cut so that the upper face is larger than the lower. This is done to
make them set better in the mortar and to enable the stone-cutters to
fit them closely together on the top. But this must not be done with
stones for printing, because such stones could not be tightened properly
in the press and would lift during the printing. Printing-stones must be
cut absolutely true vertically. Indeed, in work where several plates
are to be used to make one complete impression, and where steel
guide-points in the frame are used instead of laying the paper on the
plate, it is beneficial to cut the stones conically, so that the base is
one fourth inch greater than the top. The plate can be tightened better
and is less likely to be moved from its place during the impressions.

Despite their hardness the stones are brittle, and a single light but
sudden blow with any hard body, such as a steel tool, may cause a crack
in the thickest stone. It is necessary to exercise great care to avoid
all shocks.

This property of the stone is used in Solenhofen to cut the stones
according to desire. A small hammer of hard steel, weighing scarcely two
ounces, is used. Its end is somewhat like a stone-chisel, but not nearly
so sharp. With this hammer, which is set on a thin handle two or three
feet long, the workman strikes light but very swift blows along the line
of desired cleavage, each tap being about an inch from the preceding
one. The stone is so laid that its greater part is free, resting on
nothing. This light operation is sufficient to cleave the largest
stones.

The cleavage is not always uniform and true. Therefore the stone usually
is finished with a sharp stone-chisel. It is possible also to divide a
stone as desired by supporting it at both ends so that there is nothing
under the part to be split, and then cutting along the line with a
chisel of hardened steel, not too sharp, which is tapped lightly with a
light hammer. The varying sound tells at once when the stone cracks, and
then a few light taps with the hammer on the other side suffice to
separate it. Before one attains the necessary skill, however, he will
smash many a stone. Therefore it is not advisable to try this on a stone
that has a design on it, for a single incorrect or over-heavy blow often
will split the stone in the wrong direction. Blows that are too light,
on the other hand, often make it almost impossible in the end to cause a
cleavage along the desired lines.


II

POLISHING

The stone plates that come from Solenhofen, even if polished according
to stipulations, rarely are available for printing, but must be
specially polished by one who understands the work thoroughly.

The first requisite for this is a straightedge of iron or brass, as true
as possible. This ruler must be laid on the stone in various directions,
and the lithographer must note all parts where there is space between
the straightedge and the stone. The greater the space, the greater the
unevenness of the stone; and those that show especial unevenness should
be set aside from those that have little.

When this has been done, the very uneven stones must be ground with a
coarse sandstone and plenty of water applied to the elevated places till
the straightedge can be applied in all directions without showing any
material interstices. Then these ground stones may be placed with the
others that were fairly even in the beginning.

Now we take one of these stones, and lay it on a strong, firm table, the
best being one to be described later. Finely grained sand is sprinkled
over its surface. In the absence of sand, a substitute can be made by
powdering a common sandstone of the kind used for coarse grindstones. A
spoonful of water is poured over this. A little soap may be mixed with
the sand. It facilitates the grinding and makes the sand take hold of
the stone better. Now another stone is laid on the first one, and is
moved back and forth continually in all directions. The sand and water
must be renewed often. Thus both stones, the upper and lower, will be
ground simultaneously, and very evenly and true, if the work is done
right.

One must take care never to draw the upper stone far beyond the lower
one, because that would throw the centre of gravity of the upper plate
too near its ends, as a result of which the upper plate would become
concave and the lower plate convex. To avoid this defect, the upper
plate should be moved around only in small circles. It is good also to
change the plates around frequently, so that the upper shall be the
lower. Another good plan is not to use two stones of equal size, but to
take for the upper stone one only half as large as the lower. It is
necessary also that the straightedge be applied frequently. The stone
must always be cleansed thoroughly before this test.

Once one has the proper experience, it is possible to tell by mere touch
if the plates have been sufficiently ground. So long as they still have
uneven spots, a certain resistance is noticeable, so strongly sometimes
that it is impossible to move the upper plate further without lifting it
and sprinkling new sand. Sometimes this friction is so great that manual
strength does not suffice to separate the stones, especially if they
happen to dry. If tools are used to separate them, it happens often that
pieces are torn from the stones, because they adhere so mightily. In
this case a very simple and convenient remedy is the best. An ordinary
table-knife is inserted gently and then tapped very lightly, when the
stones will separate at once.

Whenever sand is applied, water must be applied also, but not too much,
as in that case it would only wash away the sand. Here, too, practice
must teach the exact proportions.

From the stone-cutter's work, as well as from the primary grinding with
sandstone, the plates will have visible furrows and scratches made by
the coarser grains of sand. Under the polishing all these disappear bit
by bit, and there appears a fine grain, consisting entirely of fine
dots; and this is the finer in proportion as the sand is crushed by the
process of polishing and also according as less fresh sand has been
used.

When the marks of the sand have vanished completely, it is fairly
certain that the stones are polished sufficiently. To make sure, the
straightedge can be applied again. It must not be imagined, however,
that it is necessary or possible to polish a plate so perfectly that
there will be absolutely no spaces between any part of its surface and
the straightedge. A perfect and mathematically level plane surface is
hardly likely ever to be produced. If the stone is almost level, and the
unevennesses do not exceed the thickness of letter-paper, it is quite
sufficient.

Although this sort of polishing, with two plates at once, is not used
in all lithographies, some preferring to polish with small pieces of
sandstone, I give it here as the best, because it demands little skill
and is quicker, so that one can grind off four stones in the time
required for one under other methods.

In this matter of smoothness of the stone it is impossible to be too
careful. The beauty of the imprint depends upon it. Errors in the
polishing cause great trouble afterward. Therefore the manager of a
lithography must pay close attention to this work. In the Lithographic
Institute in Berlin the rule has been adopted that no engraver shall
accept a plate that he has not found thoroughly good, under penalty of
reimbursing the printers for all extra trouble and work.

This first polishing, however, is only the general preparation of the
stone. Afterward they must be polished and prepared especially for each
particular method, as will be explained in the proper place.


III

SORTING AND STORING

When the plates have been polished, they are cleansed with water and
sorted for their various uses. Now it is easier to see just what quality
the stones have, their defects, and consequently, what work they are
best for. Those not uniform are best for coarse pen work. Those of
uneven coloring, but hard and thick mass, can be used for the finer pen
drawings, for etching and engraving, or for transfer work. For crayon
work the clearest and most evenly colored stones of extreme hardness are
to be selected.

They can be stored anywhere that is not too damp and not too much
exposed to winter cold. Dry cold does not hurt them; but if they are wet
through and through and then freeze, they will crack. In constant
dampness, too, saltpetre and other salts enter them and they crumble. In
clean water they do not undergo any changes.

I will describe the storage of etched and designed stones later.

If the stones are to be used after being stored in any damp place, they
should be kept for several days in a temperate and dry place till they
have dried thoroughly, as otherwise they are not easy to work in any
style. This is not necessary if their place of storage has been
perfectly dry.



CHAPTER II

OF INK, CRAYON, ETCHING, AND COLOR


I

CHEMICAL INK

The first and most necessary material in a stone printery is the
so-called chemical ink, which would better be named fatty or alkaline
ink, since it is a mixture of fatty and resinous materials with alkali.
It is used partly to write or draw directly on the stone, partly to
cover the stone as with an etching surface, and partly to transfer to
the stone from paper.

The purpose of this ink is, first, to cause a mass of oily, fatty
substances to soak into the pores of the stone and also make certain
portions of its surface fatty; and secondly, to resist acids according
to requirement in such degree that the stone shall remain fat where
needed, that thus the design, applied with this ink, shall be left
untouched by acid.

I have remarked before that countless different mixtures can be made,
most of which fulfill the purpose. But there enters the consideration
that it must be an ink easy to use, that handsome work may be done by
the artists with perfect ease.

Various mixtures answer this purpose very well, and I have found
sometimes that men could work better with mixtures made by themselves
than they could with those that I used for my own work. Perhaps this was
a matter of imagination, or the real reason lay in the pen-cutting, it
being well known that one man can use a pen that is absolutely worthless
for another.

I myself have tested the values of some mixtures so thoroughly that I
can declare almost positively that it will not be easy to find better
ones for any purposes. I will describe these fully.

First of all, stone-ink is divided into two great classes. One is
thicker, being used for drawing on stone. The other is more fluid, being
used for transfers.

The following mixtures of the first kind are the best:--

      (1) White Wax            8 parts
          Soap                 2 parts
          Lampblack            1 part

This ink does not really serve for writing or drawing on the stone, but
is used mostly for coating those places that are to be protected from
the etching fluid. If this ink is needed in a thickened form, the wax
should be heated in an iron pan till it burns and the combustion should
continue till one half of it is consumed. The longer it burns, the
harder will be the remnant.

      (2) White Wax           12 parts
          Tallow (Ox Fats)     4 parts
          Soap                 4 parts
          Lampblack            1 part
      (3) Wax                 12 parts
          Shellac              4 parts
          Soap                 4 parts
          Lampblack            1 part
      (4) Tallow               8 parts
          Shellac              8 parts
          Soap                 4 parts
          Lampblack            1 part
      (5) Wax                  8 parts
          Shellac              4 parts
          Mastic               4 parts
          Soap                 4 parts
          Lampblack            1 part
      (6) Wax                  8 parts
          Tallow               4 parts
          Shellac              4 parts
          Soap                 4 parts
          Lampblack            1 part
      (7) Wax and Gum quajak  12 parts
          Tallow               4 parts
          Soap                 4 parts
          Lampbblack           1 part

The wax and gum are melted in equal proportions, the undissolved portion
is discarded and of the mixture twelve parts is used as above.

      (8) Wax                  6 parts
          Shellac              4 parts
          Tallow               2 parts
          Mastic               3 parts
          Venetian turpentine  1 part
          Soap                 4 parts
          Lampblack            1 part

There is no important difference between the inks in the seven last
formulas. Those that contain shellac remain fluid a little longer but
are harder to prepare. It is not necessary to be painfully minute about
the proportions of the various materials, providing the proportions of
soap and lampblack be correct. The soap is about one fifth and the
lampblack about one twentieth part of the whole. If too much soap is
used, the ink will dissolve more readily, but the solution will become
slimy more quickly. Too much lampblack would make the ink run.


MAKING THE CHEMICAL INK

In making any of the inks mentioned, first divide the required quantity
of soap into two equal parts. Put one part into an iron pan with the
other substances, and heat till the mass begins to burn. Let it burn
till almost one half is consumed. Then cover the pan with an iron lid,
or place it very carefully into a basin of water to extinguish and cool
the mixture.

One part of the soap is mixed in at once, that the combustion may make
it mix well with the other substances. But it loses some of its strength
and sates itself with carbonic acid, so that it is not quite so powerful
as before to attack the fats. Therefore a second part is added after the
combustion. Then the complete mixture is heated again, but only to a
degree sufficient to melt the soap.

Now take up a bit of the mass with a clean knife and see if it is easily
soluble in river or rain water. If the soap was good (something not
always the case), the quantity named in the formulas always suffices. If
it does not contain enough alkali, little pieces of soap must be added
till the mass is soluble. Then the lampblack is added while the mass is
being stirred without cessation.

The lampblack must be of the finest sort, and should be roasted and
burned in a closed vessel until it ceases to give off any yellow smoke.

When everything has been stirred till the mass is nearly cold, it is
kneaded into any desired shape, sticks being the best, and so saved for
use.

The following remarks are to be noted especially:--

(1) The soap is to be the ordinary soap made from ox fat and lye. In the
formulas its weight is calculated in fresh form, which, of course,
includes considerable water. If the soap is very dry, less must be used.

Venetian or vegetable oil soap is not so good because the ink easily
becomes slimy afterward when dissolved in water. It does not resist
acids so well, either. If, however, the other kind is not to be had, or
to be had only in poor quality, the Venetian soap will do. It will be
necessary merely to make frequent fresh solutions in water of the ink.

(2) Lampblack is not the only substance available for giving color to
the ink. Vermilion, red chalk, indigo, blue lake of logwood, and several
other colors can be used, so long as they do not consist of acids or
other salts, and thus have properties that could alter the nature of the
soap. The finer kinds of ordinary lampblack can be used without burning,
but then a part of the soap always is rendered inactive, because the
lampblack usually contains a considerable quantity of inflammable wood
acid which unites with the alkali, neutralizes it, and thus destroys
its effectiveness against fats. Therefore, if it is not roasted
beforehand, it may be necessary to mix more soap with the ink after it
is made, and this does not completely remedy the trouble. Lampblack can
be purified by rubbing down with strong lye and then boiling in
sufficient water till no trace of alkali remains, if roasting and
burning be undesirable for any reason.

Better even than this purified lampblack is one that one makes for
himself from ox or other animal fat, from wax, or better still, from a
mixture of ox fat and resin. The fat is melted and poured into an
earthen lamp similar to those used for city lighting, with a cotton
wick. The lamp is lit and placed under a plate of iron or brass, so that
the smoke must settle on it. The plate must be close to the flame. The
soot is scraped off from time to time and dropped into a glass, which is
kept covered. This process continues, the lamp being refilled till one
has the desired quantity. This soot is very fine and bland, and so good
that one can do more with an ounce of it than with three ounces of the
ordinary kind. The ink made from it is extraordinarily fine and good.

It is to be noted in conclusion that the more soot is used, the blacker
will be the ink, but the coarser will be the work, because the ink will
have the tendency to spread. The less soot is used, the finer will be
the work; but it is not easy then to see what one is doing or to judge
if the design is strong enough. The quantities given in the formulas
appear to me to be the best, especially if the self-manufactured soot is
used.

(3) To dissolve the ink, rain water or pure soft river water is best.
The rain water must not be very old or stale, otherwise the solution
will get slimy.

(4) The severe combustion is not vital for making the ink, but helps
very much in making it easy to use.

(5) When shellac is part of the mixture, it is vital to burn the mass
well, as only thus will shellac dissolve properly.

Shellac, which is made in China and East India from an insect belonging
to the bee family, will melt under moderate heat, but will not dissolve
in any animal fat or oil unless it has previously lost its inherent
acid, which occurs only under combustion. If shellac is melted with oil
or fat, it covers the bottom of the vessel in the beginning. With heat
increased till it causes combustion, it begins to swell, rises to the
surface, and at last covers the surface in the form of a spongy mass. If
the heat still increases, it begins to dissolve into foam. Then it is
time to remove the mass from the fire and to cover it with a tight lid,
that the flame may be extinguished.

If shellac has been once melted and has hardened, it dissolves only
slowly even under severe combustion. It is better, therefore, to bring
the other substances to combustion first, and then to mix the shellac in
small portions, which will dissolve much more readily because they will
be attacked by the great heat in the moment of melting and will not have
time to swell first and get hard.

As soon as the mass has cooled a little, the second part of soap is
added, and the whole heated, without burning, merely enough to melt the
soap.

(6) None of these mixtures can be kept well any length of time in fluid
form, that is, dissolved in water, because it becomes slimy after a very
few days, sometimes sooner. It can be liquefied again by mixing with
water, but not without affecting its durability. Therefore the ink must
be stored dry, in which form it lasts for years without change. When
required, a small quantity, about the size of two peas, is rubbed down
in a very clean small earthen or porcelain vessel, such as a saucer.
Those mixtures that contain tallow rub the easiest. The others,
containing harder substances, require more pressure. The ink should be
spread evenly over the bottom of the vessel. Then a coffee-spoonful of
rain or other soft water is poured in, and the mixture is rubbed with
the finger till the solution is perfect. Then it is put into a small,
very clean pot of glass or porcelain and is ready for use.

(7) A great deal depends on the proper quantity of water. A good ink
must be completely dissolved, with no solid particles left. It should be
about as fluid as a good, fat milk or vegetable oil. If it is too thick,
it makes the work difficult. If it is too thin, it will not withstand
the etching fluid. A few experiments will teach the proper proportions.
Even a good ink will make poor lines if it is laid on too thinly and not
firmly enough. This, however, is due to the artist's lack of skill or to
defective pens, of which I will treat hereafter.

With this quantity of ink it is possible to work for a whole day. Thus
each day fresh ink can be mixed; and it is to be noted that the vessels
must be cleansed scrupulously that no trace of the previous day's ink be
left in them. The ink will dry during the work, and as soon as this
begins to interfere with its use, one or two drops of water will thin it
again sufficiently.

This is about all that need be said about the chemical fatty or alkaline
stone-ink in general. Particular remarks will be found in the
description of its use for particular methods.


II

HARD BORAX INK

Besides the inks described, it is well to make the following and keep it
in stock for uses whose great value will be explained later.

      Shellac  4 parts
      Borax    1 part
      Water   16 parts

Borax and shellac must be put into a clean pot filled two thirds with
water and boiled for an hour. As the water boils away it must be
replaced. When the shellac has been mostly dissolved, the mass is
removed from the fire, cooled, and filtered through a clean cloth to
separate the undissolved portions of the shellac.

This solution can be kept for years in a tightly closed glass. To color
it, a portion is to be cooked in a copper or iron ladle till it is thick
as honey. Fine lampblack or vermilion is stirred in till the mass is
thoroughly united. Then water is added, and the composition boiled again
till it is a perfect solution. This black or red ink is first-class and
can be kept well in tightly closed glass.


III

FLUID INK

Herr Andre, in Offenbach, uses an ink which has the useful property of
remaining good for years in fluid form. I do not find it so good for the
very finest work as those I have described, but for music and script it
is excellent. It consists of:--

      12 parts shellac
       4 parts mastic
       1 part pure ox-fat soap
       1 part purified crystallized soda
       1 part lampblack

This is mixed with water and boiled in a clean vessel, being constantly
stirred till it is dissolved. Then the boiling is continued till the
water has disappeared almost entirely. Fresh water is added and the
boiling continued till everything has dissolved anew. Then the mixture
is filtered through a cloth and kept in a vessel where it is secure
against dust. If it is seen on cooling that it is too thick it can be
thinned easily with water. Also, when it dries during use it can be
liquefied by adding water, unless dust has entered it.


IV

TRANSFER INK

All the above-named inks are intended for use directly on stone. If it
is desired to write on paper and transfer this writing to the stone,
those inks mostly prove too hard, unless one would use warmed stones, as
described later. This, however, makes added work: therefore, I give here
the recipe for an ink excellent for cold transfers.

      Shellac     3 parts
      Wax         1 part
      Tallow      6 parts
      Mastic      5 parts
      Soap        4 parts
      Lampblack   1 part

The mode of preparation is exactly like that of the rest. The mass can
be kept only in dried form, not mixed with water. The evidence that this
ink is good for transfer work is that, after it has stood for some days,
it still manifests stickiness when touched with the finger. If the ink
does not transfer well to the stone under moderate pressure, it is too
hard, and can be improved by mixing in a little butter or vegetable oil,
but it is necessary to dissolve the whole mass again over the fire. If
the design squashes under pressure, the ink is too soft. It is necessary
to consider the temperature of the place where it is kept, and even the
time of year, in order to produce the proper consistency of ink for the
best transfer work.


V

HARD ETCHING GROUND

Certain methods of stone-printing demand, besides the ink, a fatty,
acid-resisting mass to coat the plates. It is either the same as the
material used by copper-plate etchers, or, at least, is very similar to
it.

Etching Ground for stone is as follows:--

      Wax      12 parts
      Mastic    6 parts
      Asphalt   4 parts
      Resin     2 parts
      Tallow    1 part

This is melted in an iron pan over a fire hot enough to melt the asphalt
perfectly. Combustion is allowed to ensue till a third of the mixture
has been consumed. When thoroughly cooled, it may be shaped in any
desired form and saved for use.

A good surface is made also by common wax, boiled and burned till almost
five parts of it have been consumed.


VI

SOFT ETCHING GROUND

For some processes there is needed an etching ground which has the
property of not coating the entire surface, permitting the etching fluid
to penetrate at many spots uniformly, or, if it resists the etching
fluid, still so easily affected by manipulation that it will admit the
acid according to such manipulation. There are two ways to make it.

      (1) Thick linseed oil varnish   1 part
          Tallow                      2 parts
      (2) Wax                         1 part
          Tallow                      5 parts
          Linseed oil varnish         3 parts

The application will be described in the instructions about aquatints,
etc.


VII

ACID PROOF INK

So I name a color which has the property of resisting acid when the
stone is inked with it. It is useful in many cases, and even necessary.
It is well, therefore, to make a supply of it.

      2 parts thick linseed oil varnish
      4 parts tallow
      1 part Venetian turpentine
      1 part wax

All must be well melted, mixed with four parts lampblack, well rubbed
down and kept in a closed tin vessel.


VIII

CRAYON

Chemical or fatty crayon is a composition intended to be used on the
stone plate in dry form like Spanish or Parisian chalk. The inks
described previously have the property of soaking into the stone and
making it greasy where applied. The same happens if they are applied
dry, the degree of their penetration and adherence merely being less.

The mixtures that may be used to make crayons are countless. Wax and
soaps, however, are better than resinous materials. Therefore it is
likely that the compositions here named will be pretty nearly the best.

      (2) Wax         4 parts
          Soap        6 parts
          Lampblack   2 parts, roasted, or better still,
                          made as explained before.

The wax and soap are melted together. The lampblack is added then. All
is rubbed down fine on a hot plate, and then placed on the fire again
till it is fluid once more. Then it is poured on a stone plate coated
with a little oil, so that it forms a cake of about one eighth inch
thickness. When this has cooled a little, it is cut into thin pieces and
put away till needed.

      (2) Wax         8 parts
          Soap        4 parts
          Lampblack   2 parts

Burn the wax till one half is consumed, then melt the soap with it, and
treat the mixture as before.

      (3) Wax         4 parts
          Spermaceti  4 parts
          Soap        4 parts
          Lampblack   2 parts

The first three materials are melted together, the lampblack is added,
and then the whole is treated as before.

      (4) Wax         8 parts
          Spermaceti  4 parts
          Soap        4 parts
          Lampblack   2 parts

The wax is to be half burned away, then the spermaceti and soap are to
be melted into it, and the whole treated as the other formulas.

      (5) Shellac     4 parts
          Wax         8 parts
          Soap        5 parts
          Lampblack   3 parts

The shellac is to be completely dissolved with the wax by means of
combustion after which the rest of the treatment is the same as before.

      (6) Shellac     4 parts
          Wax         8 parts
          Tallow      2 parts
          Soap        5 parts
          Lampblack   3 parts

The same treatment, except that the tallow is to be mixed in after the
shellac has dissolved. This crayon is a little softer than the others.
The same is true of the following two.

      (7) Wax         8 parts
          Tallow      4 parts
          Soap        6 parts
          Lampblack   3 parts

Wax, tallow, and soap are melted together and burned till one third of
the mass has been consumed. Then the lampblack is added and the rest of
the process is as before.

      (8) Wax         2 parts
          Tallow      6 parts
          Mennig      2 parts
          Lampblack   2 parts

Wax, mennig, and lampblack are heated and constantly stirred till the
mennig dissolves in froth and changes from red to brown. Then the
lampblack is rubbed in thoroughly, the whole warmed again properly and
shaped into sticks.

These are the best compositions, thoroughly tested by me, and it is very
good to make a stock of all or most of them. In the case of the recipes
for chemical ink, the differences are not great, and it is largely a
matter of taste as to which kind one may use. But in the case of the
crayons, each of them produces a different grain which creates a
particular effect; so that by using various kinds of crayon one will
gain greater perfection of work, or, at least, find execution easier
than with only one crayon. Also, they are in proportion to the greater
or lesser roughness of the stones; and the darker shadings are easier to
produce with soft crayons than with hard ones, while the hard ones are
best for fine shading and outlines.

The lampblack used for crayons must be burned out first, else it will
develop blisters, which is the case also if the composition is poured on
the plates too hot.

Crayon that contains much shellac is likely to soften in damp air;
therefore it should be kept in tightly closed vessels.


IX

CONCERNING COLOR FOR PRINTING

The manufacture of printing-ink or color is very difficult and dangerous
on a large scale. I counsel all to take lessons from a book printer when
he makes it.

The varnish must be prepared in the open, far from buildings, because of
its combustibility. The best utensils and skilled workmen are required,
because otherwise terrible accidents may occur, and even life be lost
through explosion of the copper receptacle. Whoever does not require as
much as one or more hundredweight of varnish in a year, would better buy
it from printers or make only a small quantity, one or two pounds, and
in an open vessel. For this purpose I will describe the process.

One, or at most two pounds of good old but not rancid linseed oil are
poured into a clean iron pan which has a long, strong handle and is so
large that the oil takes up only one half or, better, one third of the
space. This is heated over a good fire till it burns, which is
facilitated by applying flame to it. Oil that is too new has much water
and other impurities that make it froth and run over. In that case the
oil must be poured into the pan only in small quantities, when one must
take great care to avoid spattering. As soon as the oil burns, the pan
is removed from the fire and placed in a safe spot. If it is hot enough,
it will continue to burn. It must now be stirred from time to time with
an iron rod. Usually the flame increases under this stirring, but sinks
again immediately at its cessation. So long as it does this, there is no
danger that the flame cannot be easily extinguished if need be. But when
it begins to continue burning with a great flame after the stirring
stops, and at the same time to bubble and froth, it is high time to
cover the pan with a close lid and leave it covered till the oil no
longer takes fire when exposed again to the air. Then a dry knife is
introduced and as much oil removed as will adhere to its point. If it
does not permit itself to be pulled into long threads when cool, but is
too thin, it must be heated again until it gets the required
consistency.

A good varnish dries very readily of itself, and it is not only
unnecessary but inadvisable to mix a drier with it, as varnish so
treated is too likely to off-set on the stone.

Several strengths of printing-varnish are needed for the various methods
of lithography. Therefore a stock of thin, medium, and thick varnish is
needed.

In making the thin, the oil has been reduced to about two thirds through
combustion. It is somewhat like fluid honey and does not pull into
threads.

Only a little more than half the oil is left in the case of medium
varnish. It is thick as old honey and can be pulled into threads a foot
long.

In the thick varnish the mass is not much less, but it can be pulled
into threads of a yard in length; and further boiling makes it thick and
tough like gum elastic. In the latter case it can be used with advantage
when rubbed down with oil and properly thinned. But as soon as it has
obtained the last-mentioned degree of thickness and toughness, it must
be cooled quickly, for then it is not far from hardening completely and
becoming worthless. In the beginning it requires a long while for the
oil to reach the first degree of thickness, an hour or more for a pound.
But after that period the thickening progresses rapidly, so that a
quarter of the time will bring it to the point of total toughness.

To make printing color of the varnish, the proper amount of lampblack
must be mixed in. The roasted or burned-out is best in this also,
because the ordinary lampblack delays the drying and turns yellow with
time.

The more lampblack is mixed in, and the more thoroughly they are
combined by rubbing down, the better will be the color. But lampblack
must not be added in such quantities that the color becomes dough-like.

In describing the various styles of printing I will describe the best
printing-inks also. I will merely make the general note here that
designs on stone take the ink best when it is thin and fluid, but that
there is less danger of off-set on the parts of the stone that are to
remain white, if the ink is tougher or contains more lampblack.

Too much lampblack and too tough a varnish endanger the finer strokes
and dots, however, so that they will not take ink, being, as
lithographers say, rubbed out. The rubbing or grinding effect of too
tough an ink is like that of pumice or other grinding material. With
tougher varnish, clearer imprints can be made and they do not become
yellow easily. But the inking is more difficult and demands greater
skill, as well as heavier pressure in the press.

The varnish can be mixed not only with lampblack but with many other
colors, which will be described when I reach color printing in this
essay. Sometimes black lacquer is used with advantage instead of
lampblack; and Frankfurter black is successful in the intaglio and
aquatint methods.


X

RUBBING-UP INK

It happens often that weak parts of a design cannot withstand the
etching fluid and are cut away; also, that fine lines are rubbed away
through unskilled treatment during printing. Then frequently a very
simple remedy is to ink the plate with the so-called rubbing-up ink.

This color consists of a thin varnish in which a portion of litharge of
silver or mennig or white lead has been dissolved thoroughly over the
fire, and a proper amount of lampblack added. Often it is good to add
some finely powdered sand or powdered pumice stone.

To prepare this, a portion of the thinnest varnish is heated in a pan
till it burns. Then about an ounce of finely powdered mennig (or another
lead oxide) is stirred in to each sixteen ounces of varnish till all is
thoroughly mixed.

A rubbing-up ink can be made also by mixing common printer's ink with
vegetable oil, tallow, and a very little soap.

Each of these colors adheres to all those places that have a trace of
fat and thus gradually makes faint places in a design receptive again.

Later I will describe how to use care in applying this color, so that
the entire stone shall not be smutted and spoiled.



CHAPTER III

CONCERNING ACIDS AND OTHER MATERIALS


I

GENERAL PROPERTIES OF ACIDS

Probably most lithographers still believe, as I did once, that the
etching with acids prepares the stone, and that the succeeding
application of gum merely increases this preparation. Countless
experiments have taught me that the exact reverse is true. Gum arabic
and a few other similar bodies are the true factors in preparation, and
the acids simply make the stone more receptive for them. Only sulphuric
acid, which changes the surface of the stone into gypsum, prepares it
without gum; but this is available only for a few intaglio methods.

The stone used for lithography consists mostly of limestone sated with
carbonic acid. Most acids, and even the salts, possess more affinity for
limestone than the carbonic acid, which latter is freed and escapes in
gaseous form as soon as another acid touches the stone. If aquafortis,
muriatic acid, vinegar, etc., is poured on the stone, there rise a
number of air blisters, which are nothing except the escaping carbonic
acid, and the applied fluid seems to boil, in degree according to its
strength. The boiling and bubbling last till the fluid has sated itself
with lime, after which it becomes still, and is impotent for further
etching.

The direct effect is the solution and destruction of parts of the
surface of the stone. If it has been coated in parts with a fatty
substance that resists the etching fluid, the places so coated are left
untouched, so that, when the stone is cleaned, all the fat-coated lines
and dots are in relief.

If the stone is coated with fatty matter, but not so thickly that the
acid is entirely resisted, it will pierce the covering and eat away more
or less of the stone. If the etching is continued or if the acid is
strong, the fatty coat will be destroyed entirely, the surface of the
stone will be clean, and ready for the ensuing preparation. The
preparation of the stone for pen drawings with oil or soap-water and
several aquatint methods, is based on this principle, that a very thin
coating of grease can be etched away partly or wholly, at will.

After eating away the surface of the stone the acids have the property
of giving it a fine polish.

Therefore if the stone has been covered with a design, and then etched
with an acid, it could be inked and printed many times, as long as it is
kept properly dampened and not too much pressure is used in applying the
ink. However, this could be done also with a thoroughly clean stone,
using only water, though the polish obtained from etching makes it much
easier. But this apparent preparation is not by any means sufficient to
print with certainty; and it becomes perfect only if the stone is coated
with a solution of gum arabic in water after being etched. If a plate
that has been merely etched and not treated with gum becomes dry during
printing, or even if too much pressure be used in applying ink or in
cleaning with the more or less smutty cleaning rags, it generally takes
color and smut which are extremely hard to remove.

We may assume, therefore, that the acids have the following effects on
the stone:--

(1) They will not attack the parts coated with grease.

(2) They will penetrate more or less if the fatty coating is only thin.

(3) Where they touch the stone they dissolve it and eat it away.

(4) They give it a polish that facilitates printing. This polish
disappears after a time on account of the cleaning with sponge or rag,
but is replaced by a new polish produced by this very means.

(5) They do not prevent the adherence of fatty material later, as soon
as the stone is dry, for which reason the parts prepared in the
beginning with acid and gum arabic must be prepared again by renewed
etching, to take the ink.

(6) Finally the acids have the property of giving to prepared stones
that have been used for impressions, a rough surface instead of a polish
when they are applied again, because they attack some parts more than
others, producing little pores with sharp edges which catch the ink.
This fact, as I will show more clearly later, makes necessary
extraordinary care if one wishes to clean prepared plates or correct
defects with new etching, because unskilled handling will often make
them worse.


II

THE ACIDS SPECIFICALLY

Nitric acid or aquafortis, muriatic acid, vinegar, tartaric acid, and
acid of wood sorrel, all have nearly similar effects, but aquafortis and
muriatic acid are used because of their greater cheapness.

Oil of vitriol or sulphuric acid, very much diluted with water, is
available for light but not for extensive etching, because it transforms
the surface of the stone into gypsum and deposits it again, so that
after that the acid cannot penetrate at all, or only partially. If a
part of vitriol, say diluted with twelve parts of water, is poured on a
cleanly ground stone, there ensues a violent action which, however, is
only brief. It might be supposed that the acid is sated with lime when
it ceases to act, but if it is moved to another part of the stone it
etches anew.

If the acid is washed from the stone and a woolen rag be used to rub it
after it is dry, it takes on a mirror-like polish. In this dry condition
it can be cleansed of color as easily as a copper plate, and if a stone
thus polished is engraved with a steel tool, it is possible to make
several impressions from it just as from copper. The polish is not
lasting, however, because the skin of gypsum is very thin. But it is a
useful method if it is desired to engrave the stone and ink it
frequently to see the effect.

All the acids named have the property, previously mentioned, of etching
the stone rough if it has been prepared before or used for impressions.
It seems that the gum unites more strongly with some parts of the stone
than with others, admitting the acid in these latter places. Possibly,
also, the bubbles caused by etching may help to produce this roughness
by hindering the uniform action of the acid. This seems to be confirmed
by the fact that an etched stone, prepared with gum, does not get nearly
so rough when etched again with very weak acid as it does when stronger
fluid is used.

In still greater degree does this appear when using citric acid or a
solution of alum in water. Take a finely ground stone, pour diluted
aquafortis over it, prepare it with the gum solution, and then dry it
thoroughly with a clean rag. Now pour a little citric acid or alum
solution on parts of it and let it dry. Then paint the parts so treated
with a fat or printing-ink. If the color is rubbed off with a wet rag,
it will be seen that the stone has become white again in all places
except those where the citric acid or alum are. Those parts will have
taken the color exactly as if they had been painted with chemical ink.
The same occurs when applying other acids, but in a lesser degree. This
effect will be mentioned in future for many methods. Here I will remark
only:--

It happens often that the stone takes color on places where it should
remain clean. This is caused by clumsy handling, unclean rags, etc., and
occurs particularly at the ends, because they dry first and are more
exposed to careless manipulation. These smutted places usually can be
cleansed with a clean woolen rag and gum solution or even with a wetted
clean finger. But sometimes the defect will not yield so easily,
especially if the printing-color is soft. Then the only remedy is to
prepare the stone over again, and that is the time when one must have
regard to the roughening that ensues, if the stone is not to be rendered
worse instead of better.

Therefore it is best in such cases to polish the ends of the stone with
pumice stone till all dirt is gone, and then to etch with diluted acid
and prepare anew with gum arabic.

To be sure, it is possible to dip a clean woolen rag in strong, even
pure acid, and thus etch dirt away from the ends; but great care is
necessary that no drop may touch the design, as the ink that adheres to
the latter is not strong enough to resist the acid. In thus cleansing
the plate, the roughening is etched away by the violent action, and a
new polish is obtained.

Still, in either method of cleaning dirty places, great care must be
taken not to touch roughly, press, or rub with dirty fatty rags or with
dirty, fatty fingers before the gum arabic is on it. The acid eats away
all the previous material used in preparation, and leaves the plate
practically in its clean, natural state. Consequently it will take on
grease readily, and the application of gum is essential.

It is feasible to mix the gum directly with the acid solution, but this
mixture must be made fresh again each day, as otherwise it loses much of
its value.

The following points are important:--

_First_: If the grease remain long on a stone that, though prepared, has
lost its coating of gum, it will penetrate the surface, and according to
its amount and fluidity, will sink more or less into the stone, which
will retain its polish on the surface but become more inclined to take
dirt. It is better, therefore, to leave a small amount of gum coating on
the stone in such cases.

_Second_: As only the extreme outer surface of the stone is prepared by
the gum, and this is rubbed away gradually by wiping during the
printing, so in the same proportion of wear and tear the original
preparation would become lost, if it were not renewed from time to time,
that is, if the stone were not again coated with gum. Twice a day,
however, is enough.

_Third_: Because of this susceptibility of the surface to injury, a
prepared stone must not be rubbed strongly with fatty material, because
this damages the surface and the stone would readily soak up the fat.

_Fourth_: If a prepared plate is totally denuded of gum, and has been
dry for a time, especially if it has already lost a part of the
preparation through printing, it will incline very much to take color
and smut. Therefore, when it is necessary to stop printing, it is well
to coat the plate at once with gum, but only with a very thin coat. If
this has not been done, and it is desired to use the plate again, great
care must be taken to wet it with the very purest water, or, better
still, with diluted etching fluid, for instance one part aquafortis to
five hundred parts of water; and then to coat it with gum. To neglect
this precaution may cause the total ruin of the plate. For safe-keeping
of the plates, if they are to be used again for printing, the coating
with gum is, therefore, absolutely necessary.

_Fifth_: Gum can prepare only a thoroughly clean stone or one properly
etched. Therefore, if the surface of the stone has even the least trace
of grease, it will take color, no matter how thickly it may be coated
with gum. On this fact is based the method of transferring copper-plate
impressions and other printed subjects, as will be described later.

_Sixth_: If the stone has had fat on its surface, and this fat has been
etched away again, the power of the gum asserts itself, and the stone
will be thoroughly prepared even if the fat has soaked considerably into
the body of the stone.

_Seventh_: Mere grinding of the stone is not sufficient to attain a
complete preparation through gum alone. Therefore, if an otherwise clean
stone has some places after grinding where the fat has soaked in deeply,
and one coats it with gum, the stone will take color after a time on
these fatty places, as soon as the inked rag has been rubbed over the
stone many times. However, this taking-on of color is only slight if the
gum solution is thick, and long-continued cleaning will transform it
into complete preparation.

_Eighth_: From both preceding observations we learn:--

Printing forces the color to sink considerably into the stone. If such a
stone is required for new designs, it is not practicable to grind it so
much that all the fatty places can be ground away. Therefore it is
ground only till it is thoroughly even again. Then it must be well
etched; otherwise it may happen that in printing the surface will rub
away and the entire previous writing or design will appear again, a
trouble hardly to be remedied.

If the stone is dirty in the middle, it can be cleaned in many cases by
pouring on a few drops of oil of turpentine and the same quantity of gum
solution, and rubbing it clean with a woolen rag. Then it must be washed
with a wet sponge, after which it is inked. If it has not lost the smut,
the only remedy is new preparation. As this must be done differently for
each different lithographic style, it will be described in its place.

If fat has soaked well into the stone in places where it is not desired,
it is always very difficult to remove it without injuring adjoining
parts. Correction of crayon work, if it has been etched and used for
printing, is especially difficult. It is true that the defective parts
can be cut out easily with a sharp instrument, but then these places
must be prepared again. If weak etching fluid is used, it will not
suffice. If strong fluid is used, the fine parts are easily attacked,
and at the same time the surface will become roughened so that the stone
often blackens entirely in the corrected parts. To avoid this trouble,
and to facilitate corrections, I made many experiments to discover an
acid composition that should prepare a stone anew and perfectly and yet
not roughen the surface. I found the best material in phosphoric acid,
especially when mixed with finely crushed nutgall.

Water in which phosphorus has been kept a long time becomes acid and
etches the stone. The acid can be obtained more quickly by burning the
phosphorus and catching the smoke. This method is somewhat expensive,
but one does not need much, as it is used only for correcting defects.

If a few drops of aquafortis or other acid are poured on a clean ground
stone, it will be etched. Now wipe the etching fluid off clean and coat
the plate with soap-water or chemical ink. As soon as it is dry, clean
it of the fatty coating with a few drops of oil of turpentine. If it is
dampened then with water and inked, it will take color everywhere, even
at the etched places. If gum is mixed with the acid, the same result
occurs, though the stone has been thoroughly prepared where this mixture
touched it. From this it appears that soap-water (and the alkalis in
general) can destroy the preparation given to the stone and make it
receptive again to fats. It is different if phosphoric acid is used.
This makes a preparation that can be destroyed only by very frequent
coating of soapy water.

Still more durable and resistant to soap is the preparation if fine
nutgall is mixed with the phosphoric acid and water solution. Nutgall
gives even the other acids the property of resisting soap more than
ordinarily. The study of this effect led me to invent the method of
transforming a relief design into intaglio. Also, it is only by the use
of phosphoric acid that one can do thoroughly that style of lithographic
work which resembles the scraped style in copper, or the so-called black
art.


III

GUM AS THE REAL PREPARATION

If a cleanly polished plate is sprinkled with a few drops of gum arabic
dissolved in water, the sprinkled places will take no color so long as
they are wet. When they dry, color will adhere, but can be washed away
easily with a wet sponge. This shows that the gum alone will prepare the
stone. The preparation will become more durable, however, if the stone
is etched first.

In both cases, however, the preparation extends only over the outermost
surface of the stone, penetrating only slightly, so that the least
injury will make it take color as soon as it is dry. On this fact is
founded the intaglio style of lithography. Therefore, if a clean ground
stone is etched, then prepared with gum and dried clean, it can be
coated with printing-ink or other fat substance (excepting soap and all
alkaline compositions), and there will be no danger that it will lose
its preparation. The thicker the gum coating, the less can the fat
penetrate.

In printing, during which the stone must be kept wet, only the original
coating of gum is necessary; but as the surface thus prepared soon
diminishes under the frequent wiping, it is necessary in some forms of
work to mix gum with the printing-color or with the water used to dampen
the stone. More of this will be explained in the proper place.

Here I will add only that the domestic gum of cherry and plum trees is
good for preparing stones some years and worthless in others, when it
cannot be dissolved in water. In possessing the properties for preparing
stone, the juice of many plants and fruits, sugar, and most mucous
materials of the vegetable and animal kingdom, such as white of egg,
approach gum arabic more or less. The latter, however, is to be
preferred because of its reliability.


IV

CONCERNING PARTIAL PREPARATION

Here I impart my experiences in regard to an astonishing phenomenon that
occurs often in lithography and gives much trouble, especially to
beginners. It is the so-called imperfect or semi-preparation, wherein
the stone betrays a strong inclination to take color, and still will not
do it or will do it only partially.

(_a_) If a cleanly ground stone is marked with chemical ink, etched, and
prepared, the marked places will take the printing-color and produce
impressions. If, after the stone is inked, one rubs strongly with the
wetted finger, the color can be wiped from the design, especially if it
has not been on the stone long and has been standing in a damp place. A
place whence the color thus has been removed does not take it readily
when the inking-roller is applied again; and the reluctance is the
greater in proportion to the length and violence of the rubbing and the
toughness of the printing-color. The stone shows clearly the traces of
the penetrating fat; indeed, if the stone is rubbed with a wet linen rag
that is inky from previous use, the design will reappear in black. But
as soon as the roller is used, instead of inking these places, it takes
the color off; and whatever means may be tried to make the defective
places receptive again to color, it remains difficult, often impossible.

What has happened is that the wet rubbing has cleansed the surface of
the stone of all its fat and at the same time has polished it and made
it slippery. It is a sort of preparation; and though the fat of the ink
has penetrated into the interior of the stone, the accidental
preparation still offers an obstacle which prevents the printing-ink
from adhering to the fat in those places. As I will show, these places
can be prepared again thoroughly.

(_b_) Another case is when the design is too weak, and has been attacked
by the etching-fluid too powerfully, though without being destroyed.
Here the printing-color usually is removed by the ink-roller, even
though it adheres pretty well when being wiped.

(_c_) A third kind of imperfect preparation is when a stone inclines to
take color or smut on prepared places. This happens sometimes in part,
sometimes over the whole surface, which latter effect is described by
saying that the stone has acquired a tone.

The cause of this phenomenon may be one of many. It is either due to the
appearance of a fat that has been in the stone, or to the fact that
unskilled manipulation has destroyed the preparation partially.

Thence follow several observations again:--

(1) Mere wiping with clean water will give the stone a sort of
preparation if the material used for wiping is suitable. This
preparation is incomplete, but can be transformed very easily into a
complete one. This incomplete preparation is according to the strength
with which the rubbing material affects the stone. Linen and cotton
stuffs have the least effect. More potent are animal wools and hair,
silk or wet leather. The printing-color itself has a preparing property
if it is made of very tough varnish or contains much lampblack. This
effect is increased if Frankfurter black or powdered charcoal is mixed
with the color, and the stone is kept very wet.

(2) The partial preparation is produced more quickly and made more
durable if the water contains gum or gummy stuffs.

(3) The operation is still quicker if a weak etching fluid is used. A
stronger fluid would make the preparation a complete one, but would also
injure the good spots. Then again one must remember that the second
etching produces the roughness discussed already.

(4) Grinding with sand, pumice, and other grinding materials also
produces partial preparation, which is transformed easily into complete
preparation by applying gum. Here, however, the circumstance is
noteworthy that a plate that has been blemished by rubbing can be made
to do the reverse, namely, to take color, by means of light grinding
with water. Assume, for instance, that a plate designed and prepared
in relief style has been spoiled by handling so that the design refuses
to take color. It is necessary merely to rub it all over with water
and fine sand or to clean it with oil of turpentine so that all
printing-color is removed from the surface. Then place it in a
receptacle containing a great deal of very clean water. If it is ground
delicately then with a very clean pumice stone, without destroying the
traces of the fatty material that has soaked in, it can be brought to
take color again as well as ever. Take a little of the before-mentioned
acid-proof ink, smear it on the color-stone, and apply a clean linen or
cotton rag. Wipe the stone that is lying in the water very gently with
this rag, and the color will fix itself bit by bit on all parts of the
design, even if the entire relief produced by the etching should have
been ground away. It is necessary only that the fat shall have soaked in
sufficiently; and this usually is produced soon enough by the printing.
After the plate has accepted color completely, it is to be completely
prepared by light etching and with gum, and then it will take the color
properly from the ink-roller.

If this experiment is to succeed, it is to be noted that in grinding
there must be no trace of fat on the stone or the pumice, because the
rubbing during grinding might transfer this greasiness to those parts of
the stone that are to remain white. Care must be taken, also, not to
press too hard in applying the etching color, because the places that
have been cleansed of all gum by the water, and thus are inclined to
accept color, will smut easily. Finally, the stone must not be permitted
to dry before it is fully prepared again by etching and gum coating, for
it might easily become entirely smutted and useless.

This experiment leads to the conclusion, which has been proved correct
in many ways, that a soft rubbing in clean water with printing-color,
especially if it contains tallow, is very well adapted for transforming
the incomplete preparation into a condition of accepting fat perfectly,
and of giving injured places new potency. Also, that the contrary
effect can be produced by violent rubbing, especially with wool,
leather, or tough colors, because this prepares the wet stone and makes
it useless for accepting fat. The first method may be used with
advantage, therefore, for reëstablishing a vanished design. The second
method is good for getting rid of smut. If the smut has occurred in
previously clean and thoroughly prepared places, it can be destroyed
entirely. But if it is only that the deeper fat has lost its superficial
polish, and has appeared again, the stone will be only partially
prepared by this last method and must be newly prepared on the desired
places with weak etching-fluid and gum, for durability's sake. It is
easy to see how important this circumstance is. With the one and the
same process in various degrees of manipulation, opposite results can be
produced; and I may declare that only he is to be termed a perfect
lithographer who has exact knowledge of this especial matter.

(5) It has been mentioned already that every sort of preparation can be
destroyed by a renewed etching, and particularly with alum and citric
acid. The same is caused by soap and alkaline compositions; therefore
also by chemical ink if it contains a sufficient amount of alkali.

(6) Simply letting the stone plate rest produces important, often
contradictory, phenomena. If smeared parts refuse color, clean water
poured over these places runs from them as quickly as it does from the
fatty parts. This is the surest sign that they still have fat, though it
is not sufficient to attract the color. If such a stone is permitted to
lie idle a few days, even if coated with gum, it will often take the
color thereafter. On the contrary, if a stone plate has taken on color
at the well-prepared places (usually readily removable by wiping with
oil of turpentine and gum solution, but generally reappearing), it need
merely be inked after such cleansing, coated with gum and left idle, and
in a few days it loses the readiness to take dirt.

The cause of both phenomena is that in the first case the fats that lie
deep gradually work upward into the partly prepared surface and
practically reëstablish their interrupted communication with the
printing-color. In the second case, the small quantity of fat that has
adhered merely to the surface has penetrated into the stone, so that it
loses its effectiveness. Added to this, in the latter case, is the fact
that the linseed oil, and the varnish prepared from it, acquire the
property of losing their fats when they are dried in the air, and thus
will take color poorly or not at all. This observation led to the
invention of an artificial stone or stone-paper.

(7) In contrast with preparation by wet wiping there is the wiping with
dry and fatty bodies, which produces full acceptance of color on the
partially prepared plate, while in the case of the fully prepared plate
there occurs at least partial color acceptance or semi-preparation. As
every property of the stone can be used for good impressions just as
well as it serves in unskilled hands to ruin a design, so in this case;
the lost parts can be restored through proper use of rubbing with a dry,
fatty substance, and the clean, prepared portions of the plate can be
smutted. There will be more about this.


V

SHORT REVIEW OF THE PRECEDING

As the entire art of stone-printing depends on proper preparation, it
will not be out of place to express my views as to the nature of the
process. This will serve also as recapitulation.

(1) Limestone has countless little pores. These can soak up fatty as
well as watery substances.

(2) These can adhere easily to the limestone particles, but are easily
separated again, as long as the nature of the stone is not altered. This
alteration is produced most readily by sulphuric acid, tartaric acid and
phosphoric acid.

(3) Water evaporates from the pores as the stone dries. Gum and other
slimy substances do not.

(4) Fats soak into the stone more and more. There is no means of
destroying them except to remove the limestone itself by grinding or
etching.

(5) Printing-color cannot adhere to the stone so long as a proper amount
of moisture forms a wall between it and the stone. Under any
circumstances it adheres only poorly to the lime particles, and assumes
great power of adherence only when the pores of the stone are filled
with fat, which are pinched in them, so to speak, and with which the
printing-color strives to unite because of mutual affinity.

(6) This stronger adherence (or complete color reception) thus happens
only when the outer color can reach and touch the inner fat. If the
latter is deep in the stone, so that the communication is broken, it
becomes difficult and the communication must be restored.

(7) This interruption occurs either if the color is rubbed away by force
and with help of moisture, or if a substance that closes the pores
unites with the stone.

(8) The rougher, sharper, and more angular the pores are, the more
readily does the color find adhering points. It adheres at first to the
surface by virtue of merely mechanical conditions. But when the moisture
which hinders a complete union and greater penetration has dried, the
color begins to penetrate deeper into the stone and to fill its pores.
The most color will always adhere to rough spots. Therefore, it happens
often, in some styles of work, that a stone too highly polished will
seem perfectly black when inked, and still fail to yield a strong
impression. For the same reason the impressions from soft stones usually
are the stronger, especially if the mode of printing demands the use of
thin printing-color.

(9) The effect of the etching fluid is in part a greater polishing of
the surface, in part a filling of pores. Both make the stone reluctant
to take color.

(10) If the stone has been prepared and polished already, it can be made
rough again and receptive to color by being reëtched. At the same time
the prepared surface can be destroyed by etching, and a communication
established with the fat lying in the interior. The result is according
to the manipulation.

So much in general. In describing the various styles I will make
everything clearer.



CHAPTER IV

THE NECESSARY TOOLS AND APPLIANCES

In lithography there is use for many various tools and utensils. I will
mention here merely those that are made primarily and exclusively for
the art.


I

CONCERNING STEEL PENS

One of the most necessary tools of lithography is the steel pen for
writing and drawing on the stone. Simple as its manufacture is in
principle, it demands much care and skill. The beauty of the work
depends largely on a good and well-cut pen. The best artist, using the
best chemical ink on a perfectly prepared plate, cannot do good work
unless the pen is good and cut to suit his hand. Therefore it is
necessary to learn how to make these pens, because, apart from their
costliness, it is difficult to get a suitable one from a worker in
steel. The ordinary steel pens that can be bought ready-made from
stationers are fairly available for coarser writing and drawing; but for
better work one must have much finer pens.

Following is the way to make them:--

Take the spring of a pocket watch, not too small nor too broad; one and
a half to two lines in breadth is best. Clean off all fat by polishing
with sand or chalk. Lay it in a glass or porcelain vessel, and cover it
with a solution of aquafortis and water in equal parts. Let the acid
etch the steel till it has lost about three fourths of its thickness,
and has become as pliable as a similar strip of letter-paper. From time
to time the steel must be removed from the fluid and dried with tissue
paper. This produces uniformity of etching. The steel rarely is quite
uniform, and it has happened to me often that it is attacked unequally
and that holes are eaten into it before it has been etched away
sufficiently. That this, however, is due mainly to the quality of the
acid, I learned because I found that the same steel would be attacked
clean and uniformly as soon as I obtained aquafortis from some other
source.

A pen is poorly etched if it has many elevated points or pits and holes.
The former appears to result from insufficient cleansing, the latter is
due to the quality of the acid.

Oil of vitriol diluted with water, or nitric acid can be used.

Those who have a very light touch may etch their pens to great thinness,
and will be enabled to do very delicate work. For a heavy touch they
must be firmer, otherwise fine strokes will look shaky.

When the steel is thin enough, it is removed and cleansed with fine sand
that it may not become rusty in future. Then it is cut into pieces two
inches long with good English shears. Now these must be shaped
half-round. To do this, lay them on a flat stone and beat them
lengthwise till they bend, using a small watchmaker's hammer, whose
faces are pretty thin but well rounded. Two or three sheets of paper
laid under the steel facilitate the work.

Another way to give it the half-round form is to file a groove into a
stone, giving it the exact shape the pen is to have. Into this groove
lay the piece of steel, put in a drop of vegetable oil, and polish with
a steel instrument whose end resembles a broken but well-rounded nail.
Use sufficient pressure, and the steel will gradually assume the desired
shape.

Either of these methods may be used, according to preference. It is to
be noted that the degree of roundness depends on the artist's need, one
finding a well-rounded pen better, another preferring one not so
well-rounded. The less the pen is rounded, the more it will resemble a
brush when used, but the points will not spread so well without
considerable pressure. The more they are hollowed, the stiffer are the
pens and the more easily will the points spread when pressed.

After the pen is curved, it must be cut. With small, well-sharpened
scissors cut a slit about one line in length into one end. Then cut away
from the two sides as much as necessary till the point is sufficiently
fine. Do not cut away too much at once, as the pen bends easily and then
must be straightened out again, which demands especial skill. It is
well to do the cutting from the point toward the sides.

A good pen must have both points very uniform, so that they touch
perfectly and lie on the stone evenly in the position given them by the
hand when working. The cutting alone will do this, but a small, very
fine whetstone may be used to aid.

A newly cut pen is somewhat rough at times and cuts into the stone, thus
gathering powder that hinders the work. This defect generally cures
itself after a few strokes on the stone. Beginners generally spoil their
pens by bending them every few moments. Then they must be straightened
out, which demands practice and judgment. It cannot be described,
because the bending may assume a thousand shapes. It may be mentioned,
however, that the points must always touch, but must under no
circumstances interfere, one being forced behind the other. It is good,
sometimes, if one can see through the slit when looking backward from
the point. Some even cut a tiny bit out of the middle for this purpose,
but that demands great skill and extremely good scissors, as otherwise
the opening will be too large, which will spoil the pen entirely.

The ordinary drawing-pens, which can be loosened or tightened with
screws, can be used very readily for drawing lines, if their points are
made from very good steel that can be ground very fine and thin.
However, for much line-work, for instance the background of a picture
which consists of lines hatched crosswise, it is better to use the other
pens. The ordinary drawing-pens are too likely to catch a little dust or
dirt between their points, and then will spoil the lines.

Of all work of the pen style in lithography, the most difficult is to
draw very fine and even lines with a ruler. I have succeeded best by
using a pen previously so cut or ground that both points touched in the
position in which I was accustomed to hold the pen when guiding it with
the ruler. It is evident that the pen must be held to the ruler on its
side, so that the groove that contains the ink does not point in the
direction of the ruler, but away from it. It is well if there is a tiny
space in the slit, as it helps the free supply of ink.


II

CONCERNING BRUSHES

Brushes are used for various purposes, as to prepare the plates,
cleanse, etch, etc. Here, however, we speak chiefly of the small brushes
required for writing and designing. For this are used the very smallest
and best miniature brushes, and they must be especially treated.

If it is desired that the brush make thicker strokes under pressure, the
ordinary condition of it, in which all the bristles come to a point, is
quite sufficient. But it is very difficult to lay on strokes of uniform
thickness with them. Press the brush on the table, spread the bristles
fanwise with a knife and cut away from each side about a half-line deep.
Turn the pencil to the other side, stroke it again to spread it, and cut
the same amount as before from each side. Continue this till there
remain only ten or twelve bristles of the original length in the brush.
Then cut these even at the ends. These should not be altogether the
middle ones if the pencil is to be first-class. Neither should they be
too far apart. They should hang together well when the brush is dipped
into the ink, but not so closely that they will not let the ink pass
well. With a brush successfully trimmed thus, the handsomest drawings,
resembling copper plate, can be done with ease.

For coarser strokes, coarser brushes are needed. More bristles are
permitted to remain in them.


III

CONCERNING ENGRAVING NEEDLES

These serve for the intaglio process, to draw into the stone, and must
be of the best and hardest steel. In Munich there are also used the
little five-angled watchmakers' borers, which are glued between two
pieces of wood planed round in form of a pencil and so cut at the end
that only a bit of the tool is visible. In using very thin needles one
has the advantage that they are ground and sharpened easily.

For coarser strokes, coarser needles are needed. For fine strokes,
especially if they are to go in all directions, the needles are best
ground perfectly round.


IV

CONCERNING THE DRAWING-MACHINE

To transfer drawings very accurately and reversed on the stone, which is
necessary especially in the case of charts and plans, a pantograph is
used in Munich, which is so arranged that the stone is upside down and
elevated. The inscribing-needle is just opposite the one that is managed
by the hand, and when one follows the lines of the original exactly,
there results a perfect but reversed copy on the stone. Such
drawing-machines can be obtained from Herr Liebherr and Company in
Munich. This skilled mechanician also makes a sort of pantograph of his
own invention, with which drawings can be transferred to stone, reversed
or otherwise, and in any desired proportion. Pictures of such machines
may be obtained from him.


V

CONCERNING OTHER APPLIANCES

These are: a grinding-table, an etching-trough, some rulers, a
writing-table, some music-writing pens and rastrums for those who wish
to print music, small brush for spatter-work, a wiping-machine for the
wiping method, several rollers and balls for inking, and some presses
for wetting and pressing the paper.

Any firm table may be used for grinding, but it is better to have one
made heavy enough to resist the strain of the powerful friction, and so
made that the stones can be fastened on it readily. If this work is done
in a room, it must have a depression in the middle and a hole, that the
water may run off into a receptacle. Along the sides should be a low
rim, that the sand and dust may not drip all over the floor.

The etching-trough is a square, well-pitched box whose bottom is
depressed toward the middle, that the etching fluid may gather there and
run through a hole into a receptacle, so that it can be poured over the
stone again. The trough must be large enough to accommodate the stones
easily. These must not, however, touch the bottom, but must rest on
little pieces of wood or cross-pieces.

Besides the ordinary rulers, a large, broad one is required, about three
to four feet long, five inches wide, and so shaped that on one side it
is one-half inch thick, on the other only two lines thick. On this
latter side a strip of pear wood must be glued and very truly planed
off. Thus it can be used for drawing lines, although the real purpose of
this ruler is only for supporting the hands when working on stone, that
they may not touch the prepared surface.

If the work-table is made with high pieces at the ends so that the ruler
can rest on them without touching the stone, no ruler supports are
required. Otherwise one must have these two pieces, a little higher than
the stone, so that the ruler may rest on them.

A specially made work-table has another advantage. In the middle there
can be a turntable on which the stone rests, so that it can be moved
easily into any position, something that is very difficult with large
stones without this arrangement.

Music-writing pens are brass or silver tubes which have the shape of
musical notes underneath, and which take up such a quantity of chemical
ink that one can make about twenty notes without re-dipping. That they
shall not take up too much ink, a fine wire is fastened in the centre.
These instruments must be very exactly ground and their use demands some
skill if the notes are to be uniform.

Instead of this instrument a piece of wood may be used, but this must be
inked anew for each note. To avoid dipping too deep, it is best to
spread some ink on a little stone and ink the instrument from this. It
must be wetted in the beginning, that the ink may be sucked up about
three lines high. After that the ink on the stone need merely be touched
with it, and this makes the work very uniform. Beginners find this easy
to use. But one works more swiftly with the other.

Of the rastrums, there is nothing to say except that they are of steel
and very even at the ends so that they touch the stone in all places.
They serve to draw the five lines for music. For making the broad
strokes for notes, one can use coarse drawing-pens, or coarsely cut
steel pens; but the best are those adjustable drawing-pens that are made
from three blades.

The brush for spatter-work, the wiping-machine, and the dauber will be
described in the description of the styles of work for which they are
used.

Ink-rollers and balls are for laying on the printing-color. The latter
are made from soft leather, stuffed with horsehair, like the ordinary
book-printer's balls. The former are wooden cylinders with thin handles,
of any requisite length and about four to five inches thick. They are
wound with two or three thicknesses of woolen cloth and then covered
very firmly and evenly with leather. Usually there is used sheep's
leather from which the grease has not been entirely removed. Calfskin,
worked white, is good and more durable. Dogskin is considered best. Some
printers use soft red calfskin, turning the inner side out. The leather
must not be stitched with linen but with silk thread, because linen does
not take the ink as well as leather and silk do. The leather must be
dampened when being drawn over the cylinder.

A fair stock of these rollers is required, because they are liable to
become water-soaked during use, when they lose much elasticity and fail
to give good service, so that dry ones must be on hand.

It is not well to have movable handles on the rollers, because then they
are likely to roll over the stone too lightly and it is not within one's
power to lay on the ink thoroughly. To prevent blistering the hands,
thick leather covers may be used. Then it is possible to use any desired
pressure.

Paper presses are needed both to obtain a uniform dampening of the paper
as also to restore the proper flatness to the printed paper. Models are
to be seen at the shops of all book-printers and binders.



CHAPTER V

CONCERNING PAPER


Three kinds of paper are used mainly in lithography. They are:--

      (_a_) the transparent, oiled or varnished paper;
      (_b_) underlay or waste paper; and
      (_c_) the printing-paper.


I

TRANSPARENT PAPER, AND THE TRANSFER OF OUTLINES TO THE STONE

Oiled paper is used for tracing a drawing accurately and then
transferring it to the stone either by transferring or by re-tracing it
on the stone. It must have the following properties:--

(1) It must not smut the original drawing on which it is laid.
Consequently it must be absolutely dry.

(2) It must be very transparent, like glass, so that the underlying
drawing or painting can be seen perfectly.

(3) The ink or lead crayon used for copying must lie on it easily and
plainly.

It is at its best if it is easy to work on it with a fine brush, using
Chinese ink, or, (if the drawing is to be transferred directly to the
stone), with the soft chemical ink described under the caption "Transfer
Ink." Generally this can be done without further preparation in the case
of most papers made transparent by oiling. Varnished paper, however,
which is far more transparent, generally must be well washed with milk
and dried again beforehand, that it may take the ink well and permit
work with the finest strokes.

(4) Finally, a good tracing-paper must be very fine, pliable, tender and
yet not in the least brittle. There is some very transparent varnished
paper, but it breaks at the first attempt to bend it, so that it is hard
to trace the drawing afterward on stone with the tracing-needle,
because nearly every stroke tears the paper and the lines and outlines
become coarse.

Very good transparent paper may be made as follows:--

Take the finest writing or vellum paper and soak it with nut or poppy
oil, mixed with a little sugar of lead to make it dry more readily. When
well soaked with oil, dry it a bit between waste paper and hang it up.
Usually it is available in a few days. This paper is cheaper than the
paper sold by stationers under the names of straw paper, etc., and about
equally transparent. Still more transparent will it be if instead of the
oil a varnish cooked from the oils is used. In this also the sugar of
lead is an excellent drier. To make the varnish easier to manipulate and
more readily penetrative for the paper, it may be thinned down with oil
of turpentine. If it is desired to manufacture a greater quantity of
this paper, one sheet is laid on another and painted with varnish. Then
the whole mass is left for some time covered with a stone plate or a
board, that the varnish may soak properly and evenly into all the
sheets. Afterward the sheets are hung up singly to dry. The more varnish
they have, the more transparent will they be; but too much is not good.
Care must be taken that no drops of varnish adhere. It is best to brush
the varnish evenly over each sheet before hanging it up.

Silk paper, such as is used in copper-printing to lay between
impressions to prevent off-set, is still better for varnishing because
it is finer. Only it must be very even and have no holes. The very
greatest fineness of paper is desirable, for the reason that then the
strokes made by the needle on the stone are fine and not coarse.

Instead of varnish made by boiling down nut or poppy oil, one can use
Venetian turpentine, which merely has been thinned down with one half as
much oil of turpentine. Such paper generally is dry enough after
twenty-four hours. Too large a quantity must not be made at one time,
because it becomes tough and brittle after a while.

Even with the most transparent paper it occurs that certain delicate
drawings, and especially color pictures, will not show through
sufficiently. Then the drawing must be fastened to a window pane to
obtain added illumination. This manner of work is very uncomfortable,
however, and the arms hurt one soon, so that it is necessary to stop. It
is better to have a tracing-board made with a strong, clear pane of
glass in the centre. Under it is a mirror so adjusted that it reflects
light upward through the drawing.

It is understood, of course, that in tracing only the outlines are
copied and not every stroke of shading, etc. Although the final work is
greatly facilitated by the observation of the utmost care in tracing,
the tracing of every little detail will merely make the work involved
and perplexing. Practice must show the proper degree of exactness. A
very good and skillful artist often needs only a few main outlines, to
reproduce the original picture with the greatest accuracy.

Once the drawing has been traced sufficiently, the transfer paper must
be coated very lightly and evenly with red chalk. Then it is fastened to
the stone with wax and all the lines are traced under moderate pressure
with a well-polished needle whose point is not sharp but rounded. Where
the needle presses the tracing-paper, the color that is on the other
side will take hold of the stone and thus transfer the drawing to it. If
the needle is too sharp, it will injure the paper, and often the stone
and the etching surface. The color on the paper must be rubbed off very
carefully with a soft rag. If it is too thick, it will transfer itself
coarsely to the stone. The red chalk may be put on the side of the paper
that has the drawing on it, or on the reverse. This is decided according
as the picture is to be on the stone in the same position as the
original or reversed. If the impression is to be like the original, the
drawing on the stone must be reversed; therefore in that case the
tracing-paper is coated on the same side as the drawing. This side is
laid on the stone, and the picture, which shows through, is traced.

In some cases it is good to transfer the drawing from the tracing
immediately to the stone without tracing it with the needle. In this
case, the paper is not coated with red chalk. The paper is merely laid
on the prepared stone, drawing face down, and put through the press. If
the drawing has been made with the chemical transfer ink, blackened with
lampblack or colored with vermilion according to need, it will transfer
itself to the stone. This will occur also in the case of a clean stone
prepared for pen drawing if the drawing is made with lead pencil or with
red chalk, wet or dry. Even the ordinary ink made from nutgall and
vitriol of iron will transfer if it contains a little sugar or gum, but
the paper must be well dampened and good pressure must be applied to the
press.

In the pen-drawing process, the stone must be cleansed of possible
surplus of color after the transfer. This is done by light rubbing with
sand. It is not necessary in other processes. Any surplus of color that
may have fixed itself to the stone is removed by gentle dusting with a
soft brush.


II

WASTE PAPER

This is used partly for cleansing plates, partly and chiefly as underlay
in printing.

If sheets are to be printed on both sides, usually a little of the first
impression off-sets on the underlay paper, and if it were used again at
once, it would off-set on the next impression. Therefore a fresh
underlay paper must be used for each impression of the second side.

This must not be coarse, for fear of causing unevenness or holes in the
leather in the printing-frame or in the so-called scraper-wood that
makes the impression. A good quantity of this must be on hand, that
fresh paper may always be available while the used paper is drying
again. Each sheet that has been used should be hung up at once, and not
more than three or four sheets should be hung over each other, to
facilitate the drying. A special appliance is needed for this as well as
for drying the impressions. A number of slats are fastened to the
ceiling, leaving a space under it of about two feet, and about one foot
distant from each other; and the sheets are hung on these with a pole
made for the purpose, such as may be seen in any printery.


III

PRINTING-PAPER

Not all kinds of paper are equally good for lithography. On the whole,
however, it may be assumed that this form of printing is very similar to
copper-printing and book-printing, and that the paper that is good for
these branches is suitable also for the stone, if only it does not
contain too many impurities, grains of sand and other substances that
make any considerable roughnesses. Such roughnesses, if considerable,
have an ill effect not only on the impression, but chiefly on the
leather in the printing frame. If the scraper is of wood, the leather
will suffer less, but there will be caused grooves in the scraper that
must be planed out again, because otherwise each following impression
will show a more or less plain streak. If the scraper is of metal, the
leather may tear or the stone itself may be injured if the foreign
substance in the paper is very hard. Therefore it is well to hold the
paper to the light before dampening or printing and to remove any
apparent defect of magnitude with a little knife.

Usually the paper considered most excellent for copper-plate work is
thick, tender, uniform paper, half-sized or not sized at all. It may be
the same for lithography. However, it must not be supposed that good
impressions cannot be obtained with sized paper. I have seen some that
were as good as, and even better than, impressions made at the same time
on unsized paper. Much depends on the dampening of the paper, on its
make, and chiefly on the manner of sizing it. On the best sized English
vellum paper, I have made blacker impressions than I could make on the
best Swiss copper-plate printing-paper, so that I had to use fifty per
cent less printing-color. On the contrary, in using an indubitably
genuine English vellum paper with a bluish tinge, which had been sized
only too well, I could not get good impressions despite all efforts. It
was very hard to dampen also. Every sheet must be dampened singly,
turned frequently and manipulated to smooth out the thousand
irregularities that are caused by the moisture. Equally difficult to use
were some sorts of genuine Holland paper, because they took color
reluctantly. If, however, the correct degree of moisture is attained,
if the paper takes it well, and, finally, if the color is right for it,
it can be used with thorough success.

I must mention a circumstance that may defeat all efforts of a beginner
should he try to use a certain kind of paper which is very handsome,
durable, very white, well sized, but a little rough and possessing an
odor somewhat resembling honey as well as urine. Sometimes it is called
_Kühnel_, and comes from a French factory. This paper has the property
of depriving the stone of its preparation, and consequently to smut it.
This paper can be used only for dry printing, where it does not require
any dampening at all.

It is said that this property of smutting the stone is due to the
chemical bleaching. Others ascribe it to a peculiar kind of size.
Perhaps it is both. The same defect is found in many sorts of colored
papers if there is much alum in the coloring-matter, or if the tints are
made from alkaline colors or those that contain soapy matter, or if it
has been smoothed with soap. This, however, is readily understood after
my explanation of the chemistry of the stone.


IV

DAMPENING THE PAPER

Dry paper may be used for printing. In certain work it is necessary, in
order not to spoil the paper. As a rule, however, paper is moistened in
lithography as well as in other forms of printing, to make it softer and
more receptive to the printing-color.

After what I have said of chemical printing, it would seem that, as
dampness is antagonistic to the reception of color, the moisture of the
paper would hinder, rather than aid, printing. But experience proves the
opposite. A damp paper takes color better than a dry one.

But this is not because damp paper is an exception to the rule. On close
study, we see that here, too, it only proves all that I said about the
stone.

Perfectly clean, and especially unsized paper, refuses color like the
prepared stone, when it has been wetted thoroughly so that it is
saturated. But here, too, mere water is not a complete preparation.
Under strong pressure it is forced away readily from the paper, the
printed places are dried and the color adheres. If the pressure is not
sufficient to force all the water away, the impression will be
imperfect. The tougher the printing-color is, the more will it resist
the dampness and the greater must be the pressure.

Experience has taught me the following:--

(1) Every paper not spoiled with fat will permit itself to be prepared,
like the stone, with water so that it will take no color. In the case of
entirely clean, unsized paper, water alone is sufficient. Mucous, gummy,
and acid substances increase its power. Unsized printed paper need
merely be dipped in water, laid on a stone, and coated with oily color,
and the printed parts will all take the color while the rest of the
paper remains white.

(2) Any great pressure will remove this preparation and the whole paper
will take color.

(3) The oil color must be very thin and fluid, because a tougher one
will take hold of the fibres of the paper and tear them off.

The foregoing experiences applied to the theory of the print itself lead
to the following conclusions:--

(_a_) The paper to be used for printing must never be too wet, because
the most powerful pressure could not remove the water sufficiently.

(_b_) Paper that is too wet is prone to adhere to the stone with its
printed parts, which are likely then to tear away easily, thus damaging
or ruining the work. This happens the more readily if the pressure be
not sufficient. If the scraper or the stone is not uniform and even, it
is very prone indeed to tear at the places subjected to the least
pressure, because there, where the water has not been sufficiently
squeezed away, the paper remains soft and fragile, while the pressure
still is great enough to grip the fibres of the paper.

(_c_) Therefore the paper must be only slightly dampened if the color is
very tough, partly to prevent tearing, partly to oppose no undue
obstacle to the reception of the color.

(_d_) Paper dampened too much stretches in printing and produces uneven
and dirty impressions.

(_e_) The quality of the water is not important so long as it is not
dirty or putrid, in which latter case it may infect the paper and rot
it.

(_f_) Just how much the paper must be dampened can be learned only from
experience, because papers vary very much and in the case of sized
papers it depends chiefly on the kind of sizing. On the average, we may
calculate one wet sheet to eight dry ones in sized papers and one wet
one to ten or twelve dry ones in unsized papers.

The following is the best way to dampen paper: Lay two or three dry
sheets on a straight board. Then dip a sheet into water. Let the water
drip off a little and lay the damp sheet carefully on the others. Now
lay eight or ten dry sheets on top of this. Then put on another wet one
and then eight or ten dry ones and so on till all the sheets destined
for printing have been so piled up. Put over all a board weighted with a
medium heavy stone plate. After half an hour increase the weight to
several hundredweight or squeeze the paper in a press. Leave it thus at
least twelve hours. Then it is generally ready for print. In aquatint it
must be dampened more, about six dry sheets coming to one wet one.

Very thoroughly sized paper is easier to moisten if each sheet, or at
least each second one, is wetted with a sponge.

Sometimes it is necessary to turn the dampened paper in order to remove
the creases. Separate the sheets into two piles and lay a few sheets
from one to the other so that the altered positions will press the
sheets flat again.

With many papers, especially the unsized, it is possible to use the
method of book-printers, who immerse a whole book in water and then lay
the sheets in two equal parts. This would be best studied at a
printer's. It requires much practice.

If dampened paper is permitted to lie some hours without being weighted
down, the margins will become too dry, and then there will be creases
during printing, which can be remedied only by a second dampening. The
reason is that dry paper is not so large as wet paper, so that the dry
margins form a kind of frame which is too small for the inner wet
portion.

In printing-processes that require many plates, and especially if the
sheets are large, only dry paper can be used, as otherwise the register
will be imperfect. To be sure, it can be done by using great care, but
too much practice and attentiveness is needed.

With the exception of the aquatint processes, good printing can be done
with dry but unsized paper. But the press must have twice or thrice the
pressure. This makes the printing more difficult and endangers the stone
if it is not thick.



CHAPTER VI

PRESSES


An exact description of all presses used hitherto for lithography would
demand a book that would nearly equal the present one in magnitude. Many
drawings would be necessary, which would increase the cost of this
text-book without adequate benefit, as I have learned that one rarely
can find a mechanician skillful enough to make a machine even when he
has the very best description and a perfect illustration before him. I
advise all who intend to enter lithography to send for a model to Munich
or some other place where the art is being practiced with success. I
myself am willing to furnish exact models for the price of one louis
d'or, which must be remitted with the order.

There is no press as yet that is so perfect for lithography that it
leaves nothing to be desired. The press whose plan I laid before the
Royal Academy of Sciences in Bavaria, which does its own inking-in and
which can be worked by water-power, has not yet been built on a large
scale, so that its value cannot be stated exactly.

I am only too well aware, however, of a grave defect in lithography,
which is that the beauty and even the number of impressions depend
mainly on the skill and the industry of the printers. A good press is
necessary, to be sure; but even with the best a poor workman will
produce nothing but trash, because in this respect lithography is far
more difficult than any other printing-process. I shall not admit that
lithography has made a great step toward the utmost perfection until the
erring work of the human hand has been dispensed with as much as
possible and the printing is done almost entirely by machinery.
Therefore I am determined to realize the ideas I have in this direction
and I shall inform the friends of the art of my success at once.


I

PROPERTIES OF A GOOD PRESS

It has been observed that inscriptions, and particularly drawings, look
better on the stone than on the impression afterward made from the
stone. Partly this may be due to the color of the stone which softens
the picture, because an impression made on yellow paper resembling the
stone color looks very much like the drawing on the stone. But the great
cause of the difference is that the color does not transfer itself to
the paper with the degree of strength and clearness that it possesses on
the stone. That this perfect degree can be attained, none the less,
there are many successful impressions to prove.

If the plate is well designed and well prepared, it will take the color
well and clearly, but the printer may apply too much or too little, the
color may be too hard or too soft, or, even if the stone is properly
inked, the paper may accept color poorly or be too damp or dry. Chiefly,
however, it is the press, according to my experience, that most affects
the quality of an impression.

In most lithographic presses the printing is done by the so-called
scraper. This is a thin slat of hard wood, mostly maple, pear, or
boxwood. It is one line thick on the side intended to do the printing,
and the mechanism of the press forces it on the paper, which is on the
stone and covered with an overlay of waste paper and tensely stretched
leather. This pressure forces the color against the paper along the
whole length of the slat, and only one line broad. The scraper is forced
bit by bit over the entire plate, or it remains motionless and the plate
is drawn underneath it.

It will be observed that this kind of press does not produce the entire
impression vertically and at once as in book-printing, but that it is
successive, as in copper-plate printing, with the difference that the
copper-plate press uses a roller instead of a scraper.

As the scraper must be pressed down with great force (often as much as
sixty and more hundredweight) and must pass over the leather with this
immense pressure, there is a tremendous friction, and despite the fact
that the leather is tensely stretched and lubricated with fat, it is
considerably pulled and strained by the scraper. This pulling and
straining communicates itself to the paper under the leather. Thus all
the lines of the design become a little bit squashed in the direction
described by the scraper. If, however, the leather is very good and very
tensely stretched in the frame, if it is well lubricated, and if the
printing-paper with its underlay is not too wet, the pulling is
inconsiderable so that scripts and drawings in broad effects are not
affected noticeably. Drawings in detail, however, and crayon work
wherein there is hardly a perceptible space between the dots, are so
affected by the slightest displacement that they produce a smeared,
sooty impression.

The scraper has a second fault. If the paper has impurities, it injures
the scraper readily. A groove scratched into the scraper will prevent
any further good impression if the injury is considerable, because it
will leave a streak. The only remedy is to take the scraper off and
plane it, fashioning it accurately to the surface of the stone. I have
tried to remedy this by making a scraper of metal. As this causes even
more friction than wood, I laid a strip of strong paper over the
scraper, which generally was good for three hundred impressions before
it was worn out. Then I merely needed to move it forward a bit; so that
a strip of paper as long as the scraper and six inches wide was
available for some thousands of impressions. The pressure attained with
a metal scraper is greater than with wood; but it has the disadvantage
that it is hard to print a stone whose surface is not absolutely level,
whereas a wooden scraper can be planed to suit any irregularity in the
stone.

The foregoing shows that a good lithographic press must have these two
properties:--

(1) It must not pull or shift the paper in the least.

(2) It must produce a uniform impression without weak spots or streaks.

The other properties it needs in common with other presses, such as:--

(3) It must be powerful enough to produce the necessary pressure.

(4) It must combine the greatest possible speed with this power.

(5) It must be easily operated, to save the workman.

All these qualities combined are not to be found in any press hitherto
applied to lithography.


II

APPLICATION OF BOOK- AND COPPER-PLATE PRESSES TO LITHOGRAPHY

If we consider the peculiarities of book and copper print, we find a
decided difference between them that affects printing importantly.

The letters of book-type are raised, the engraving in copper is
depressed. It is evident that the former requires no such power for
making impressions as the latter. Therefore the presses are so different
that copper plates cannot be printed on a book-press and vice versa.
Now, as the stone combines both the elevated and the depressed
principles, the natural idea would be to combine the fundamental
principles of both presses as nearly as possible for stone-printing. In
book-print, only the types are exposed to the pressure, and in the
average printed sheet these are only one fourth part of the entire
surface. The remaining white space is not affected at all by the press.
In the stone, however, the elevation of any part of a design is so
slight that the entire surface is affected, and consequently a stone
plate offers four times as much resistance. A book-press therefore would
print a stone only if it were arranged for a pressure four times
greater. Now, for a stone of the size of a letter-sheet the power
required to print with one vertical pressure would be five or six
hundred hundredweight, a pressure that could be supported only by a
thick stone laid very exactly on a perfect foundation.

An ordinary copper-plate press increases the pulling of the paper so
much in the case of a stone plate that the impression would be
worthless. This pulling is not caused, as in the case of the scraper,
during the impression itself, as already described, but it is caused
before the impression through the endeavor of the cylinder to force the
plate along under it. Once the stone is under the cylinder, the paper is
not pulled noticeably, because the cylinder glides over the leather much
more gently and with much less friction than the scraper.

This defect might be corrected:--

(_a_) By supporting the cylinder so that it would come down on the stone
only at the point where the print is to begin. But as the stone must be
drawn pretty well forward for convenience in inking, this would demand
that the cylinder be revolved forward and backward again as far as is
needed for the impression, which means a great demand on the strength of
the printers, not to count the loss of time.

(_b_) A second way would be to plane off a piece two inches wide from
the cylinder at the point where the impression is to begin. The stone
could be forced under this space readily, and when the cylinder
revolves, it presses forcibly at once without pulling the paper very
much.

(_c_) The press might be fitted with iron wheels with cog teeth to
engage similar cogs on the cylinder. This would prevent pulling, but the
mechanical work would need to be very accurate.

(_d_) The best arrangement will be the following: Set the upper cylinder
so high that the stone can be brought under it without touching. Then
bring it down with a screw, or better still, with a lever that can be
operated by the foot.

The first figure in the plate showing presses represents about how a
copper-plate press is to be fitted for this work. On the whole, this is
an ordinary copper-plate press, but the upper roller is set with its two
axles or spindles in two iron levers, each of which is fastened to a
piece of wood with iron screws one inch thick. Each of these pieces of
wood is covered with strong sheet iron and can be adjusted higher or
lower with two screws or with underlay of pasteboard. This is necessary
that the press may be adjusted to varying pressures. The two other ends
of the two levers, in which the cylinder sits, can be raised or
lowered, so that the cylinder also can rise or sink. Now two springs or
two weights are so adjusted that the cylinder with the levers always
remains elevated. To force it down on the stone, an iron beam enters
both sides of the press with two pegs so adjusted that when the beam is
turned ninety degrees the levers are depressed at least two inches. As
the cylinder is about in the middle of the two levers, it will thus be
depressed one inch, which suffices to permit the stone to pass under it
freely while it is elevated and gives the greatest pressure when it is
depressed. However, the upper cylinder must not be one inch distant from
the stone, but at the most only one fourth inch, for the remaining space
of three fourths inch is required to provide margin for the elasticity
of the various materials, and also to give margin for increased pressure
whenever demanded.

On one end of the iron beam with the two pegs is an arm or lever which
is joined to a thin stick with a treadle. This tread is so arranged that
it remains elevated of itself. If the pressure is to reach sixty or more
hundredweight, it must not be fastened directly to the treadle, but a
second lever is required which is affixed to the side of the press.

Without going into tedious detail I cannot further describe this press.
Mechanicians will understand me readily and perhaps be able to add many
improvements. My belief is that a copper press so arranged would
diminish all danger of squashing and pulling the impression, furnish
powerful pressure, permit overlays of felt or fine cloth, and make
possible considerable facility and celerity, which is a great advantage,
because impressions always are better if too much time is not lost
between inking and printing.

To safeguard the stone against cracking in such a press, the following
points are to be noted:--

(1) The stone must be ground very true on the under side as well as the
upper.

(2) Both cylinders must be perfectly true, and care is to be taken
particularly that one cylinder is not thin toward the middle and the
other thick, as this would easily crack the stone lengthwise.

The board on which the stone rests must be equally true and uniformly
thick. At the same time it must be very thin, only one half inch thick
at most. It will get very heavily squeezed during the printing, and the
more the impression approaches the centre, the more concave will it
become. The parts farthest from the point of pressure then resist unduly
if the board is thick, and thus become the chief cause of cracking the
stone. If the rollers are very true and the stone is very uniform, it is
almost impossible to crack it if it is passed between the two rollers
without a board underneath. If the board is thin, it is as if it were
not there.

I believe that competent mechanicians can improve the present presses
greatly.


III

LITHOGRAPHIC PRESSES USED HITHERTO

Most owners of lithographic printeries have tried their hands at
inventing presses, but in the end it has always been something based on
the scraper or the cylinder principle. I myself have made more than
twenty designs. Some were very useful and had advantages either in power
or convenience, but generally were handicapped by some defect, so that I
cannot even say with certainty which was the best of them all. So much
depends on the mechanic's execution of one's plans, and a perfect design
can be so spoiled by a workman that it is worthless.

I will, however, recount the best that has been done so far for
lithography.

In Munich two kinds of stone presses are mostly used. They are:--

(1) The lever press, or, as the workmen generally call it because of its
form, the Gallows Press.

(2) The Cylinder or so-called Star Press, the latter term being used
because a star-shaped lever is commonly used instead of a crank to turn
the rollers.

I have tried and found good the following:--

(3) A press with double levers.

(4) A gyrating or sliding press.

I know also--

(5) The roller press used by Herr Andre.

(6) And the press of Herr Steiner in Vienna.

Herr Müller in Karlsruhe and Herr Ackermann in London have a press with
paper cylinders the construction of which is unknown to me.


IV

THE LEVER PRESS

This was the first press that I used with advantage, and it is used
still in Munich in all important establishments for work that demands
speed particularly. It would be an excellent printing-machine in all
respects if it did not have the defect that its power cannot be
increased much more than six hundredweight without forcing the workmen
to undue exertions. Therefore it is no longer available for large plates
or for works that require immense power. It is very good for pen designs
not larger than a letter-sheet, and two workmen, one to ink-in and the
other to print, can produce twelve hundred impressions in a day without
hardship.

The pressure is produced by a lever six to twelve feet long, fastened to
the scraper below and to a spring (an elastic board) above. It is
connected with a tread, and when forced down, presses with the desired
force on the scraper and so on the plate. The board holding the lever
overhead must be partially movable like a spring because the lever
describes a part of a circle on the plate below. Hence the pressure at
the beginning and end of the impression is not so great as in the
middle, and great care in choice of wood and manufacture is demanded to
give the spring board the necessary elasticity and power combined. I
have found a board of young dried pine the best, the dimensions being
six feet long, eight inches wide, and two inches thick, provided that
the fibres all ran lengthwise. It is not always possible to find a good
board at once. Often I have found that the difference between two boards
made a great difference in the effectiveness of two presses otherwise
exactly the same.

The scraper arm consists of two parts, of which the shorter one, to
which the scraper is fastened with a screw, is only one and one quarter
feet long. The other part is as long as the height of the press permits.
The higher a lever press is, the better is it, because then the circular
motion described by the scraper wood approaches a straight line more and
more, so that the press exercises a more uniform pressure during all
stages of the impression and is easier to handle. The second
illustration shows this kind of press in the moment when the impression
has been finished, the printing-frame opened, and the scraper arm swung
back again.

The printing-frame is much like a book-printing frame, and is furnished
inside with a second small frame which holds the paper, being furnished
with small springs or strings. When the frame has been turned over the
stone, the paper must be at least half an inch from the stone to avoid
smutting, which will occur if it touches. The paper must not touch the
stone till pressure is applied, and then only on the spot pressed
downward by the scraper.

As soon as both parts of the scraper arm are in a straight line, so that
they form practically one piece, the scraper wood is pulled down and the
printer draws it toward himself over the printing-frame and the stone
plate. At this time the following is to be observed:--

(1) Both parts of the arm must be so fastened to each other that they
may be bent like a knee, but once they are straight in line, they must
stay in that position. It is well, therefore, so to adjust the parts
that they will not be directly over each other, but rather exceed a
straight line under pressure, and bend a little inward. The position of
the scraper must be considered also. On the whole the following rule
holds good: the point where both parts are united with a nail or a screw
must not be in a perfectly straight line between the point where the
scraper rests and the point where the arm is fastened above, but should
be at least two and a half inches forward of that point. Otherwise the
arm may spring outwards toward the workman and injure him severely. The
third illustration shows the construction of the scraper arm and the
scraper.

(2) The arm must be grasped as low as possible when being drawn toward
one's self, in order to diminish the danger of springing outward.

(3) The workman must press his body tightly to the table of the press to
get proper leverage. Standing free, a man of moderate strength could not
move the scraper at all when the pressure is on, but a man standing in
correct position can do it without difficulty.

(4) Under very heavy pressure the inker-in, who stands on the other side
of the press, can help by pushing.

The scraper is a piece of pear wood as long as the size of the plate
demands. Its height is about four inches, its thickness one inch. The
end that rests on the leather is trimmed down so that it has a thickness
of only one line. This end must be especially true and planed to fit the
stone, also neatly rounded off. It should be so fastened to the arm that
it may be adjusted to the position of the stone. The stone does not
always lie truly horizontal in the press, sometimes because it is not
uniformly thick, sometimes because the underlay is not quite even, and
sometimes because the press itself has been a little strained. If the
scraper has been made properly, it will adjust itself to the stone, even
if the scraper arm is not quite plumb on the stone, a condition that
often occurs with small work, such as titles and other things that are
at the end of a stone.

(5) For every press a number of scrapers of different dimensions must be
in stock. Generally a lever press is so made that the printing-frame can
be raised or lowered according to the thickness of the stone. Then the
scraper must be changed accordingly.

(6) The connection of the upper board with the tread is made by a thin
stick that is fastened to a lever below, by means of a small iron piece
which contains several holes that serve to adjust the height of the
tread according to need.

(7) The leather in the printing-frame is strong calfskin. It must be
stretched very evenly and tensely and must be smeared from time to time
very thoroughly with tallow.

(8) On the outer side of the frame there are four wooden strips that can
be adjusted as desired. One serves to show the point where the
impression is to begin. Another shows where it is to end. Both must be
so strong that they can resist the scraper. The other two are adjusted
at the sides and guide the scraper.


V

THE CYLINDER PRESSES

When Herr Professor Mitterer installed a lithographic institution for
the Feyertags-Schule, the lever press appeared to him to demand too much
labor, especially when powerful pressures were desired. He invented the
so-called Cylinder or Star Press, which has its place in most
establishments, especially those in other countries. It has had minor
changes made in it by many persons, but on the whole, nobody has
succeeded in improving it notably, except for a considerable improvement
made by Herr Mitterer himself. My description will include this
improvement.

The cylinder press might almost be called a reversed lever press. Herr
Mitterer borrowed from it the idea of effecting the impression with a
scraper, but he did not let it move over the plate, as in the lever
press. He gave the scraper a fixed, immovable position while the stone
was drawn through underneath, thus making his press resemble a
copper-plate printing-press somewhat.

Illustration number 4 shows this machine in the moment when the
impression has been made. In the middle of the machine is a cylinder ten
to twelve inches thick and as long as the breadth of the press. It has
strong iron spindles that revolve in well-lubricated brass bearings.
Above the cylinder is a board on which is fastened the stone with the
printing-frame. The scraper is on a strong lever that is held up by a
counterpoise. When everything is ready for printing, the scraper is
forced down. By means of a strong iron hook it engages the treadle and
thus can be pulled down with the utmost tension. Then the cylinder is
turned by means of two levers affixed to the crank, and this draws the
stone and printing-frame through under the scraper. One workman alone
can do this under ordinary pressure, but an appliance at the other end
of the press enables a second workman to help.


VI

GYRATING SCRAPER AND DOUBLE LEVER PRESSES

I have already mentioned the gyrating scraper press. I have improved it
considerably. It has the form of the ordinary lever press, but all the
parts can be much lighter. For instance, the lever is only one and a
half inches thick. The spring (the elastic board) is very elastic and
need exert a pressure of only one hundred pounds. The little scraper is
only an inch long and presses on the plate with a force of fifty pounds.
The press is useful for very thin stones that might crack under greater
pressure. The pressure, nevertheless, is great, because it is all
exerted on such a small area. The press has two defects. It is easy to
miss many parts of the design with the small scraper, and the paper is
likely to stick to the leather, producing poor register. I have obviated
these faults with the following invention: A large scraper is fastened
to the lever to press on the plate with a force of one hundred pounds. A
small one is fastened to this in such a manner that it can be moved to
and fro easily. While one workman rubs to and fro with the small
scraper, another draws the entire stone and printing-frame slowly along
under the large one. If good underlays are used in addition, this
process will produce beautiful work that cannot be produced so well with
any other machine. However, a large field is left in this form for
improvement.

The fact that the concentric motion produced by a single lever can be
transformed into an almost straight motion by use of a second lever, led
me to design a double lever press, which has turned out very successful,
giving great force with speed. As its description would demand much
space, and since on the whole it ranks equally with the improved
cylinder press, I offer to send models to those who desire to have
everything useful for the art.


VII

THE OTHER STONE PRINTING-PRESSES

The cylinder press of the Chemical Printery in Vienna would, without
question, be of excellent service for the art if it were more powerful.
Its construction is as follows: The stone is fastened to a table with
the printing-frame which has fine felt instead of leather. To make the
impression a brass cylinder eight inches thick is rolled over it. As
this cylinder would not produce enough pressure from itself, despite its
massive make, two iron beams are fastened to the axles. They pass
through the table and are fastened to a box that contains iron or leaden
weights. Unfortunately the space prevents the use of more than five or
six hundredweights, and this is too little for the large surface of the
cylinder, thus forbidding any sharp, clear impressions.

This kind of press could be greatly improved if it were built higher to
give more room below for weights, or the beams could be lengthened and
passed through the floor into a lower room, thus giving space enough to
add weights up to fifty and more hundredweight.

The press of Herr Andre is much like this, except that its cylinder is
only three inches in diameter and that it is forced on the stone not
with weights, but with a lower cylinder that presses upwards. It prints
fast, like the other, but does not possess enough power.

In conclusion, I must remark that the concentration of ideas caused by
writing this chapter has led me to begin experiments toward making a
lithographic press which shall leave nothing to be desired. As soon as
my affairs permit, I shall execute this on a large scale, and if the
result fulfills my hopes, it will be a pleasure to describe it
accurately to all friends of my art, or to furnish them models at cost.



PART II

CONCERNING THE VARIOUS METHODS


There are two principal methods of stone-printing, Relief and Intaglio.

In the former, the fatty parts of the stone are not attacked by the
etching fluid, while the rest of the stone is dissolved more or less.
Therefore the fatty places are left in relief.

In the second method, the design is either engraved into the stone with
a sharp steel instrument or etched-in with acid.

The relief method has the advantage of greater speed and, generally, a
greater number of impressions. It is easy for the artist to apply,
especially in crayon work. The intaglio, however, makes possible finer
and more powerful work, and again, in many cases, is the easier of the
two for the artist. Therefore it is impossible to say in a general way
which is the better. It depends on the work to be done.



CHAPTER I

RELIEF METHOD


To this method belong principally: (_a_) Brush and pen designs; (_b_)
the crayon method; (_c_) the transfer method; (_d_) the wood-cut method;
(_e_) a sort of scraped style; and (_f_) spatter-work.


I

BRUSH AND PEN WORK

This is one of the best in lithography, and perhaps the best, because it
touches daily needs most directly. It can be used not only for all
kinds of writings, but also for illustration that does not demand the
supreme perfection of copper plate. The ease of manipulation, the speed
and the almost countless number of impressions recommend it especially.
It may even be prophesied that in future, when true artists have become
better acquainted with it, it will be used for high forms of art.

Much as this method has to recommend it, it has been used mainly for
script and music, and it is difficult to gain adherents and followers
for it. The reason is an apparently trivial thing, but it has made most
artists averse to it. Since stone-printing exists I have found only two
persons who could do anything with the steel pen at the first attempt.
These were my brother Klemens, and a Herr Porner, who works now in the
establishment of Herr Müller in Karlsruhe. All others have had to
struggle more or less with this slight trouble, and yet it does not
demand more than a few days of patience and study.

For pen work one must not be too particular in selecting stones, as the
less perfect ones are more available for this than for any other method.
However, the general rule holds good here, too, that the purest and
hardest stones are best.

If they have been used previously, so that the fatty inks have
penetrated pretty well, they still need not be ground too deeply, but it
will suffice to grind them merely till all depressions and elevations of
the previous design have vanished. They may be ground with sand or
pumice, so long as they are made smooth so that no roughness can be
perceived. The smoother and finer the surface is, the easier will it be
to work on it with the pen.

To design well on stone with chemical ink, the stone must be prepared
after grinding so that the ink shall not flow and spread. Dissolve one
part of tallow in three parts of oil of turpentine and coat the dry
stone very quickly. With a clean rag or tissue paper wipe it at once so
thoroughly that the coating vanishes again almost entirely, leaving only
a thin film that can be easily devoured and removed when the etching
fluid is applied later. It is well to do this some hours before
beginning work on the stone, partly to give the turpentine odor time to
evaporate and partly because it is easier to work after a little while
than immediately after coating the stone. The stone can be prepared far
in advance, even so long as some months before using. In that case it is
necessary merely to clean the dust away with a cloth or fine brush. This
should be done anyway at intervals during the work, or it will clog the
pen.

I prefer another way of preparing the stone for designing, because
it is one that insures the stone against containing any hidden
preparation, which can easily occur in grinding owing to carelessness or
uncleanliness on the part of the workman, especially if many old plates
are being reground, when the gum which most of them contain from
previous use will mix with water during grinding and thus form a partial
preparation of the stone.

I coat the plate with strong soap-water containing many soapy particles,
and dry it off as well as possible. Now, there will be too much alkali
on the plate, which will not be good for fine work. I pour a few drops
of clean water on the stone, make it quite wet with this and dry it
again thoroughly. The fat of the soap will then have precipitated itself
on the stone and at the same time has lost all alkali. The soap-water
must not be too thin, as in that case it will precipitate too much fat
on the plate at once and the etching fluid will not be able later to
destroy it properly. This would mean the total destruction of the
design. To make quite sure, I advise beginners, after applying
soap-water and drying it, to coat the stone with the tallow and
turpentine solution, clean it quickly, and thus be absolutely assured
that the plate is thoroughly prepared for the design.

It must not be imagined that this preparation for work is not very
important. I am convinced that less depends on the quality of the ink
than on a surface freed from all acid and mucous substances and provided
with a sufficient amount of fat.

On the stone thus prepared the rough design may be done with lead crayon
or red chalk or by tracings or transfers. Any surplus of lead or red
chalk would make trouble during the succeeding completion of the design
with chemical ink, and must be removed carefully. If the design has
been laid on by transfer, the resultant fattiness must be lightly rubbed
away with a fine sand, but not so as to injure the design.

This method, of first drafting the design on paper with soft chemical
transfer ink and then transferring to stone, offers such advantages that
it pays to practice it. Care must be taken to remove all surplus of
color, as otherwise all lines that should not appear will resist the
etching fluid and gradually show again. Those who fear destruction of
the design by the use of sand can effect the same purpose by printing
off on clean waste paper a few times, or the design may be printed off
on paper before being transferred, thus cleansing it of surplus fat.

When the design has been laid on the stone clean and strongly with
chemical ink, the plate can be etched and prepared, but not till the
whole design is perfectly dry, because otherwise it cannot resist the
action of the fluid.

The parts finished first usually are dry long before the entire work is
finished. A trained eye can recognize the proper degree of dryness from
the sheen, which varies with different kinds of ink, but on the whole is
always duller when the design is dry than while it still is wet. It is
highly necessary that the design be thoroughly dry. It is possible to
keep a designed plate for years without etching it, so long as it is
protected against injury.

Etching is done in two ways, painting the fluid on and pouring it on.

The former method is less circumstantial, but is used only in coarser
work, because there is always danger of damaging delicate parts of the
design. It has the advantage, however, that any dirt caused by
corrections will be removed. A mixture of three or four parts of water
with one part of aquafortis is painted over the stone with a soft brush
of fox- or badger-hair. The brush must be dipped continually because the
fluid loses its power.

For the second method the stone is placed in a large wooden trough or
box, provided with cross-pieces to keep the stone from the bottom. The
acid, thinned down with thirty or forty parts of water, is poured over
it. It is rather immaterial how much one may dilute the acid. Very weak
solutions simply mean that the pouring must be repeated oftener. The
fluid acts on stones according to their degree of hardness. Regard must
be had, too, to the delicacy of the design, very fine lines being unable
to resist etching that does not affect coarse lines.

Only slight experience is needed to recognize the effect of the acid. By
looking at the stone sidewise and against the light, the growing
elevation of the design can be perceived easily. When the fatty coating
caused by the soap or turpentine wash has been etched away completely,
and the water adheres equally everywhere, the stone generally is
sufficiently etched to be ready for preparation and printing.

For the sake of easier printing, and also so that future grinding and
any desired improvement may be done on the stone, there should be a
little more etching, if the design is not too delicate. But if the
design is very fine, the etching absolutely must not be more than
strictly necessary, because the fine lines might easily be eaten away.
Coarser designs can bear strong etching which often may reach the depth
of a thick paper. But an inordinate amount of etching is not to be
recommended, even if the design can bear it, because the edges of a
deeply etched line are rough and take the color so strongly that it
works into the cavities and is very hard to get out.

When the stone has been properly etched, clean water is poured over it
to wash away the free acid. Then the work of preparing the plate with a
solution of gum arabic in four or five parts of water can begin at once,
or the stone may be set aside to dry, thus giving the finer parts of the
design, that may have been most affected by the acid, time to adhere
again to the stone and soak in, which can occur only in the dry state.
This is entirely unnecessary with most pen drawings, but with brush and
especially with crayon work it is of great value.

When the stone has been prepared with gum, it is set aside to rest for a
few minutes. Then pour a few drops of water and exactly the same
quantity of oil of turpentine on it, spread it in all directions
uniformly and wipe the entire design off clean with a woolen rag. Hard
ink, especially if it has been on the stone for some time, is more
difficult to remove and a little more turpentine is required.

The stone should now be inked-in at once, because the turpentine, and
with it all the fattiness, is liable to extensive evaporation, and then
the stone will not take color well.

Inking-in of the pen designs is done as follows: A clean linen or woolen
rag is soaked in clean water and wrung out till it is damp rather than
wet. This is passed over the whole stone so that it becomes a little wet
everywhere. Immediately after this dampening, the well-inked
printing-roller is passed to and fro over the plate several times. The
roller must be lifted frequently during this work so that the points of
contact change. To lay the color on well and quickly, the roller should
be held rather firmly in the beginning, well pressed down and used with
a certain rubbing motion that will tend to lay color on the design
sideways, so to speak. Then the roller must be allowed to roll to and
fro a few times without much pressure, to spread the color and take away
any surplus. Do not roll too long, till the stone dries, because then it
will take dirt immediately. Should this occur, it must be wiped
instantly with the damp cloth till it is clean again. If dirt is left
too long, it will be extremely hard to remove.

Beginners usually wet their plates excessively to counteract this
trouble of drying during the inking-in. This results in wiping away fine
strokes, and the roller gets so wet that no good impression can be made
till it has been dried sufficiently again. For this reason beginners
should not use bath-sponge, because, though it is excellent, it leaves
too much water on the stone unless one knows exactly how to use it.

Some printers put a little gum, others a little aquafortis into the
water to wet the stone. Others use stale beer, or even urine. I consider
all this unnecessary, if the stone has been prepared correctly and the
color is good.

I have described the ink-rollers. I repeat that they must be uniform,
soft, and elastic.

As to the inking-in color, I am not able yet to lay down a strict rule.
All that I can say, as a result of my experiments and experiences,
is:--

(1) The firmer the varnish in a color is, the cleaner is the work of
inking-in.

(2) The same is true the more lampblack it contains.

But in both cases the finer parts of the work are easily rubbed away,
and too much lampblack makes the lines squash the impression.

(3) The toughness or fluidity of the color must bear correct proportion
to the power of the press. The harder the varnish, the more power is
required in the press.

(4) Tough varnish is not so liable to squash under pressure, but if it
has once been pressed into the spaces between the lines of the design it
is not readily removed by the mere action of the inking-roller, and this
causes more and more smutting and, finally, total ruin to the stone.
Generally when a tough color has adhered too much, there is no other
remedy than to clean the stone well with gum and oil of turpentine; and
this, if done too often, damages the preparation and makes the
impressions continuously poorer.

(5) Soft color spreads more readily under pressure, but is removable
after each impression by merely dampening the plate.

(6) In using soft color, the paper may be kept damper than with hard
colors.

(7) Soft as well as hard printing-color, if not mixed with the proper
amount of varnish, has the property of producing poor, sooty impressions
because of a defect called shading. Shading is caused as follows: If a
drop of oil falls into a basin of clean water, a part of the oil will
spread immediately. Now, a stone is wetted before inking-in. After the
inking a considerable portion of dampness remains. If the ink is very
fluid, it will happen often that a part of it will spread away from the
design to the surrounding moisture, producing something that looks like
a shadow around every part of the design. This does not occur instantly,
as in the case of the pure oil, but gradually, so that it is not as
noticeable when the swifter lever press is used as with the slower
cylinder press or if the workmen are slow. If a stone can be dampened so
exactly that with the last touch of the ink-roller the last vestige of
dampness is removed, this is not likely to happen. But it is difficult
to arrive at such accuracy. It is better to add enough lampblack
gradually to the varnish to make it lose its elasticity, when the
shading effect will cease.

(8) While shading is obviated largely through enough intermixture of
lampblack or other coloring substances to take away the fluidity of the
printing-color, this intermixture will cause other troubles. The finer
places will not take the harder color so well, whereas at other places
too much will be taken. Also an impression made with much lampblack will
off-set more than one made with color in which varnish predominates.
Neither will the impressions be so black. Experience teaches that a
printing-color that has less lampblack will be blacker, because the
sheen of the varnish will make the color strong and lacquer-like. I have
tried to invent a kind of varnish that would not be so liable to shading
and thus would permit a greater fluidity with safety, but lack of time
has prevented me from exhausting the possibilities. I am sure, however,
that it can be done, for I have found that the common linseed oil
varnish can be made to lose its property of shading by admixture of
fatty and resinous bodies. For instance, the addition of a slight amount
of Venetian turpentine permits a greater fluidity. Very good is the
following composition: Six parts linseed oil, two parts tallow, one part
wax, melted together and thickened by boiling down and burning like the
ordinary linseed oil varnish.

(9) The inner composition of the stone and the temperature have a
considerable effect on the print and also react on the color. A stone,
especially a porous one, has much less internal moisture on very warm,
dry days. Then the dampening done before each impression often
evaporates instantly and unequally, so that it is difficult to ink-in
uniformly with a soft color or one lacking varnish, unless one wets the
stone unduly, which, again, injures the impressions. In that case one
must use a color that is firmer than should be used according to
ordinary rule. It is also well, before printing from the stone, to lay
it in clean water for a few hours, or overnight, so that it may soak in
enough moisture to make it easier to dampen.

(10) If the drying of the printing-color is to be hastened, as is
necessary with some work, a little finely powdered mennig may be mixed
in. Finely powdered litharge of silver dries still better, but only a
small amount of printing-color must be mixed with it, because it
toughens within an hour. It will not keep for another day, because the
mennig will dissolve after a while.

In printing from the pen design, the following must be observed:--

Even if the stone has been inked-in uniformly and well with a good
color, the impression can be spoiled in various ways: if the paper has
not been dampened as required by the nature of the color and the power
of the press; if the pressure is not in proportion to the consistency of
the color; if the scraper is not even, and if the leather is not
properly stretched.

Therefore care must be taken in printing pen designs:--

(1) The paper must not touch the inked design till the scraper forces it
down. It is not advisable to lay the paper directly on the stone. It
should be in the printing-frame, which, as already described, should be
so arranged that it will keep the paper at least one fourth inch away
from the stone.

(2) The proper dampening of the paper is not a matter of the greatest
importance in pen designs, so long as it is not too wet, in which case
it causes squashed impressions, does not take color uniformly, and, if
the printing-color is tough, will stick to the stone. In general, the
rule holds good that the degree of dampening must be in proportion to
the firmness of the varnish, and that a softer varnish permits increased
dampening. Dampening is done chiefly to soften the paper, and the
qualities of the paper dictate the amount necessary to a large extent.

(3) The tension of the press must be more powerful with hard
printing-color and carefully graduated with soft color. Besides this, it
depends--

(4) On the structure of the scraper. If it is not absolutely uniform and
well fitted to the stone, more power is needed. Thus the defect often is
corrected; but this may make the color squash and spread in other spots,
therefore it always is better to correct any defects in the scraper. The
sharper the scraper is, the clearer are the impressions, because then
the whole force of the pressure concentrates on the smallest area. But
usually the scraper soon becomes dull, and then the press must have
more power.

(5) Insufficient tension of the leather also may produce poor
impressions, especially if the color is soft and the paper very wet.
Therefore as soon as impressions appear blurred and squashed, the
leather should be tautened and well lubricated with tallow.

Now we come to an important matter, namely, the correction of errors. It
does not happen often that a drawing or inscription can be made entirely
without error, and it would be a great imperfection in lithography if
these mistakes could not be corrected at once.

Errors may be observed before etching or afterward. Different ways of
making corrections are required.

It is very easy to make corrections before etching. If the error is
observed as soon as it is made, while the ink still is wet, it may be
corrected by merely wiping out the defect with the finger. If the ink is
dry, oil of turpentine is required. In each case the ink must be well
removed so that it will not resist the etching fluid later. If only tiny
spots are defective they can be corrected by delicate use of a sharp
eraser. Defects that need merely to be destroyed without drawing
anything else in their place may be scraped off with a knife or with
pumice stone.

After the plate is etched, errors demand treatments that differ
according to whether a defect or blemish is merely to be removed,
whether something else is to be drawn in place of the removed part, or
if something has been forgotten and is to be added. The area of the
correction also makes a difference.

If it is only a matter of removing small defects or places, delicate
erasure will do. The same, or polishing with pumice, is done if the area
is larger. Then the corrected spots must be coated with a mixture of gum
and aquafortis, using a soft brush very carefully that it may not touch
any of the sound places.

If something new is to be drawn in, the process is different. Ink-in the
stone very clean, and coat it with gum and water that is very thin and
delicate. Let it dry. Then scrape the defective places away very
carefully or grind them away by rubbing with pumice stone. Coat the
spots cautiously with soap-water or oil of turpentine and clean off
again as thoroughly as possible. (This coating is not necessary in the
case of a few isolated small lines or points.) Now draw in your new
design with chemical ink, and as soon as this is dry, etch the
corrections carefully with a small brush and then prepare with gum.

The third case, where something has been forgotten, is treated almost
the same way. If it is only a very small thing, the stone need merely be
scraped carefully. Then the drawing may be put in, preferably with a
thicker ink. If the area is large, the stone must be ground where the
design is to be added, coated with soap-water or oil of turpentine, and
then treated as explained before.

When the stone has been corrected and prepared for printing, it can be
used at once or set aside for some length of time. In the latter case it
should be inked with a firm color and coated delicately with gum
solution. Then it can be held as long as desired. Coating with gum
solution is advisable not merely for storing away, but for every
interruption of printing that lasts more than five minutes.

If a stone has stood longer than a day without being freshly inked, it
must be wiped off first of all with gum solution and oil of turpentine,
that it may take the color well, so that the very first impression may
be perfect. During the progress of printing, the following points are
important: Uniform distribution of water, the same of printing-color,
frequent inking of the inking-roller, and the very greatest speed
possible.

In the main points the brush process is like that of the pen. The chief
difference is that it is not possible to make the brush strokes as
strong as those with the pen. Therefore, brush work does not resist
etching so well and must not be treated too powerfully. Much depends on
the treatment of the brush and the consistency of the ink. The brush
does not permit such a flow of ink as does the pen, and generally
requires one that is more fluid. A good brush ink is made as follows:--

Mix two parts of pure white wax and one part of good tallow soap into a
mass not larger than a hazel nut. The ink loses its good properties
quickly and should be made fresh day by day. Mix the two materials with
a thick knife on a lukewarm (but positively not warm) stone, separate
into small parts and moisten with rain water. As soon as the water has
softened the mass a trifle, add as much lampblack as will lie on two
knife points and mix the whole mass together once more till it is
thoroughly mixed and quite firm. When required, a bit of this is rubbed
down in a clean saucer with rain water.

As a better flow of ink is needed for brush work than for pen work, it
is evident that it would not be requisite to treat the stone with
soap-water and oil of turpentine, as for pen work. However, it often
pays to make certain fine lines with the pen, and therefore it is better
to combine both processes and prepare the stone as for pen work. It is
well, however, after drying the coating, to rub it very gently with dry
sand, which will not make the pen strokes flow to any extent and still
will prepare the stone so that it will take the brush strokes well and
not make necessary such strong etching.

If a brush design is to be etched in high relief, for ease in printing
or for durability, it must be etched only to the extent absolutely
required at first. Then it must be prepared with gum and inked-in with
good acid-proof color. Set it aside for a while, that the color may
concentrate so that it will resist the acid well, and then etch the
stone to the desired degree. After etching, wash with water, coat with
gum and put aside to dry. Owing to this latter procedure any fine parts
that may have been unduly affected by the acid will adhere to the plate
anew and it can be printed then like a pen design.

If pen and brush work are to be combined on a stone, and absolute
certainty is desired, that even the very finest lines shall not suffer
from etching, the following process will serve:--

Over the cleanly ground plate pour a solution of weakened but pure
aquafortis, about forty parts of water to one part of aquafortis. Repeat
this several times. Then pour a great deal of water over the stone, to
wash off all acid, and let it dry. Pen as well as brush work is easy on
such a stone, by using the proper ink for each method. When the work is
finished and dry, the stone is merely coated with gum solution. After a
few minutes it can be inked-in with acid-proof ink and treated as
described before.


II

THE CRAYON METHOD

The fat of the chemical ink penetrates the stone in dry form as well as
in fluid form, and makes the plate receptive to printing-color. If the
dry ink is cut into long pieces and sharpened, it can be used much like
lead or black crayon. If the stone is ground very smooth, the work can
be made quite fine and resembles that done with fluid ink. The crayon,
however, wears away too quickly. If the stone is ground rough, so that
instead of a polished surface it has one resembling rough paper, the
crayon work appears as a mass of dots that are coarser or finer
according to pressure with the crayon, and produce an effect similar to
crayon designs on paper. As almost every artist and painter knows how to
use crayon, no particular practice is required for working on stone, and
there are no obstacles such as the difficulty of using the steel pen.

That crayon work on stone is capable of high perfection, and that it can
represent the essentials of a painting in a manner scarcely to be
excelled by the best copper-plate engraver, has been demonstrated by
many successful productions. Add to this that in no other style can one
work equally fast, either on copper or stone, and we see that the crayon
method is a genuine advantage for the art.

For crayon work the stones must be uniform and hard. They must either be
new, or, if they have been used, they must be ground so thoroughly that
all traces of fat are destroyed and removed absolutely to a degree where
it is certain that they will not appear again and take color, even if
the stone is etched only lightly. As soon as the plates have been ground
true, they must be grained by strewing some fine sand or powdered
sandstone on them and rubbing in all directions with a small piece of
limestone. The work can be done dry or wet. Soap-water is best. It gives
the stone a handsome grain. Practice is demanded to get good results
without scratching the stone. The artist must decide for himself what
grain he needs. I think that it would be good if the artist himself were
to grain the stone in varying degrees according to the need of his
design. For instance, a coarser grain might be good for foregrounds.

As soon as the stone has been grained, it must be cleansed perfectly
from dust and dirt. It is best to pour clean water over it and wash it
with a clean rag. The dust and sand must all be removed, otherwise they
will not let the crayon reach the stone where it is used delicately.

When the design is finished, it should be set aside for a day, that it
may take good hold of the stone. It does no harm to let plates rest for
years before etching. Etching must be done by pouring. Painting the
etching fluid on is dangerous because of the danger of taking away fine
spots. About one hundred parts of water are used to one part of
aquafortis. Everything depends on not etching a bit more than necessary.
It is best to etch the coarser parts specially with a small brush and
stronger etching solution, and it is very good to wash the stone with
clean water after etching and let it dry completely before coating with
gum.

When the stone has been prepared, it should not be cleansed at once with
oil of turpentine, but should be inked-in first with a light
printing-color. Only after it has taken this well should it be cleansed
of the crayon and treated to a firmer color. In the first inking-in
there should be very little pressure with the sponge or wet cloth when
dampening it, as the lightest parts of the design are easily rubbed away
before they have taken color. If such parts should vanish, the easiest
way to restore them is as follows:--

Coat the plate with gum solution and wipe with a clean dry cloth till it
is perfectly dry. Then take a flat, knife-like instrument of steel,
which is cleanly ground so that it has no nicks or other defects that
might injure the stone. Scrape with moderate pressure to and fro over
the defective places, but only so that it touches the elevated points
and not the surface of the stone itself. Smear a little fat, such as
linseed oil varnish, over it and wash this away again instantly with gum
solution. Generally the parts all reappear very nicely when the stone is
inked-in again.

A second kind of correction is as follows: Ink the stone with firm
color, wash it well with plenty of pure water and let it dry. Now redraw
the lost places with crayon.

Printing crayon work is the most difficult of all lithography, but can
be done perfectly if all necessary precautions are taken. These are
mainly: (_a_) proper dampening of the paper; (_b_) perfect dampening of
the stone;--too much meaning that the fine points will not take color
well, too little making the stone smut easily; (_c_) good stretching of
the leather, industrious lubrication, and an underlay of taffeta; (_d_)
a good, finely mixed inking-color that will not shade off in printing
and yet does not contain too much lampblack; (_e_) soft and well-dried
ink-rollers; (_f_) proper tension of the press; (_g_) utmost possible
speed in printing. The latter aids enormously, because the stone does
not get so much time to dry out.

Aside from the spreading and running-together of the darker parts, one
of the commonest faults of crayon work is that it is very liable to get
a tone, which spreads over the whole design like a veil; or that the
designs lose their firmness and appear "monotonic" because the shadings
spread and thicken. The first fault comes from weak etching or from oil
that was rancid when it was used to prepare the varnish. The latter
fault makes the color adhere and smut the stone. The same fault is
developed if the printing-color contains soap, which some printers mix
into it for better adherence. It can occur also if the stone has lost
its preparation owing to frequent cleansing and strong rubbing with a
dry rag that is inky. Even strong rubbing with clean water can cause it
if the rag contains fats.

As to the "monotonic" effect, it is frequent, and I have learned that it
can be caused in two ways, namely, if the color is squashed continually
during the print, which makes the stone sooty; or if the color spreads,
as, for instance, during the night or during the noonday rest. The stone
is prepared only on the surface. In the pen style, all lines are
prepared on the sides also, so that they cannot spread because they are
considerably more elevated than the crayon designs.

If a crayon design dries after printing and is not coated properly with
gum, the color is liable to spread away from the design and give the
plate the before-mentioned tone. Even if it is coated with gum, the
color will spread, at least in the inner parts of the stone; and as soon
as the very thin surface has been at all wiped away by rough usage, the
underlying fattiness will appear gradually, and begin to take color.

Both faults of crayon work, namely, the taking of tone and the
development of a "monotonic" condition, can be remedied by inking the
plate for a while with a firmer color. If this does not help, the
following must be resorted to: Ink-in the plate as well as possible, lay
it in the etching-trough and pour over it very weak aquafortis once or
twice. Then wash it with pure water and paint the gum solution over it.
The etching must be done with great caution, with a solution so weak
that the acid is scarcely perceptible. If the plate is to be saved at
all without extensive corrections and re-drawing, this is the best way.
If it is done correctly, it harms the design so little that I advise it
even when the plate looks quite well, but has been standing very long
after the first printing.

I have etched several crayon designs over again, and rather extensively,
to make them more durable and facilitate printing, and with good
success. This gives the further advantage that corrections can be made
at the same time.

The correction of crayon designs, that have been etched already and used
for printing, always has been so difficult a task that few have
succeeded. This has led me to give the matter my best attention; and I
hope that the following rules, based on many experiments, will show the
way, at least, even if they do not produce absolute results.

When a copper-plate engraver has partially finished his plate, he can
have a proof pulled to enable him to study his work. Then he can make
corrections as he pleases,--an advantage that the stone worker has
lacked hitherto.

To produce an impression that shall be faithful to all the beauties of a
crayon design is a matter dependent on so many trivial details that of
the many hundred crayon designs that have been produced by lithographers
since the origin of the art, hardly one has realized the designer's
hopes and ambitions. The commonest fault is that the more delicate
parts of the design print too light and the heavier ones too dark,
thus destroying the balance of tones. The lightening occurs because
the finest parts of the design have lost their power of taking
printing-color. The darkening occurs because the closely shaded parts
flow together, either because the etching has not made enough white
space between the points and lines or because they are squashed in the
pressure of printing.

From this, two other faults may arise, that become visible after
inking-in the plate: The first is the appearance of white dots,
sometimes pretty large. The second is that black dots and smut-marks
appear.

The white dots are caused by speaking during the work, and thus dropping
spittle on the plate. If the spittle is mucous, the plate covers itself
there with a fine crust that resists the chemical crayon so that it does
not soak into the stone and is wiped away by the inking-in. If the
spittle is fatty,--for instance, if one has eaten anything greasy,--the
dots that appear will be black. The same results from touching the plate
with fatty hands. Sometimes a whole picture of the fingers and skin will
appear on the impression.

Let us suppose that after inking-in, a plate shows all these faults: the
finest shadings vanished entirely, the darker places run together, white
and black dots and smut-marks so that the plate has become useless in
every respect. Can this be remedied? If so, how?

I answer that it can be remedied in every point; but that the artist
himself must decide if it will not pay better to do the whole design
anew.

The second question I answer as follows:--

Before everything else, it is necessary to remove all that should not be
on the stone, all smut-marks and black dots; and where the design has
darkened, white points or lights must be graved-in. To accomplish this,
the stone is inked-in first with a firm acid-proof color, and over this
with a lighter one. Then erase or grind away the dirt that is outside of
the design and that would dirty the margin of the printing-paper. No
erasing or grinding must be done within the design itself because then
the grain would be destroyed and the necessary drawing could not be done
as it should be. Therefore the faulty parts must be removed by
engraving, with a more or less sharp needle of good steel, so that what
remains looks quite like a good grain. A little practice will show that
this work is not at all difficult and can be done quickly. Places that
have run together can be cleared and made transparent and clean in a few
minutes. If certain points have become too large, they can be corrected
by engraving a white point in their centre or by engraving a line
through them.

Here I must note that parts of crayon designs thicken sometimes because
the crayon has slipped in drawing, without leaving traces perceptible at
the time. If the etching is weak, it may happen easily that this place
takes printing-color. Skillful engraving may not only correct the
defect, but actually gives the design a beautiful tone and power such as
cannot be easily produced by the crayon itself.

When the plate has been cleansed thus of all surplus and blemishes, weak
aquafortis is poured over it several times and then it is coated with
gum. After a few minutes it is inked-in with fairly firm color. Then it
will be seen that the design is clean, but that all the parts that were
too light are not darker, but perhaps even lighter, having been affected
by the etching. To remedy this, coat the stone with gum solution and
then wipe it off with a dry clean rag so thoroughly that only a thin
film of gum remains behind. To judge this better, it is well to mix a
little red chalk with the gum. When the plate is wholly dry, take a
knife-like tool of steel as described before, and scrape the defective
parts under moderate pressure, without injuring the elevated points of
the design. Great care must be taken during this process to let no
moisture, not even the breath, touch the stone, because that would
produce the very opposite of what is aimed at. When all faulty places
have been treated, a little tallow or linseed oil is smeared over the
plate and then washed away well but gently with thin gum and water. If
this manipulation has been done accurately, the lost parts of the design
will appear when the plate is inked with a somewhat softer color.

Those who fear that they do not possess the skill necessary for this
rubbing-up of the defective parts may attain the object by re-drawing
them. The stone must be washed off first with a great deal of very pure
water and the crayon must contain much soap. This kind of correction
must be finished as quickly as possible and the stone should not be set
aside for any length of time without a gum coating. If the corrections
are extensive, it is better first to ink the stone well with acid-proof
color and then to wash it in pure water and let it dry. Then if it is
inked-in after the design is finished, and if weak aquafortis is poured
over it and it is prepared with gum, it will keep for several months.

Slight blemishes, white specks, etc., can best be corrected by gentle
touching-up with crayon during the proof-printing on the wet plate. It
is understood, of course, that one can also work with pen or brush in a
crayon design that has been already etched. Parts that are too dark can
be made lighter by passing over them a few times with a brush dipped in
weak aquafortis and then re-coating with gum.

These are about the best ways for correcting a crayon design that proves
after etching to be imperfect.

I close with the following:--

(1) The tanners of Munich manufacture an inking-ball, made especially
for printing, of sheepskin, such as I could not obtain in other places,
like London, Offenbach, and Vienna. It is not white like alum-dressed
leather, but yellowish, and the oil has not been completely washed out.
I have had dogskin and thin calfskin worked in the same way and have
found them even better, because of their greater durability. If a roller
is covered with this leather, so that the side that was hairy comes
outermost (not innermost as many do), it develops a decided property of
taking-on color, probably because of its smoothness and elasticity. This
aids much in spreading the color uniformly over the stone. The property
is increased if the roller is dampened slightly before being inked; but
on the contrary, if the stone is kept too wet, the constant moisture
will gradually prepare the roller, so to speak, and it will take less
color and let it go quickly, thus inking the stone badly.

If a roller has been used a long time, it loses its elasticity and
softness and becomes useless for fine work. Still worse is a roller that
has hardened from the drying of the ink. It is surprising to see what a
difference it makes if one has worked for a time with a poor roller and
then replaces it with a good one. It is almost impossible to believe
that the new impressions come from the same stone. I am inclined,
therefore, to believe that the quality of the ink-roller has more effect
on good impressions of crayon and fine pen work than even the quality of
the printing-color.

As stated, it is well to change rollers frequently, and it is wise to
clean them with linseed oil or butter after use to keep them soft and
tender. In working on crayon designs of superior value I advise the use
of new rollers.

(2) It has been remarked before that the color of the stone often
deceives the artist as to the values and proportions of his work and
that the designs always look better on the soft-colored stone than they
do on the glaring white paper. This observation led to printing on paper
tinted like the stone, and the results fulfilled expectations. There
were difficulties however. The very best quality of this paper is
extremely dear, and other qualities had the property of dirtying the
stone, on account of the coloring-matter used for tinting them.
Therefore the attempt was made to print the design on white paper and to
color it afterwards. Here, too, there arose many inconveniences, so that
at last there came the thought of laying a yellow tint over the
impression by means of a second printing. This method proved to be not
only the most economical and quick, but it had the further advantage
that the margins of the paper could be left white, thus enhancing the
value of the design. Hardly had it been used with success a few times
before Herr Piloty conceived the idea of printing the high lights into
the design with white printing-color, so that the impressions would
resemble actual drawings. My experiments toward that end did not result
satisfactorily, because no white oil color will print well enough; and I
proposed that the high lights be engraved into the tint plate and thus
permit the original white of the paper to show. So there came that kind
of crayon impression with one or more tint plates, which has become so
popular that various art connoisseurs hold it to be the triumph of the
lithographic art.

To make and print these tone plates, I have thought out many ways; but
as I am sure that they will suggest themselves to those who have grasped
my text-book, I will describe only the best of them all.

Take a stone of good average quality, the best not being essential, and
grind it as for crayon work with a grain not too coarse. When it is
clean and dry, cover it uniformly with the following chemical ink, which
must be laid on so thickly that it surely will resist the aquafortis
sufficiently, yet not so very thickly that it will hinder the drawing-in
of the lights later on.

The chemical ink for use on the tone plates is made of four parts wax,
one part soap, and two parts vermilion. The two first materials are
melted in a clean vessel over a moderate fire and then the vermilion is
stirred in.

A piece of ink as large as a hazel nut is rubbed down in a clean coffee
cup and then dissolved in rain water till it is just fluid enough to lie
evenly and nicely on the plate when applied with a soft brush.

When the stone thus has been painted red, it must be permitted to dry
thoroughly. When it is dry, a strong impression of the design is made on
sized but well-dampened paper with a printing-color rather soft than
firm. Before the paper has a chance to dry and thus to shrink, the red
stone is placed in the press and the impression is laid on it face down.
Use moderate pressure. The drawing will transfer itself to the red
surface, but the paper will stick. Wet it with weak aquafortis till it
is completely softened and permits itself to be removed. Care must be
taken not to spoil the drawing by violent wiping and rubbing.

This method is easier if a special transfer paper is used. Coat
well-sized, very clean paper with a thin paste of starch such as
laundresses use for stiffening linen. This paper must not be dampened
very much, because then it will not take the impression well. It also is
removed from the tone plate by washing with weak aquafortis and it
yields very easily, because the paste lets go of the color readily.

When the design has been transferred to the tone plate, take good iron
instruments and remove the wax surface wherever the high lights are
desired. As the stone is ground rough, the scraping will produce only
small specks at first, because the instrument will touch only the relief
points. The more the scraping proceeds, the deeper it will go, till at
last one reaches the bottom of the coating and thus obtains a white
light. Experts can so manipulate the tint plates that the lights will be
graduated from the softest to the most glaring.

As soon as the lights are drawn in, the margins of the drawing are
scraped the same way. Then the plate is treated to several washings of
pretty strong aquafortis, about twenty parts of water to one part of
aquafortis. After coating with gum, it is ready for printing.

The most important requisite for this printing is a good arrangement
that will insure an exact register of the second impression with the
first, that the lights may appear exactly where they belong.

To achieve this, the practice used to be to draw two register marks on
the stone holding the original design, which were transferred to the
tint plate with the rest of the design. When the first impression was
made, the printed paper was cut away exactly at the marked points, and
laid accurately, on the tone plate, being guided by the two marks there.
This was effective, but it had the fault that the paper had to be
trimmed off carefully for each impression and that the slightest
inaccuracy spoiled the register. However, it is very useful for printing
proofs.

It is far better to have a printing-frame that is so fixed that it will
never shift its position in the slightest degree. To this is fastened a
little movable frame that has two steel needles whose position is
adjustable at will. Lubricate the leather inside with wax and lay a
sheet of white paper on it. See that the tint plate is so fastened in
the press that it cannot stir out of place. Make an impression and take
care especially that the two register marks print off well. Now set the
needles in the little frame so that they will be exactly over these two
marks. If, then, an impression of the design is laid on so that the two
guiding-marks on it come exactly under the two needles, it will, of
course, register perfectly. Of course the little frame must be so
adjusted that it can be folded back out of the way before each
impression, and the printing-frame must hold the sheets of paper so that
they cannot move.

To color the tint plate, use a firm varnish tinted with umber, or any
other color that will give the desired effect. New rollers are best,
insuring a fine, even, unspotted tone.

(3) In rough-grinding the stones, it is difficult to prevent scratches
and furrows caused by the coarse sand. No design of value should be made
on such a stone, but if one is used, the defects should be touched up
with chemical ink and a fine brush, as crayon will hardly do it.

(4) As the delicate places in crayon work are not durable, etching
having the property of reducing the light portions and darkening the
darker ones, I tried the method of drawing the lighter portions on a
separate stone in rather stronger manner and printing from it with paler
ink. The success was so great that I hope in time to produce true
masterpieces with the aid of skilled artists, and here call attention to
it in advance.

(5) After learning how to make a second impression over a first one, it
is not difficult to pass on to printing with several stones and from
that going on to color-printing. In the early days of my invention I
tried color-printing with a crayon plate and had the best success by
using stencils such as are used by the painters of cards. On oiled stiff
paper I made as many impressions of a design as there were to be colors.
Then all that was to be red was cut out from one stencil, green from
another, and so forth. Then the stone was wetted, the stencil laid on it
and the uncovered parts of the stones inked-in with the right color.
After all the colors had been applied, I made the impression, which
generally looked neat enough, but still resembled a sketchy drawing
rather than a painting, because no color except black, zinc red, and
dark blue permitted itself to be printed strongly enough. But by using
several stones, each of which can be designed and treated according to
the necessities of color, impressions can be made that resemble the
English colored copper prints very closely, especially if the crayon and
pen or brush methods are united.

(6) A stone plate may be etched so that it will have the roughness
needed for crayon work. Grind it as clean and smooth as possible with
pumice, pour aquafortis over it and coat with gum. Wash it well in water
and dry with a clean cloth. Coat it very thinly but uniformly with
tallow into which is mixed a little lampblack, so that one can see if
the coating is perfectly even. With a small ball or roller covered with
fine cloth, roll or pat the stone till it has a very uniform tone. Now
pour a little diluted aquafortis on one end as a test to see if it
penetrates uniformly through the fatty coating. Practice is needed to
hit just the right thickness that the tallow coating must be. It must be
thin, and yet sufficiently thick to resist the aquafortis somewhat, so
that it yields only at those places where the roughness of the cloth on
the roller has removed it more or less.

If the test is satisfactory, make a raised border of wax around the
stone and pour the aquafortis solution on it. A solution of forty parts
of water to one part of aquafortis is better than a stronger one because
the stones are more equally attacked. As soon as the resulting bubbles
are as large as the head of a small pin, the etching fluid is poured
away quickly and replaced with pure water to get rid of the bubbles.
Pour away the water and apply etching fluid again. Repeat this four or
five times, according to the grain desired, and in the end wash the
stone well with oil of turpentine to remove all fattiness. Then it must
be washed with weak but very pure aquafortis, followed by a great deal
of very pure water. After cleaning and drying very carefully with a
clean rag, it is ready for use; and if the work has been well done, a
grain will have been produced that is prettier and much more even than
can be produced by rubbing with sand.

(7) The instructions given here teach how to draw on a stone that has
been prepared beforehand with aquafortis and gum. This is not in the
least inimical to the durability of the design if only the union of the
gum with the stone has been destroyed again by washing afterward with
diluted but pure aquafortis and every trace of this acid again has been
removed by copious washing with pure water. If there is a considerable
amount of the soap in the crayon, the good result will be greater than
with an entirely clean stone, because, since it has already been etched
twice, the etching after the design may be very limited, so that it is
not harmful to even the most delicate shadings in the design.

(8) Some attempts made by me to etch crayon designs more powerfully than
usual proved that the more delicate places would suffer, but if I
rubbed them up with a flat knife as described before, they appeared
again and I had the advantage that the whole plate was much better
prepared than it is with weak etching.

(9) If a crayon plate is spoiled in printing through carelessness or
lack of skill, the rules for remedying the trouble are the same as those
named for pen work, and the judgment of the worker must decide which
method is the most applicable. In general, it may be assumed that the
best remedy for blurred spots is to draw them over again with crayon;
and for smutted parts the best is to apply firmer printing-color, or to
cleanse with oil of turpentine and gum and afterward ink-in with
acid-proof ink, and then use light etching with weak aquafortis followed
always by coating with gum and water.


III

TRANSFER AND TRACING

In the pen and crayon method all the lines that are to take
printing-color are drawn directly on the stone with a fatty preparation.
But lithography has a unique way of transferring to the stone a drawing
or inscription that is first put on paper with the fatty substance. This
is possible only for lithography, and I incline to the belief that it is
the most important of all my inventions. It makes it unnecessary to
learn reverse writing. Everybody who can write on paper with ordinary
ink can do so with the chemical transfer ink, and this writing can then
be transferred to the stone and manifolded indefinitely. In Munich and
Petersburg this method has been introduced for government work. The
measures adopted in council are written during the session by the
secretary, with chemical ink on paper, and sent to the printery. Within
an hour impressions are ready to distribute among the members. I am
convinced that within ten years every European Government will have a
lithographic establishment.

In war the method would have a great value. It would replace the field
printery, and it permits greater speed and secrecy. The commander need
merely write his orders himself and have them printed in his presence by
a man who cannot read, to be sure that his plans will not be betrayed.
The engineer officers can draw plans and have them circulated among the
officers who need them.

Authors and scientists will find the method to be the means of
circulating their works in manuscript very cheaply.

Even artists will respect the method when its gradual perfection enables
them to draw their pictures on paper with ink or crayon and reproduce
them.

Not from boastfulness, but from conviction of the importance of the
method, have I thus recounted its advantages. I could fill a whole book
with detailed explanations. I wish to gain friends for the method, that
it may be improved to its ultimate degree by skilled artists.

The chemical ink used for the paper may be soft or firm. The paper may
be specially prepared or not. The stone may be warm or cold. The design
leaves the paper entirely and clings to the stone, or does so only
partly. To describe all this would take too much space. I will describe
only the method that I consider best, namely, a method under which the
work is done with a soft ink, and transferred to an unwarmed stone. This
is the quickest and surest, and has the advantage of not spoiling the
original.

In a clean coffee cup rub down a piece, as large as a hazel nut, of the
chemical ink described under the heading "Transfer Ink" in an earlier
part of this work. Dissolve with rain water or soft river water. The
amount of water is determined according to the need for fine or coarse
work. In the latter case, the ink should be thinner, that there may not
be too much ink in the design after it dries.

While the writing or design is drying, select a stone that either has
not been used before or at least has been thoroughly ground off, and
grind it down once more with pure and dry pumice stone without water,
until it is certain that all parts of the surface have been rubbed down
so thoroughly that the stone may properly be considered a new one. Clean
away the dust with clean paper, fasten the stone in the press, examine
the scraper to make sure that it is even, adjust the press for the
proper pressure; in a word, do all that is necessary for good
impressions. From this time on the greatest care must be taken not to
touch the polished stone with as much as a finger, not to mention
keeping grease and dirt away from it.

As soon as every point in the design on the paper is perfectly dry, wet
it on the reverse side with a sponge dipped into weak but pure
aquafortis until the paper is quite soft. Lay it between waste paper
sheets for a time, to prevent it from pulling out of shape and to remove
the excess moisture. It must be soft, but not wet, when the impression
is made.

Lay the paper face down on the stone. On it lay two sheets of dry waste
paper, then an equally large piece of taffeta, another sheet of waste
paper and make the transfer print with a moderately swift motion of the
press, which must have more tension than is used for ordinary
impressions. The power of a lever press is insufficient for larger
stones, and a cylinder press is required.

After a few minutes the stone is withdrawn from the press, the paper is
lifted off and the stone permitted to dry for a minute. It is better if
one can wait longer. Then put it into the etching-trough, and pour over
it, quickly and only once, a clean but weak solution of one hundred
parts of water to one part of aquafortis. It is necessary to be skillful
enough to cover the whole surface with one application. Then the stone
is washed by pouring pure water over it, and, if time permits, set aside
to dry. If time is limited, the gum solution to prepare the stone can be
put on at once. Now the transfer is on the stone, properly etched and
prepared. To make clean impressions, however, the printing-color must
first be rubbed on, then the stone must be inked-in with acid-proof
color and after that undergo another etching, a trifle stronger.

To rub on the printing-color, rub a little acid-proof color into a piece
of clean linen or cotton, so that it is well permeated but not thickly
covered. Rub this rag gently to and fro over the transfer while the gum
is still on it, till every part of the design is nicely inked. This
rubbing-in of color is an important part of many of the processes that
will be described later.

Now clean the stone well with water, ink-in with acid-proof ink, and
etch it again as has been described several times. Then it is ready for
printing. The last etching is not necessary if only a few impressions
are desired.

Transfer is applicable not only for pen designs but also for crayon. The
crayon used for the purpose should be softened a little with tallow, or,
if the harder crayon is used, the stone should be warmed when making the
transfer. But it must not be inked-in or have color rubbed on, until it
is quite cold again. For crayon transfer the paper used generally is
fine drawing-paper. It must be wetted with somewhat stronger aquafortis
that it may release the crayon more readily. The rest of the process is
the same.

Besides these two methods, the transfer process can be used for all
products of the book-printer's art, type as well as wood-cut. A freshly
printed sheet can be transferred directly to a stone, especially if the
printer has used our before-mentioned acid-proof ink instead of his
ordinary printer's ink. To get a perfectly clear transfer it is
necessary merely to see that the printer does not use too much overlay,
which would stamp the type too deeply into the paper; and that before
trying to transfer the printed sheet to the stone it is subjected to
gentle pressure in the press to free it from all inequalities. To do
this without at the same time risking any loss of ink which might
subsequently weaken the transfer, the sheet is well wetted, laid on a
clean, wet stone that has been prepared so that it will not have any
inclination to take color, and subjected to a very slight pressure, the
press being used with almost no tension. This makes the printed sheet
beautifully even. Then if it is transferred to a stone properly prepared
as described before, the transfer will be perfect.

Even old book pages can be freshened up and transferred. I have spoken
already of those that are on unsized paper. With prints on sized paper
the method is as follows:--

Make a paint-like mixture of fine chalk and starch paste. Thin it down
with water and paint the sheet. Dip a bit of linen rag into a thin color
made of thin varnish and tallow tinted with vermilion. Touch-up the wet
paper with the rag till every bit of type has taken red color. Pour
clean water over it and touch-up the paper everywhere with a ball of
fine cloth stuffed with horsehair. This will remove all surplus color.
Continue this till the type matter is only faintly red. Then the paper
must be washed very thoroughly with many pourings of water and laid
between waste paper sheets to remove all surplus moisture. The transfer
and so on must be done then as in the other cases.

Good transfers can be made also from a copper-plate engraving if the
copper-plate impression is made with our acid-proof ink. The ordinary
copper-plate ink is not so good. It will be self-evident that designs on
stone can be transferred and reproduced the same way.

The tracing process has the property in common with the transfer process
that it transmits only a small amount of fattiness to the stone and
requires subsequent rubbing-in of color to give it strength.

Coat a piece of thin and clean vellum paper with tallow and lampblack
and wipe it off again as neatly as possible, so that there remains only
a thin film, which will not smut the stone when laid face down, unless
pressure is exerted. Now draw on this with a clean English lead pencil
that contains no sand, or with a composition of lead, zinc, and bismuth,
and the pressure will force the design on the stone and transfer its
fat, which then penetrates the stone and will give impressions. In
preparing a stone thus made, greater care in etching is necessary than
even in the transfer process. Very weak aquafortis solution must be
used.

The process is something between pen and crayon work. It is quite
applicable for sketches and pictures that are to be illuminated.


IV

CONCERNING THE WOOD-CUT STYLE

For this purpose, the stone is coated completely with chemical ink on
the places where this style is to be used. As soon as it is dry, the
lights are drawn into it with a steel engraving-needle that is ground to
a sharp or broad point according to requirement. Those parts that are to
be very white, with fine lines and specks, are best drawn in with the
pen. Thus the wood-cut style differs from the ordinary pen design
chiefly in character and in the treatment of the darker parts. Its
practice is much easier on the stone than on wood, and it can be
combined with crayon work. Etching, preparation, and printing are the
same as with other styles.


V

TWO KINDS OF TOUCHE DRAWING

One of these resembles the wood-cut style in method but in effect
approaches copper-plate work. The stone is grained as for crayon,
etched, prepared with gum, cleansed with water, coated well with
soap-water, wiped, dried, and finally coated with a thin, colored
covering of fat, by either coating with acid-proof ink or with hard
chemical ink.

This first etching and preparation are required to prevent the fat to be
applied afterward from penetrating too deeply into the stone, so that it
may adhere only to the surface.

Now the design is made on it with a steel scraper. The manipulation is
like that for making tint plates. It demands greater care, however, and
better etching.

The completed design is etched (phosphoric acid being best) and coated
with gum. A few drops of oil of turpentine are poured on and all the
color is wiped away with a woolen rag, but without any rough rubbing.
Then the plate can be inked-in with fairly firm acid-proof ink.

The second method would excel crayon work if it were perfected. I have
advanced pretty far with it. It is an imitation of the ordinary wash
drawing which is done with a brush and dissolved Chinese ink on paper.

The stone, which must be very clean and free from all fat, is grained,
coated with soap-water, cleaned with oil of turpentine, and dried. Then
a hard chemical ink, which may contain a little more soap than usual, or
the ink described for brush work, is dissolved in pure rain water and
used on the stone with a brush just as it would be used on paper.

When the design is finished and very well dried, the entire surface of
the stone is rubbed gently with a fine cloth, in order to perforate the
color with tiny holes everywhere. As it will perforate more readily in
the parts where the ink has been laid on thinly, the succeeding
aquafortis will eat through there more easily, and thus the etching will
correspond nicely with the tones of the design. It is necessary,
however, to know the strength of the acid and the resisting power of the
ink very accurately. It is well to experiment and write down the best
proportions. In any case, the etching fluid must not be too strong and
the etching must not be done by pouring or brushing, but in the copper
etcher's manner, by framing the stone with wax so that the fluid will
lie on the stone. As soon as the resulting bubbles reach the magnitude
of a pin's head, the fluid is poured off instantly and then poured on
again till the bubbles reappear. How long this must be continued depends
on the strength of the ink.

It is understood, of course, that the etched stone must then be coated
with gum.


VI

THE SPATTER METHOD

This speedy and easily executed style surely will come into wide use
soon. It is done as follows:--

The outlines of a design are laid on a stone prepared for pen work, by
tracing. Then they are traced again, say four times, on sheets of paper.
On each sheet everything that falls into the category of one of the four
chief tones is cut out with a sharp penknife so that the four sheets are
like the stencils of card painters. Now the chief lines of the design
are made on the stone with chemical ink, using either brush or pen. Lay
one of the stencils on it exactly, weight it that it may not move, and
perform the operation of spattering.

This is done by dipping a small brush, such as a clean toothbrush, into
chemical ink and scraping it with a knife so that the ink is spattered
over the stone. Care must be exercised not to have too much ink in the
brush, for fear of blots or over-large spattering. After practice it
will be possible to produce such fine and uniform dots as cannot
possibly be produced by the pen. After the desired grade of shading has
been achieved, the stone is permitted to dry. Then the second stencil is
laid on and the operation repeated till all have been used. If enough
stencils are made, the whole design can be made by spattering. It is not
necessary, however, to make many, as the design has to be finished up by
hand afterward anyway.

This finishing-up is done first with the engraving-needle, which opens
and decreases all dots that are too large, and then with the pen, which
brings out the true proportions of the various tones.


VII

TOUCHE WITH SEVERAL PLATES

This really is only a process of using many tint plates. It makes
splendid effects possible, equal to any produced by an artist with
Chinese ink, and deserves the attention of all artists, especially as it
is the easiest and quickest of all methods, even though it is a little
circumstantial in the printing.

Draw the outlines of a design on the stone in chemical ink with pen or
brush, and then make four, five, or six transfers on stone plates
prepared for pen work. Register marks must be on the design. Now draw-in
the darkest parts on the first plate, the less dark ones on the second,
the lighter ones on the third, and so on till the whole design is
finished. The work is best done with a brush. One or more of the stones
may be designed with crayon; but the number of stones designed with ink
must be greater, in order to make the grain of the crayon designs
unnoticeable.

The etching is done as in pen work. For each stone the printing-color is
chosen according to the tone of its design. Of course particular
accuracy is vital; but the artist should not permit the apparent
difficulties to frighten him, as he will see very soon after trial that
no other method produces such beautiful results.


VIII

COLOR-PRINTING WITH MANY PLATES

This method, in which the various colors are drawn on several stones,
either with pen or crayon, resembles the one just described.

According to treatment the impressions will resemble a painting, a
copper-plate engraving in color, or an illuminated copper-plate
engraving, if the color stones are used merely to lay colors over a
design already printed in its entirety in black.

The whole process is so like the preceding one that I need merely
recount the colors that I have found serviceable for the purpose.

RED. Vermilion, red lake of cochineal, fine madder lake, and finally
carmine if it is mixed first with Venetian turpentine before being
combined with varnish, as otherwise it inclines to separate from the
varnish and unite with water, staining the whole printing-paper red.

BLUE. Berlin blue and mineral blue. Use only a small amount, sufficient
for a few hours. These colors dry quickly, and, besides, make the
varnish too tough, so that they must be thinned down from time to time
with a little linseed oil. Fine indigo is very good, also a blue lake
that is made of logwood and verdigris. This latter is not durable in
sunlight.

I have had no success as yet with green or yellow.

Verdigris is difficult to manipulate because it smuts the stone easily
and does not tolerate many mixtures. Schweinfurther green, one of the
new colors, is much better in all respects, but not dark enough.
Mixtures of yellow lake with indigo or mineral blue are not very
durable. Golden yellow ochre with mineral blue or indigo does not
produce a pretty green, and King's yellow mixed with blue is handsome
but not durable. Neapolitan yellow and the newer chrome yellow with blue
produce a green that is not dark enough.

I have obtained the handsomest and darkest green by printing the design
blue first and then printing over it a yellow plate, so that the yellow
lay over the blue. By using Berlin blue and fine ochre a fairly handsome
color is produced. On account of its loss of color in water, ochre
cannot be used unless Venetian turpentine is first mixed with the
varnish.

A handsome and at the same time dark yellow is equally hard to obtain.
Till a good color is invented, we must content ourselves with ochre,
Terra de Sienna, Neapolitan yellow, mineral yellow or chrome.

This printing with various colors is a process for which the stone is
superior; and it is susceptible of such perfection that in future true
paintings will be produced by its means. My experience convinces me of
this.


IX

GOLD AND SILVER PRINTING

This process is useful for decoration.

Those parts of the design that are to appear in gold or silver are drawn
with chemical ink on a stone prepared for pen work. After the drawing is
dry, it is etched and prepared in the usual way. The printing is done
with a silver gray color of firm varnish, fine crayon and a very little
lampblack. The paper must be entirely dry and very smooth. Soon after
the impression has been made, the printed parts are covered with silver
or gold leaf such as is used by gilders. It is pressed on slightly with
cotton, that it may adhere, and then a sheet of paper is laid over it.
Then the second impression is made, treated the same way, and so on.

No more impressions must be made than one can cover with silver or gold
in two hours. If the ink is on the paper too long, it will draw in and
not take the metal well. After gilding or silvering, the sheets must lie
for some hours or till the next day, that the ink may take perfect hold
of the paper, so that, in the succeeding pressing, it will not penetrate
the metal and make it look sooty. The pressing is done by laying six or
eight impressions on a clean stone under the press and passing them
through as for printing, with the proper tension. This tension must be
adjusted according to the firmness of the printing-color; therefore it
is best to make test with one sheet. Then, if the metal does not adhere
sufficiently, the pressure can be increased.

In the end all surplus gold or silver is removed by gentle wiping with
clean cotton. This is easy, as it will have fastened itself only to the
printed parts. If the impressions can be set aside for some days without
being wiped, it is better, and there is not so much danger of injuring
the brilliancy of the metal.

If gold and silver are to be printed on designs where there is other
color also, or where there is black, the print on which the metal is to
be applied must always be made first. Only when the sheets have been
gilded or silvered, pressed, wiped, and cleaned, is the black design to
be printed on from the next plate. That all this must be done with the
register marks previously described is, of course, self-evident.

So I close my description of the Relief method; and I hope that I have
made it all so clear that good results will come to all who follow my
directions.



CHAPTER II

INTAGLIO METHOD


This differs from the other in that the fat, which is to attract the
printing-color, is under the surface of the stone, the design having
been either engraved-in or etched, and then filled with fat.

Like the preceding method, it has several branches. The best are
these:--


I

THE LINE ENGRAVED STYLE

This is one of the most useful branches of lithography, and if the
artist has attained enough skill and the printer knows his trade, it
approaches very near to the handsomest copper plates, and at the same
time is about three times easier and quicker than work on copper. It is
splendidly adapted for writings and charts.

Choose a hard, uniform stone of the best kind. Grind it as finely as
possible. Etch with aquafortis and prepare with gum. This, at least, was
my early method, and it has remained in use in all printeries. Later,
however, I discovered that it is almost better to coat the stone with
gum without previous etching, because it can be more easily worked then.
Only in that case it must be perfectly clean and contain no concealed
fattiness. Immediately after the stone has been coated with gum (not
some hours later, as many do) the gum must be removed with water, that
it may not penetrate too deeply and thus cause a condition which will
prevent the finest lines from taking on color subsequently.

Then coat the plate with a tint made of gum solution and lampblack or
red chalk. Use a soft brush to make the coating very thin and uniform.
It has the double purpose, first, of giving the stone a color so that
the engraver can see his work, and of covering the prepared surface of
the stone with a protective coat that later will admit the fatty
printing-color only where it has been pierced by the engraving-tool. It
is evident that this latter property is increased according to the
amount of gum in it, yet only little gum must be used in it, the
permissible amount being only just enough to insure that the coating
shall not be easily wiped away during the work of engraving.

The stone must be absolutely dry before any work is done on it. Then the
design is traced on it, or drafted directly on it with lead. Transfer by
printing from paper is not advisable, because the resulting fattiness of
the design makes the graver slip.

For the actual work of engraving there is no counsel to be given except
to choose good and sharp needles of the very best steel, hard enough to
cut glass; and that all lines must be graved clean. There must be no
excessive pressure, and in wide strokes there must be no excessive
depths. In making very fine lines the stone should merely be touched by
the tool. If they appear white, and a little fine dust is observed, one
may be certain that they will appear properly in the printing. Broad
lines often can be made with one stroke of a flat needle, but generally
they are made by continued, gradual scraping. If the stone is to be only
lightly wiped during printing, the broad lines must not be deeper than
strictly necessary to make them clear, as otherwise they will squash. In
true art works, however, which are to be printed with firm color and
under more powerful rubbing and wiping, the depths of all lines must be
considered carefully, as they will print darker or lighter according to
depth.

Of all things the worker must take heed against touching the stone with
dirty or greasy hands, for a plate thus blemished is not only difficult
to engrave, but the grease finally may penetrate through the slightly
gummed coating and enter the stone, making much consequent trouble when
the printing begins.

It is more harmful still to wet the stone in any way, because then the
coating gum will dissolve, penetrate into the engraved lines and give
them a preparation, so that they cannot take color afterward. Therefore,
especially in winter, a very cold stone must be warmed before working on
it with the design, as otherwise the moisture in the room will
precipitate itself on the stone. Even the perspiration of the hands or
the moisture of the breath may cause damage. Therefore a good but
careful warming is very advisable.

If a plate has become moistened, as, for instance, from a breath, it
must be permitted to dry before doing any further work on it, and
especially it must not be wiped.

The dust resulting from the engraving is to be removed either with a
soft brush or by blowing it away.

Faulty lines that are noticed during the engraving may be scraped flat
very carefully so that no furrows are made, or they may be rubbed off
with fine pumice, after which those places must be prepared again, and
coated with gum applied with a small brush. Then the corrections can be
made. If only tiny places are faulty, they need merely be coated with a
mixture of weak phosphoric acid, gum, and lampblack or red chalk. This
prepares them. Thus they will not take color during the print, and so
are practically removed.

When the design is finished, the stone must be very dry that it may take
color well. But it must not be warmed, as this would incline it to take
smut. A color consisting of thin varnish, a little tallow, and lampblack
is now rubbed swiftly into all the depressions, and immediately wiped
away again with a woolen rag wetted with gum solution. This removes the
original red or black coating also.

Thus the hitherto colored stone becomes perfectly white, while the
engraved design, which has appeared white, is now black. The first
impression that the eye will gain will be that now the design appears
much finer than it did before. That is because every white line on a
dark background looks wider than a black line of the same thickness on a
white background. Therefore, while engraving, the artist should aim to
make his lines a trifle bigger than his eye would suggest.

In printing the stone the usual precautions required in every form of
lithographic printing must be observed. Beyond that, the matter of chief
importance is the proper composition of the printing-color.

Stone plates made in this way can be inked-in (1) by rubbing-in the
color and light wiping, and (2) by harder wiping, and (3) by the
ink-roller.

For the first method, a color can be made of thin varnish and burned
lampblack, the latter being present in fairly large quantity but very
finely rubbed-down. Into this color is mixed a quantity, equivalent to
one half the mass, of gum solution that is almost as thick as the color
itself. Everything must be mixed perfectly. If the solution is too
watery, it is not easy to mix it.

Three clean rags of cotton or linen are needed for inking. The first is
used to wet the stone and to clean it again in the end. The second is
colored with a small quantity of printing-color and rubbed in by
thorough wiping to and fro. The third rag is used to clean away any
surplus that may adhere. Then the first clean rag is used to cleanse the
stone thoroughly.

All three rags must be wetted with gum solution, and the first and third
must be washed several times during the day.

The stone plate is harder to clean at first than after some fifty
impressions have been made. Often there will remain little specks of
color on the prepared places, which are easy enough to wipe away but are
inclined to reappear. To remedy this it may be necessary to use more
clean rags in the beginning or more gum solution. If the stone has been
polished very well in grinding, this trouble will not be very noticeable
if at all. Under any circumstances, it will disappear gradually during
the printing, so that at last it will be possible to clean the surface
with the very same rag that lays the color on and is permeated with ink.

In the second method, the wiping is harder in order to take more color
away from the shallower lines, so that they will be pale compared with
the deep ones which then will appear very black and strong.

If the full beauty of a well-made copper plate is to be equaled, care
must be taken, as said before, to achieve the proper depth of
engraving, and the stone must be wiped harder. Otherwise the method is
the same, except that beautiful, shining impressions often can be made
by using a firm color, if the stone can bear the necessary tension.

The inking-in with the ink-roller is like the same process in other
methods, except that the color must be softer and the roller well filled
with it. It is necessary, also, to learn by practice how to work the
color into all the deep lines.

The impression must be made immediately after inking, as otherwise the
color will sink too deeply into the stone and not give a strong
impression without renewed inking.

The paper must be wetted a little more than in the other method.

The tension of the press is according to the size of the plates, but on
the whole must be two or three times greater than for the other methods.
More pressure still may be needed for very fine work, as the finer lines
often are harder to print than the coarse ones.

As soon as the first clean proof is pulled, it must be examined for
errors or faults in the design. If there are any, the stone is removed
from the press after being delicately coated with gum, and the
correction is made as follows: Before anything else, all such faults as
are to be removed entirely are either scraped away with a very sharp
knife or rubbed away with a very fine stone. The manipulation must be
very delicate to avoid grooves and furrows or sharp edges that afterward
will hold dirt. Then the parts thus corrected are coated with a mixture
of about six parts water, two parts gum, and one part aquafortis to
prepare them anew.

If anything new is to be added to the design or drawn in place of an
error, the stone is washed with water throughout, or, if the correction
is to be made only in a very small part, washed at the desired place.
Then it is coated with the red chalk as described in the beginning, but
so thinly that the design can be seen plainly through the red coat. Now
all that is desired can be engraved, filled again with the rubbing-in
color, and turned over to the printer, who cleanses it with gum water
and proceeds to print.

Only a few more useful suggestions:--

(1) It happens often that after the first rubbing-in of fat color and
the succeeding cleansing with water, the stone gets a "tone" over its
whole surface; that is, it takes color at least partly, and thus seems
to have lost its original preparation. This may be due to the fact that
not enough gum has been used in the original coating, or that the
rubbing-in was rough enough to injure the protective coating, or that
the rubbing-in-color was left on too long before being washed away with
gum solution.

A similar fault may develop with the second rubbing-in, after
corrections, and from the following causes: Poor color containing sand;
too much pressure with the greasy rags; the use of rags not sufficiently
cleansed of any soap used in washing them; rubbing-in of color with too
dry a color rag; in brief, from anything that may destroy the stone's
preparation wholly or in part.

Sometimes this defect may be remedied by mixing more gum into the
printing-color and into the water with which the cleaning-rags are
wetted. A firmer color may aid, if it is rubbed away by fairly strong
pressure of the rag as soon as it has adhered. This operates as a remedy
because the firm color takes hold of the dirt that has set itself into
the pores of the stones, and when it is removed, takes the dirt with it.
If none of these have results, there is nothing left except to grind off
the plate very slightly and carefully with an exceedingly fine stone and
gum solution. In the case of very delicate designs, this is not
applicable, because the finest lines have practically no depth.
Therefore they must be washed instead, a rag being dipped into weak
aquafortis or very much diluted phosphoric acid, and passed carefully
over the stone till the dirt disappears. It is well to mix in a little
gum, and also to rub acid-proof ink into the stone first, that the
etching fluid may not attack the design too much.

After this cleansing the tone will disappear, but another fault often
appears in place of it. The color, after rubbing-in, will not permit
itself to be wiped away readily, because the etching has caused some
roughnesses to which the color adheres in the form of little specks. A
number of clean rags with gum solution must then be used, or the stone
should be lightly rolled a few times with the ink-roller after being
rubbed-in. The roller will take the specks. Indeed, the fault hardly
ever appears if the inking-in is done with the roller, as suggested in
the remarks about the third form of inking-in.

As soon as some few impressions have been made, the roughness of the
plate disappears gradually and it can be wiped off without leaving
specks behind. Gentle rubbing with pumice finely powdered and mixed with
gum solution will remove the defect in the very beginning, but care is
needed lest the design be injured.

(2) A line that has so little depth that it is almost level with the
surface of the stone can be made as black as a deeply engraved one by
continued rubbing with the color rag. In using a firmer color the lines,
especially the wider ones, can be so overloaded after a while that the
ink will squash under the press. This surplus can be removed again by
the use of the ink-roller, but it is merely adding unnecessary work, as
proper practice in inking-in and the use of exactly the right
consistency of color will prevent the trouble.

(3) The best way to ink-in an intaglio design is to rub it in at first
with a somewhat firm color that however, contains enough gum, then to
wipe it a bit, and after that to rub gently to and fro over the stone
under gentle pressure, with a rag containing a less heavy color. A
firmer color does not adhere well to the more delicate lines, or, at
least, is hard to print; but by applying it first, the printing of the
wider and deeper lines is facilitated, while the succeeding rubbing with
softer color brings out the perfection of the finer lines.

The second rag with the lighter color must not be filled with it in
mass, but should merely be made sooty with it, so to speak. Otherwise
the lighter color would penetrate the deeper lines also and mix there
with the heavier color.

In the end the stone must be wiped again with an entirely clean rag, as
will be understood, of course, and thoroughly cleansed of all the
color.


II

THE ETCHED METHOD

In this the design is not engraved into the stone by pressure of the
hand, but with aquafortis or other acid, and only so much pressure is
exerted in making the design as is required to cut through the thin
coating of varnish with which the stone is covered. Therefore this
method permits great freedom of action and is applicable especially for
landscape work and for drawings in Rembrandt's style. In treatment as in
effect it resembles copper plate, and has its own advantage in that the
lines may be strengthened gradually by stronger pressure on the
engraving-needle. They may even be engraved a little into the stone so
that afterward the lines will become stronger under etching. This cannot
be done with copper at all or only with great difficulty.

These considerations and the quicker printing permitted by it recommend
the method to artists. In other respects it is not different from
working on copper. But it is necessary that a good lithographer should
be a master of this form of stone work, as it may be used for excellent
work, not only by itself but in combination with the other methods.

The stone must be ground as smoothly as possible, then treated with
aquafortis and coated with gum, so that its surface thus is completely
prepared. The aquafortis may be as strong as that used for etching pen
work. It suffices, also, to wipe the plate merely with a sponge dipped
in stronger aquafortis, the chief point being that no roughnesses shall
be caused by uneven etching.

A few minutes after this first operation is finished, the stone is
rinsed with water, dried and coated with etching-ground. This can be
best done as follows:--

(1) Warm the stone till an ordinary copper etcher's etching-ground will
become so fluid on it that it can be worked with a leather ball like a
varnish, and can be spread very thin and very evenly. Great care must be
exercised lest uneven warming crack the stone. If one can put it into a
nearby baker's oven, it will obviate the necessity for an especial
apparatus, which otherwise is demanded.

After coating the stone with the etching-ground, it is reversed while
still warm, and blackened by applying the flame of a tallow or wax
candle, as the copper-plate etchers do with their plates. Then the stone
is set aside to cool, with great precautions against dust. After it is
cool, dust will not harm it, and it can be kept indefinitely before use,
so long as the coating is protected against injury.

(2) The method given is the best; but if the warming of the stone
is difficult, there is a method applicable to cold stones. The
etching-ground is dissolved in oil of turpentine and laid on the stone
with a clean ball. A stone so treated must be put away for at least a
day in a place safe from dust that the oil of turpentine may evaporate.

To tint this etching-ground, it may be blackened by smoking with a
candle, as in the first case; or color, such as lampblack or vermilion,
may be mixed-in before it is applied. If one wishes to be very certain
that the stone will bear the etching well, it may be coated, very thinly
indeed, with a solution of very firm chemical ink after applying the
etching-ground.

The design is traced through this coating to the stone. It may be
transferred, also, but in that case, as soon as the transfer is on
the stone, it must be coated thinly once more with a solution of
chemical ink that does not, however, contain any lampblack or other
coloring-matter, but is transparent. This is necessary to fill out
any little holes and other injuries that may have been caused by the
pressure during transfer or by the inequalities in the transfer paper.

The designing with the needle is done as in the engraved manner, except
that the design is merely cut into the coating.

When the design is complete, the stone is laid into the etching-trough
and diluted aquafortis, muriatic acid, or strong wine vinegar is poured
over it repeatedly, according to the depth that the lines are to have.

If it is desired to etch so as to produce various tones,--some strong
and some delicate,--after the manner of the copper-plate etchers, the
pouring of acid should cease as soon as the very finest lines of the
design have been etched sufficiently. Wash away every bit of acid with
clean water and let it dry. Then, with a small brush and chemical ink,
coat all parts that are not to be etched further. It is well if the
chemical ink used for this purpose contains a little more soap than
usual, so that it can penetrate well into all the depressions and leave
no little holes. The coating must be done very cautiously, and it is
better to paint on too much ink rather than too little, as the design
will appear very dirty if etching fluid should penetrate here or there
through the coated portions.

When the ink is dry, etching is resumed till the second tones have been
etched as far as desired. Then the procedure is repeated, these second
tones being coated. Thus one continues till all gradations of shading
have been reached.

When the stone is fully etched, clean water is poured over it, and then
all the parts that have not been coated with chemical ink are treated to
a covering. The object of the previous coatings was to prevent access of
acid to the parts; but at the same time the ink prepared the parts.
Therefore the remaining portions of the design also must be sated with
ink before the stone is inked-in for printing.

Let the stone dry and then pour on it as much oil of turpentine as may
be necessary to dissolve this whole ground coating, which then is wiped
off with a woolen rag wet with gum solution. Then the stone maybe
inked-in and printed.

If an error is observed before etching begins, the first question is if
the defect is deeply engraved in the stone or if it has been drawn
merely through the ground coating without affecting the stone itself
materially. In the latter case it is necessary merely to cover the
defective place with chemical ink and draw into it the correction. If
the error has been graved deeply into the stone, it must be covered for
the time being, but nothing new can be drawn there. To do this, one must
wait till the plate has been etched and rubbed-in with color. Then the
incorrect part is scraped or ground off as evenly as possible, the place
prepared anew with aquafortis and gum, and the correction made with the
steel needle.

An intaglio design often is greatly beautified by being printed with a
tint plate like a crayon design. It can be done with a second stone, but
it can be obtained also with the one plate that has the design on it.
Wash the designed stone with clean water and then paint a thick coat of
chemical ink containing more soap than usual over the whole stone or
over only such parts as one desires to improve by adding a tone. If
lights are to be worked into this tone, it can be done, after inking-in,
with a small brush dipped into weak aquafortis.

In printing a stone thus toned, it must be rubbed-in thoroughly with the
black color and then cleaned as well as possible. The tint that shows on
the surface then is usually too dark, and the firmer the color the
darker it is. Then a second rag must be used with a much softer color,
which may even be thinned-down with plain oil or butter. It may also
contain another coloring substance. Rub this rag very gently to and fro
without much pressure till it is apparent that the dark tone has been
replaced by a light one. Then the stone is ready for printing.

Stones to be treated to a tint in this manner must be etched somewhat
deeper than others, because the lines do not appear so dark against a
tone.

In all intaglio methods there is the advantage that parts that turn out
too dark can be modified by fine scraping or grinding. The stone merely
must be rubbed with acid-proof ink beforehand, that the necessary
preparation of the corrected places with aquafortis or phosphoric acid
and gum may not attack the rest of the design. Those who attain skill in
scraping or grinding with a small piece of black slate can make the
softest gradations of shade in uniformly etched designs, and more easily
and quickly than by drawing or coating and etching. If the stone has
been rubbed-in with color for the first time only a short time
previously, the ground or scraped surfaces do not even need to be
etched. It is sufficient to wash them with a rag wetted in gum solution,
because the color will not have penetrated the stone so deeply that it
is likely to reappear.


III

DESIGN WITH PREPARING INK, COMBINED WITH SPATTERED AQUATINT

If a little dissolved gum is painted on a clean stone that then is inked
over its whole surface with printing-ink, none will adhere where the gum
is. In other words, the stone will have been prepared there. If the gum
is permitted to dry before the ink is applied, those parts will become
black, too; but as soon as a few drops of water are poured on and the
ink-roller passes over the stone, all the gummed parts will show up
white at once. This led me to make a color mixed with gum, with which
one can design on stone and that would have the property of preparing it
so that, on printing, the design or inscription will print white.

Some drops of gum arabic dissolved in water are mixed with an equal
amount of lampblack and rubbed very fine. This makes an ink similar to
Chinese ink, and keeps well when dried. It is rubbed down in a saucer
with a little water and then is ready for use.

It can be used on a clean stone, but is likely to flow, for which reason
the stone must be painted with a little weak aquafortis mixed with a
little nutgall, and then well cleaned again. Still better is it to paint
a clean stone some days before with oil of turpentine which is cleaned
off again immediately. In that case, however, it is well to mix a little
phosphoric acid into the drawing-ink, that the designed parts will be
prepared the more surely.

When the design is dry, the whole stone is inked with printing-color,
care being taken that not a drop of water touches it before it is
perfectly black. Then a little water is poured on, after which there
must be a little more rolling with the ink-roller till all the design
that is drawn with the preparing-ink is very white and clean. Now the
stone can be used for printing, being used in the manner used for pen
work. To make the design more durable, that it may not in time thicken
in its finer parts, the stone may be well inked-in with acid-proof ink
and after a few hours, during which it draws together well, the drawing
is etched in intaglio with aquafortis. Then it is coated with gum and
the printing is not likely to damage the design.

Here we have an intaglio design which is prepared and prints white.

The case may be reversed, and the black plate may be made white again
while the design will print black. This is because a stone treated with
preparing-ink gives almost the same result, once it is grounded with
acid-proof ink and etched as if the design had been engraved into
etching-ground. The etched lines need simply be filled with chemical ink
as in engraved work, to make them take color instead of coating them
with gum. Then there remains only the obstacle that the stone is not
prepared over its whole surface and takes color everywhere. However, it
is not difficult to clean the plate and prepare it perfectly, especially
if the stone is finely polished. It must be rubbed well with color, and
wiped clean at once without rubbing too much of it away from the etched
design. To make the color easier to wipe out, Frankfurter black and
tallow may be mixed in it. Then the rag that has been used for inking-in
is dipped into a mixture of twenty parts water, two parts gum, and one
part aquafortis, or better still, phosphoric acid, and rubbed back and
forth. The rag must not be too dirty and heavy with color, but it must
contain some so that the delicate parts of the design shall not be wiped
out and thus rendered susceptible to the acid. The next thing is to try
with the finger to see whether the color on top can be easily rubbed
away or not. In the latter case the wiping must be repeated till the
cleansing mixture has so far prepared the surface that the wet hand or a
wet piece of leather can cleanse it perfectly and free it from the dark
tone. Now the stone is inked-in with firmer color (acid-proof ink is
best). This is wiped off again thoroughly. Very weak aquafortis (or
phosphoric acid if it has been used for the work) is then poured over it
a few times, and this generally prepares it so well that it can be inked
and cleaned easily during the printing.

This method is useful for many kinds of art, and it must not be imagined
that it is superfluous because the other ways are quicker.

The engraving-needle is very good for drawing the finer parts of the
design through the etching-ground, but the coarser ones cause much
trouble, while with the pen, these are the very ones that are easiest to
produce. By using this method, both advantages can be combined and only
that is drawn with the pen which is most readily produced that way.

Thus the whole design, with the exception of the finest parts, is drawn
on the white plate with the black preparing ink touche. Then, when it
has been covered with acid-proof ink and made white, the finer parts are
worked-in with the needle. Or they may be left till the end, when they
are engraved-in.

For grounding or blackening the plate, one may use a substitute for the
acid-proof ink if the ground is to be firmer. Use the etching-ground
(mentioned several times before) of wax, mastic, pitch, and resin,
dissolved in oil of turpentine and mixed with fine lampblack. It will
then be susceptible of being laid beautifully uniform on the stone with
the ink-roller like printing-ink.

The spattered aquatint method resembles this.

The outlines of the design are engraved or etched into the stone very
delicately. After rubbing-in with black printing-ink and cleaning again
thoroughly, it is rinsed with a great deal of clean water to take away
every trace of gum. When it is dry a small brush is dipped into the
preparing-ink, and the stone is spattered as described in the article on
spatter-work. After drying, the dots that are too large are treated with
the needle, and missing ones are drawn in with the pen. Now apply the
roller with the dissolved etching-ground, that must, however, have only
enough color so that the outlines of the design can show through it.
Then the spattered work is brought out by rolling with water. Now coat
the lighter parts of the design and etch. Coat again and etch again, in
short do as already described for the method of successive etching till
the required gradations of shade have been attained. Then proceed as
usual with the inking-in and printing.


IV

AQUATINT IN COPPER-PLATE STYLES AND WITH ETCHING-GROUND

Any one who has the necessary appliances of the copper-plate worker for
making the aquatint ground used by them, and who has the necessary
skill, can do so, although the stone is endangered by the heat, and the
process is not advisable. The stone is dusted with fine resin. A flame
of spirits is applied below until the stone is so hot that the resin
melts and forms the ground.

Better is that copper-plate method in which the resin is dissolved in
highly rectified spirits of wine and poured quickly over the whole
stone. By breathing on this, the resin is made to separate from the
spirits and form tiny pellets, which thus make the required aquatint
ground.

Both methods are better for very coarse work than for fine designs.
Etching-ground, dissolved in oil of turpentine, or consisting simply of
tallow and put on the stone very uniformly with a cotton ball, is much
better, and produces an effect similar to wash drawing. However, it is
better suited to the lighter parts of a design, because it will bear
long and powerful etching only if one hits exactly the proper
proportions between ground and etching fluid. Therefore, it is well,
after the first tones have been etched and printed, to spatter
cautiously with chemical ink all those parts that are to be darker than
half-tones. Thus these dots will prepare the design so well at those
places that they can withstand the most powerful etching.


V

AQUATINT THROUGH CRAYON GROUND

This is a sort of middle process between aquatint and the scraped style.
It has the advantage of great speediness.

A stone that has been grained for crayon work is coated with the black
or red gum ground described for the engraved method, but without
previous etching, which would not do harm but is unnecessary. The
outlines are drawn in with the needle very lightly, because they are to
serve only to make the design visible. Those lines, however, that are
not to disappear in the aquatint tone, but are to show plainly, must be
cut as deeply as necessary for greater or lesser blackness. Then the
stone is rubbed with color and washed with water as in the engraved
method.

When it is entirely clean and dry, all the design will be black and the
stone white. The design must be examined carefully, and the various
gradations of shading should be separated in the mind into about eight
leading classes, of which four are numbered upwards to the lightest
parts, and four numbered downwards to the darkest. Everything in the
category of the four dark parts now is worked strongly with chemical
crayon. The purpose is to mass a number of evenly separated points over
these parts of the design that shall withstand the etching fluid like an
aquatint ground, between which the etching fluid may eat the stone and
thus form a coarser grain than could be attained merely by rough
grinding.

Then the four lighter parts must be coated with chemical ink. The very
lightest parts, and all that is to remain white, must be left white on
the plate and neither touched with crayon or ink.

Then the stone is etched for the first time. Following this pour clean
water over it and let it dry. Then of the four dark parts the lightest
are coated with chemical ink, and when it is dry the etching fluid is
applied again. After washing and drying, the next lighter portions of
the dark sections are coated, and so on till at last the very darkest
shadows have been coated. Then a clean brush is dipped into gum solution
and everything that should remain white is painted.

If a little oil of turpentine is now poured on the stone, and the crayon
and chemical ink are dissolved and wiped off, the stone can be inked
with soft inking-color and wiped again with a woolen rag. Then the
design will look as if a black veil were over it, because the lightest
parts of it and the half-shadows are not worked out at all. Wet a rag
with gum solution and a little phosphoric acid, and hold it in one hand
while with a fine scraper you scrape in the lights according to their
gradation or grind them in with a fine stone, for instance, a slate
pencil. As you scrape wipe over the design with the wet rag; and you
will see exactly what you are doing as the various gradations will
appear bit by bit. The printing in this as in other aquatint methods is
done with soft and thin printing-color, and the paper may be more
dampened than in other forms of lithography. The press needs
considerable tension and the stones must be thick.


VI

INTAGLIO CRAYON AND TRACED DESIGNS

The difficulty of getting impressions from crayon that shall not differ
from the original design on the stone led me to consider the use of the
grained style of the copper-plate engravers. A crayon-like design in
intaglio would have a greater strength in the dark parts and greater
delicacy in the lighter; be more durable and more easily corrected. I
saw at once that if I could attain some perfection, it would mean a
great step forward in color printing, also. Thus there were originated
the following two processes, which no doubt will in time interest
artists to a high degree.

A stone grained for crayon work is prepared with aquafortis and gum.
Then it is cleansed with water and covered with etching-ground when dry,
as is prescribed for the etched process. The ground must be laid on so
thinly and evenly that the design can be put in easily and that it still
will resist the etching.

When the stone is cold and the outlines of the design have been traced
on it, a scraper of the best steel is used to scrape in the lights and
shadows. The scraper touches only the most elevated points of the
grained surface at first, and produces larger points only after
continued work, just as chemical crayon does. When the whole stone is
finished, it is etched as in the etched process and then cleansed and
printed in the same way.

If the stone is etched a little more strongly in all its gradations, it
can afterward be ground down gently with very soft pumice, or, better
still, with black slate and a gum solution, once it has been rubbed-in
with color. This destroys all roughnesses that may remain from the first
manipulations. Parts that have turned out too dark can be lightened by
this polishing, and the over-light ones can be improved with the needle.

The designs made in this manner possess more delicacy as well as more
strength than the ordinary crayon designs, and there remains to be
desired only that they might have the advantage of the latter of being
worked black on white, as it is so much easier for the artist to judge
his work on the stone.

Of trials made in this direction, the two following ones met my views
the best.

One way is to grind the stone rough, pour diluted aquafortis and nutgall
over it, clean it with water and dry it. Then the design is drawn on it
with a black chalk made of oil of vitriol, tartar, and lampblack. The
further treatment is the same as that in the case of designs done with
preparing-ink.

I have not been able to give enough time to this process to invent
a preparing-crayon that shall be very hard without losing its
preparing-property. However, the compound mentioned will produce a
crayon with which one can work well after a few days. It has the
advantage that it may be rubbed on a shading-stump made of rolled paper,
which will prove excellent for working the finest shadings into the
plate.

The other way is as follows: A colorless chemical ink is made of one
part wax, two parts tallow, and one part soap. This I dissolved in water
and with it I coated the stone, which had been ground rough and prepared
with phosphoric acid, nutgall, and gum, and then washed with water. The
coating was applied very lightly, but enough so that it could bear the
succeeding etching.

As soon as it was dry, I drew the design on it with a black crayon made
of tartar, gum, a little sugar, and a good amount of lampblack, or I
used the ordinary black Paris crayon or a fine English lead pencil. Then
the design was etched, after which alum water was poured over it, and it
was set aside to dry.

As soon as it was absolutely dry, I coated it with fatty color, and then
cleaned the stone with oil of turpentine and gum solution. If I wanted
an exceedingly smooth surface, I ground the stone gently; but then the
design had to be etched deeply.

The good results of these two experiments led me to the following
process: By following my instructions exactly the worker can produce
striking imitations of wash as well as crayon drawings, and at the same
time unite the greatest possible ease of drawing as well as certainty of
good impressions, so that this process really deserves to be called one
of the very best of all printing-methods.

The outlines of the drawing must be drawn on the finest and thinnest
paper that can be obtained. Then a very finely polished stone is
prepared with aquafortis and gum, or, better still, with phosphoric
acid, nutgall, and gum, cleansed with water and dried. Then it is coated
very thinly with tallow, which is patted with a very clean leather ball
or with the hand, so that it shall be very uniformly laid over the
stone. Everything depends on the thinness and uniformity of this tallow
coating. Then the stone must be smoked with a wax torch or a tallow
candle. The durability of the ground depends on this smoking, as without
it a very thin coating of tallow would be penetrated by the acid.

Now the stone is ready for the design. It must not be touched by so much
as a finger. The designed paper is pasted to the stone at the ends,
without pulling, as the least motion would injure the stone's surface.
The arrangement of elevated supports for the hand (previously described)
is needed for the succeeding work. The drawing is then done on the paper
with Paris chalk, delicate Spanish chalk, an English lead pencil, or
with a small piece of lead. All that is drawn on the paper will impress
itself on the stone underneath and remove the ground at those places,
thus opening the surface for etching.

When the drawing is finished, it is etched and covered as with the
etched process, and afterward is printed as in that process.

When sufficient practice has made one a master of this style, it will be
amazing what great perfection, what miniature-like delicacy, and also
what strength can be obtained by proper etching.

Besides, this latter process is applicable in combination with the
etched process.


VII

TOUCHE DRAWING WITH ETCHING INK

This method is very useful for filling-out etched or engraved designs,
also for correcting and completing the various aquatint processes.

Dip a little brush into lemon juice mixed with a little lampblack and
draw the design on the finely polished and prepared stone. The acid
will eat little holes into it, which will take color if the lemon juice
is washed away as soon as it has completed its etching, and the etched
part has been dried and rubbed-in with fat color. To produce darker
shadings it can be laid on the same place twice, and for lighter
shadings the acid either is washed away sooner or diluted with water.

I do not doubt that a skillful chemist could invent an etching ink which
would be even more perfect, and then a drawing could be washed on the
stone as easily as on paper, which would mean immense advance for the
art.



CHAPTER III

MIXED METHODS


Stone-printing has the unique property, owned by no other process, that
it is possible to print relief and intaglio simultaneously. This
property makes possible so many combinations of the two processes that a
book might be filled with their description. I assume, however, that the
reader will have understood the entire science of the new art from what
I have said, and that his own reflection will tell him what methods to
use or to combine for each of his purposes. I limit myself, therefore,
to a few leading methods, thus giving some fundamental idea of the
manipulations.


I

PEN DESIGN COMBINED WITH ENGRAVING

This can be utilized in two ways:--

When the pen drawing is finished and etched, the stone may be coated
with red gum covering and the needle used to draw-in the finest lines.
The printing is the same as with pen work. The second way is to make the
engraved or etched part of the design first, and after the stone has
been rubbed-in with acid-proof ink, cleansed and dried, to draw-in the
rest with the pen and chemical ink. As soon as the design is properly
dried, it is etched a little and prepared, and otherwise handled like an
ordinary pen drawing.

Both ways carry the advantage that the pen can be used for those parts
best done with the pen, and the engraving-tool for those parts best done
with it. The latter is especially excellent for very fine and elegant
script, such as title-pages, the finest strokes being made first with
the needle and the broader ones with the pen.


II

INTAGLIO DESIGN WITH RELIEF TINT

This has been described thoroughly in our chapter on etched work.


III

INTAGLIO AND RELIEF WITH SEVERAL PLATES

As already shown, intaglio and relief can be printed on one stone.
Therefore it is evident that the two methods can be utilized still
better for several plates, for instance, printing on an etched design
with one or more plates that are tinted in relief, or by printing over a
crayon or pen design in relief a tone plate in aquatint in intaglio.

How to do this has been explained in the descriptions of relief and
intaglio methods.


IV

TRANSFORMING RELIEF INTO INTAGLIO AND VICE VERSA

This is, so to speak, the test of a good lithographer, as it is the most
difficult of all methods, and demands exact knowledge of all
manipulations. I will try to explain it with a few examples.

EXAMPLE I

_To etch a transfer into intaglio_

Prepare a finely ground plate with phosphoric acid and gum, wash very
well with water, and let it dry. Now transfer to it a design made with
soft ink or crayon, or a fresh copper-plate impression. Let the stone
rest for a few hours, that the fatty colors may take hold well. Coat it
with clean gum water, and with a rag dipped into acid-proof ink try to
rub about as much color on the design as appears to be required to make
it withstand some etching. This etching is done with pure aquafortis
which in addition has a little alum mixed with it. Etch only enough to
eat away the uppermost parts of the prepared surface that have not been
permeated with fat. Pour clean water over the whole stone and coat it
with strong soap-water that is permitted to dry on it. Finally, clean
away the soap with oil of turpentine. Ink-in with acid-proof color which
will color the whole stone. Now as soon as it is wiped gently with a rag
dipped in gum solution and weak phosphoric acid, the whole design will
appear in white as if it had been made with preparing-ink. If the stone
is inked now with acid-proof ink and treated exactly as instructed in
the article on the use of preparing-ink, the design that was in relief
originally will be found in intaglio.

This process is capable of great perfection and can produce true
masterpieces especially if the stone is treated finally with the
engraving tool.

EXAMPLE II

_To etch into intaglio a design made with chemical fatty ink or crayon_

Etch and prepare the clean stone with phosphoric acid and gum. Then put
on the design with ink or crayon, and perform the succeeding etching and
other manipulations exactly as in the preceding case.

EXAMPLE III

_To etch into intaglio any design etched into relief_

In the two examples given, the plate is etched with phosphoric acid
before transfers or designs are made on it. As the weak etching with
aquafortis and alum does not penetrate the places where there is fat,
these retain their phosphorus-preparation, and thus are not so readily
destroyed by the succeeding application of soap, whereas the etched
parts immediately drink in the fat as soon as the soap touches them.

In stones designed in the ordinary way, where the design does not lie on
the prepared surface, but has really penetrated well into the stone, the
transforming is somewhat more difficult, but can always be done after
practice by using the following means:--

Wash the stone with water and then coat chemical ink or strong
soap-water over it and let it dry. Then clean the stone with oil of
turpentine and ink-in well with acid-proof color. Dip a linen rag into
gum water and phosphoric acid and endeavor to wipe away the color from
the relief design. After wiping to and fro quickly a few times, try with
the finger if the design will not whiten, or if the wiping with the acid
must be continued. Care must be taken not to injure the ground through
too much pressure. When the design gets pretty white, ink the stone with
firm acid-proof ink, and then treat as in the preceding cases.

In this way designs in relief that have not turned out as desired can be
changed into intaglio, and then, by the use of successive coatings and
etchings, as described before, improved by making gradations of tones.
But it requires great skill, lacking which one may destroy his plates
utterly.

EXAMPLE IV

_To change an intaglio design into relief for easier printing_

Many kinds of scripts and designs are easier to engrave with a needle
than to do in relief with a pen; or one may have workmen who can use the
engraving tool better than the pen, as the use of the latter requires
more industry and skill than the use of the etching- or
engraving-needle.

If one wishes to transform such a design into one in relief, because
then it can be printed more quickly and easily and also will give more
impressions, the following method will prove useful:--

Ink the stone with good acid-proof ink, and after a few hours etch it
like a pen design till it is apparent that the design is showing up. Let
it rest again a few hours after etching and become quite dry. Then coat
with gum. Otherwise treat it for printing like an ordinary pen design.

       *       *       *       *       *

Now I believe that I have described faithfully and as clearly as I can
all the lithographic methods to which unceasing research and endless
experimentation have led me. In the following Appendix I merely make a
few useful remarks, which do not pertain exclusively to lithography, yet
are intimately connected with it and surely will not be unwelcome to art
lovers.

[Illustration]



APPENDIX


I

PRINTING WITH WATER AND OIL COLORS SIMULTANEOUSLY

When a plate, whether intaglio or relief, has been inked-in with oil
color, it may be coated with one water color, or it may be illuminated
with several, and then printed-off in one impression. Two parts of gum
and one part of sugar are used for this. They can be dissolved with any
water color. Care need be taken merely that the colors are well dried
before the impression is made.

If, however, it is desired that the colors have shades so that the
impressions may resemble English or French colored copper-plate prints,
the process is as follows:--

Etch all shades of the color pretty deeply in any of the stippled or
aquatint styles. After this, coat the stone with gum solution, that it
shall take no color in these depressions. Clean off the chemical ink or
the ground with oil of turpentine, and prepare the whole plate if it has
not been prepared already on its surface. Then coat it with red gum
surface, and into this inscribe all those lines that are to remain
black. Then the color is rubbed-in and the stone cleansed so that it
will be white everywhere except in the engraved parts. When it is
inked-in now, it can take color there only, and the other depressions
(namely the various shades of the color) will remain white because they
have been prepared. Now it is necessary only to coat each part with the
desired water color and it will be denser, and therefore darker,
wherever there are more and greater depressions.


II

SIMULTANEOUS CHEMICAL AND MECHANICAL PRINTING

When a pen drawing is so constituted that the various lines are close
together and there is no white space on it that is greater than at most
one half inch in diameter, it will permit printing in a purely
mechanical way without being prepared. It need merely be etched into
all the relief possible without under-eating the lines. All that is
needed then is a color-board or a so-called dauber, made as follows:--

A thin board of soft wood, about eight inches long and six inches wide,
is planed down till it is not more than one line in thickness. Glue on
it a piece of fine cloth or felt almost as large as it. Over this glue
another board, of the same area as the first, but one quarter inch
thick. It must be very well-dried wood, and must be made very true with
the plane, or better still, by rubbing on a perfectly level stone with
sand. This latter board is provided with a handle; and when all is dry
this dauber is ground off true again with fine sand and oil on a stone.

Lay the printing-color on this utensil very gently and uniformly with a
leather ball. Tap and pat the stone, which has first been cleaned with
oil of turpentine over its whole surface, very carefully with the
appliance, holding it as horizontal as possible and taking great pains
to distribute the color evenly.

As compared with chemical printing, this process in itself has no
advantages, but can be united with it and thus used to print three
colors from one plate. This is shown by the following

EXAMPLE

Suppose that a design shall be colored black, blue, and red, and that
all these colors shall be put simultaneously on one plate. Take a stone
made ready for pen work, and prepare it first of all with phosphoric
acid, nutgall, and gum, then wash it with water, and let it dry. Now
draw-in all that is to be red with chemical ink, that must, however,
contain only just enough soap to permit its solution. When this drawing
is dry, etch it into pretty high relief, the higher the better. After
this prepare the stone with gum, wash it, and let it dry again. Then
coat it with etching-ground that has been dissolved in oil of
turpentine, and draw-in all that is to be black, between and over the
high etched parts. Then etch this design pretty powerfully into
intaglio, after which wash with water, rinse with alum solution, and
dry. When the plate is thoroughly dry, rub-in printing-color, and clean
with a woolen rag dipped into gum solution and oil of turpentine. Then
it will become white everywhere except in the deep lines where it will
have taken color. After cleansing again with water and drying, draw-in
all parts that are to be blue, using a chemical ink that contains a
great deal of soap. Let this dry well, and cleanse the plate with gum
and oil of turpentine again. Then it is ready for inking-in.

To lay on the color, proceed as follows:--

First the black is rubbed-in, as prescribed in the article on the
intaglio style. In the very deep parts the stone will get very black. In
the parts last drawn, that are level with the surface, it will be only
gray, if the color permits ready wiping, which can be facilitated by the
use of gum and a woolen rag. Then the tone remaining on the level parts
drawn with the chemical ink will be so pale that it will not affect the
blue color. Now wipe a rag dipped in blue color gently to and fro till
everything that is to be blue has taken the color well. Then take the
dauber which has been filled with red color, and pat the stone, which
should be dry by that time. Then the parts of the design in high relief
will take the red color, and thus an impression can be made with the
three colors at once. Each inking-in must be done the same way.


III

USE OF THE STONE FOR COTTON-PRINTING THROUGH WIPING. A UNIQUE PRINTING
PROCESS

Etched copper plates have been used for some considerable time for
cotton-printing, and as the ordinary oil colors were not suitable for
this, while the suitable colors were too fluid, so that they were always
wiped out of the engravings, another method was devised. The plate was
covered with color and then a kind of straight edge was scraped across
it, which removed all color from the surface, leaving it only in the
depressions.

This same sort of wiping is applicable to stone, and it is necessary
merely to see that the stone is very even and highly polished. The color
must be one that permits itself to be wiped off clean, and the wiper
must be very uniform and sharp.

Starch-paste or gum with some caustic material is easily scraped off.


IV

COLOR PRINT WITH WIPING

This process is also useful for printing papers such as cotton papers,
tapestry, etc. Almost all intaglio designs permit good printing in this
way, if a handsome color is used.

Fresh cheese, or drops of congealed milk, mixed with soap, potash,
linseed oil varnish, and the desired tint, make an excellent
composition, with which all intaglio designs, even aquatints, can be
printed handsomely if the plate is very smooth.

If the design is made well, the various colors can be laid on quite
roughly, care being taken merely that each color shall be laid only
where it is desired. Then the stone should be permitted to dry, after
which all the surplus colors can be scraped away with one manipulation,
without danger that one will mix with the other in the design.


V

OIL-PAINTING PRINT THROUGH TRANSFER

Colored impressions resembling oil paintings can be made by printing
with colors and several plates on paper grounded with oil color. But
perfect oil paintings are produced only as follows:--

Make a considerable quantity of special paper by coating unsized paper
thinly with starch-paste or glue. On this make the separate impressions
from each color plate. If the painting itself is to be produced from
these separate parts, take a canvas that has been prepared for oil
painting and lay on it a wetted impression of one of the colors, let us
say, red. Print this off under light tension of the press, and when the
paper is pulled away, it will be seen that the color has been
transferred to the canvas. Then a wet impression of another color is
laid carefully in place so that it will register exactly, and the
process is repeated, till all the colors have been transferred to the
canvas.

The transferring can be done with the hand or with any other method, as
no great power is needed, since the color transfers itself readily.


VI

STONE-PAPER

This is the name already generally adopted for a substitute invented by
me for the Solenhofen stones.

I had been trying for a long time to invent some stone-like mixture that
would be equally suitable for printing. The ordinary parchment of the
writing-tablets would do if its surface were not soluble in water. I
made considerable progress with a composition of lime and freshly
congealed milk after the mixture had aged enough so that the lime could
sate itself with oxygen. Then I made a composition of chalk, gypsum, and
glue, which I dipped into a solution of nutgall and alum, and I was able
to use this for coarser work, at least, if not too many impressions were
required.

I did not get a wholly satisfactory idea, however, until I observed that
fat spots that were caused on a stone by oil, and also designs that had
been transferred to the stone with mere oil color, refused to take color
after a few weeks if they were prepared in only the slightest degree.

I reasoned from this that oil suffered a change from exposure to air,
and by combining itself presumably with oxygen acquired a more earthy
character. This deduction may be correct or not; but it led me to
experiment with oil as a binder for various earthy substances, because I
reasoned that such a composition would be insoluble in water. The only
question, then, would be if despite the intermixed oil it would permit
itself to be prepared, that is, if it could be made resistant to other
fats.

The result justified my hopes so thoroughly that I am convinced now that
with various compositions of clay, chalk, linseed oil, and metallic
oxides a stone-like mass can be made that is excellent for coating
paper, linen, wood, metal, etc., and thus for making plates that not
only replace the stone for printing, but in many cases are far superior
to it.

I shall give the world a book soon about these fortunate attempts of
mine, and thus perhaps give expert chemists an opportunity to perfect my
invention still more.


VII

CHEMICAL PRINT ON METAL PLATES

All metals have great inclination for fats; but if they are quite clean,
being ground with pumice, for instance, or rubbed-down with chalk, they
can be prepared like a stone, that is, they acquire the property of
resisting oil color, thus becoming available for chemical printing.

Iron and zinc can be prepared like the stone with aquafortis and gum.

To prepare zinc and lead, aquafortis with nutgall and gum will serve,
but a slight admixture of blue vitriol will make still a better
preparation, and this in a degree that improves according to the amount
of copper that the surface acquires from the coating. The most durable
preparation for lead and zinc is a mixture of aquafortis, gum, and
nitrate of copper.

Brass and copper are best prepared with aquafortis, gum, and nitrate of
lime, all mixed in proper proportions.

Lime and gum are a good preparation for all metals; also potash with
salt and gum.

This alkaline preparation, however, is applicable only for the intaglio
style. For the relief style, the acids are better.

Recently I have applied chemical printing from metal plates to a new
form of copying-machines, with which everything written or drawn with
chemical ink or crayon on paper can be transferred in a few moments and
manifolded several hundred times. His Royal Majesty of Bavaria has had
the supreme condescension to grant me a six years' patent on this
invention.

Until now I have not been able to give this matter the necessary
attention because the work of publishing this book hindered me; but now
I shall make such a stock of these simple, convenient, and so widely
useful hand-presses that it will be worth while to open a subscription,
which would enable me to sell them for a low price. This would please me
best, as my highest reward would be the general use of my inventions, to
fulfill which desire I have taken the utmost pains in this work.

In the last parts of the book I have gone less into details, merely
because I assume that those who have mastered the first parts of this
work will not need many words to understand the rest.

If the demand for this perhaps prematurely announced book had not become
so vehement lately that I could not possibly delay its publication any
longer, I should have tried to produce sample illustrations that combine
inner art value with good printing. As it is, I postpone this for a
supplementary volume soon to appear, in which I shall occupy myself
mainly with processes and methods not yet generally known, representing
each by means of a true work of art. With which I now end my text-book,
with the hearty wish that it will find many friends and create many good
lithographers. This may God grant!


    The Riverside Press

    PRINTED BY H. O. HOUGHTON & CO.
    CAMBRIDGE, MASS.
    U.S.A.


       *       *       *       *       *


TRANSCRIBER'S NOTES:

Punctuation and spelling standardized.

Inconsistent hyphenation retained.

This book has no Table of Contents for Section I.





*** End of this LibraryBlog Digital Book "The Invention of Lithography" ***

Copyright 2023 LibraryBlog. All rights reserved.